NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 4 Tansen Question And Answers

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 4 Tansen Question And Answers

The following chapter ‘Tansen’ recounts the tale of the greatest musician of India – Tansen. The chapter discusses the importance of information and the wisdom required to find solutions. It also celebrates the life and extraordinary achievements of the great singer Tansen.

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 4 Tansen Question And Answers

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 4 Tansen, The Greatest Musician Of India

Tansen is said to be the greatest musician in our country. He was the only child of singer Mukundan Misra. They lived in Behat, near Gwalior. Tansen was a naughty child and used to play in the forest.

Read and Learn More NCERT Solutions for Class 6 English

He could perfectly copy the calls of birds and animals. When famous singer Swami Haridas and his disciples were traveling through the forest, Tansen tried to scare them by roaring like a tiger.

Swami Haridas asked his disciples not to be afraid as tigers are not always dangerous. Then, one of his disciples noticed Tansen hiding behind a tree.

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 4 Tansen Became Swami Haridas’ Disciple

Swami Haridas did not punish Tansen. He met Tansen’s father and told him that Tansen had great talent to become a great singer. So, ten-year-old Tansen went away with Swami Haridas and learned music for eleven years.

He became a great singer. To fulfill the dying wish of his father, he went to Gwalior to visit Mohammad Ghaus, a holy man. Tansen often visited the court of Rani Mrignaini, who was a great musician herself.

Tansen Class 6 NCERT Question and Answers

There he married one of the court ladies named Hussaini. They had five children together. Their children also had musical talent, Tansen became very famous for his singing and often sang before Emperor Akbar who was impressed with him and asked him to join his court.

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 4 Tansen In The Court Of Emperor Akbar

Tansen joined Akbar’s court in 1556 and became his favorite. Akbar appreciated Tansen and would visit him to listen to Tansen singing. He also gave Tansen many presents. As a result, the other courtiers became jealous. They wanted to ruin Tansen.

One of the courtiers named Shauqat Mian planned to kill Tansen by making him sing Raga Deepak. He knew that Tansen would sing the Raga so well that he would be burnt to ashes.

So, he went to Akbar and told him that the courtiers didn’t believe that Tansen was a great singer. He asked the Emperor to make Tansen sing the Raga Deepak because only the greatest of singers could sing it properly. Emperor Akbar ordered Tansen to sing Raga Deepak to prove that he was a great singer.

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 4 Tansen’s Smart Plan

Tansen was afraid but agreed to sing Raga Deepak. However, he asked for some time to prepare and went home unhappily. He was worried about singing Raga Deepak because it would burn him to ashes. Then, he got an idea.

Tansen taught his daughter Saraswati and her friend Rupavati the Raga Megh. Raga Megh could counter the effects of Raga Deepak by bringing rain and thus save his life. He instructed them to only start singing when the lamps had begun burning.

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 4 Tansen Sang Raga Deepak

The entire town assembled to hear Tansen sing Raga Deepak. As he sang, the air became warm. Soon, the rivers began boiling and birds dropped dead. When flames shot up and lighted the lamps; Saraswati and Rupavati started singing Raga Megh. The rain fell down and although Tansen was saved, he fell severely ill.

Emperor Akbar was regretful of causing so much suffering for Tansen. Akbar punished the jealous courtiers and Tansen remained his court singer till 1585 when he died. Tansen’s tomb in Gwalior is a holy place for musicians even today.

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 4 Word Meaning

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 4 Tansen Question And Answers Word Meaning

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 4 Tansen Question And Answers Word Meaning.

 

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 4 Answer The Following Questions

Question 1. Why did Swami Haridas say Tansen was ‘talented’?
Answer: Swami Haridas called Tansen talented because he was able to imitate a tiger’s roar so perfectly that people got scared.

Question 2. Why did Akbar ask Tansen to join his court?
Answer: Emperor Akbar asked Tansen to join his court because Tansen was a great singer and Akbar was very impressed with his singing.

Question 3. How do we know that Akbar was fond of Tansen? Give two reasons.
Answer: Akbar was fond of Tansen. We know this because Akbar admired his singing and asked him to sing at any time of the day. Akbar also gave Tansen many presents and loved to walk into Tansen’s house just to hear him practicing.

Question 4. what did the other courtiers feel about Tansen?
Answer: The other courtiers were jealous of Tansen. they wanted to ruin Tansen and could do anything to get rid of him.

Question 5. what happens if raga deepak is sung properly? why did Tansen’s enemies want him to sing the raga?
Answer: 

  1. If raga deepak is sung properly, it produces so much heat that the singer himself will be burnt to ashes.
  2. Hansen’s enemies wanted him to sing raga Deepak because they were jealous of Tansen’s popularity and wanted to kill him. they knew that when raga deepak is properly sung, the ginger himself is burnt to death.

Question 6. Why did Tansen agree to sing Raga Deepak?
Answer: Tansen agreed to sing Raga Deepak because he could not disobey the emperor. He also wanted to prove his potential.

Class 6 English Chapter 4 Tansen NCERT Solutions

Question 7. What steps did he take to save himself? (or) Did his plan work? How?
Answer: Tansen took two steps to save himself. First, he requested Emperor Akbar to give him some time to prepare for the performance. Second, he taught his daughter and her friend to sing ‘Raga Megh’to to stop the effects of Raga Deepak and save his life.

Yes, Tansen’s plan worked. When he started singing Raga Deepak the air became warm and the leaves dried up. Soon enough, birds fell dead because ofthe heat, and the water in the rivers began to boil.

Then flames shot up out of nowhere and lit the lamps. However, when Saraswati and Rupvati began singing Raga Megh as per Tansen’s plan the sky clouded over.

Question 8. Are you interested in music? Do you like classical music? Name a few distinguished Indian musicians.
Answer: Yes, I am interested in music. I like classical music very much. I particularly admire the beautiful song Mile sur Mera Tumoral (As our tunes merge), which was televised on Doordarshan.

It contains the classical music and languages of many states of India. Some of the distinguished Indian musicians I know about are Pandit Bhimsen |oshi, Vidwaan Balamurali Krishna, Lata Mangeshkar, Kavita Krishnamurthy, and Amjad Ali Khan

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 4 Multiple Choice Questions

Question 1. Tansen was the only child of ………….

  1. Mukesh Misra
  2. Abhinandan Misra
  3. Mukandan Misra
  4. Swagat Misra

Answer: 3. Mukandan Misra

Question 2. Where did Mukandan Misra live?

  1. Ranchi, Chhattisgarh
  2. Behat near Gwalior
  3. Behat near Patna
  4. Delhi

Answer: 2. Behat near Gwalior

Question 3. ‘strangers in the forest! Who said the following and to whom?

  1. Tansen to Swami Haridas
  2. Tansen to himself
  3. Swami Haridas to Tansen
  4. Tansen to Mohammad Ghaus

Answer: 2. Tansen to himself

Question 4. How old was Tansen when he went with Swami Haridas?

  1. 12 years old
  2. 11 years old
  3. 13 years old
  4. 10 Yearsold

Answer: 4. 10 Years Old

Question 5. Who Was The Guru Of Tansen?

  1. Swami Ravidas
  2. Swami Haridas
  3. Swami Ramdev
  4. Swami Vivekananda

Answer: 2. Swami Haridas

NCERT Solutions for Class 6 English Chapter 4 Tansen

Question 6. Who Was The Holy Man That Mukandan Misra Was A Disciple Of?

  1. Swami Haridas
  2. Akbar
  3. Mohammad Ghaus
  4. Shaukat Mian

Answer: 3. Mohammad Ghaus

Question 7. Read The Given Statements And Choose The Correct Answer.

  1. Statement 1 Rani Mri Naini Was A Famous Singer Herself.
  2. Statement 2 Tansen Married Rani Mrignaini And Had Five Children With Her.
  3. Statement 1 Is Correct, But Statement 2 Is Incorrect.
  4. Statement 1 Is Incorrect, But Statement 2 Is Correct.
  5. Both The Statements Are Correct.
  6. Both The Statements Are Incorrect.

Answer: 1. Statement 1 Is Correct, But Statement 2 Is Incorrect.

Question 8. Who Insisted That Tansen Should Join The Emperor’s Court?

  1. Shaukat Mian
  2. Swami Haridas
  3. Rupvati
  4. Akbar

Answer: 4. Akbar

Question 9. Arrange the following options in the correct sequence.

  1. Tansen joined the court of Emperor Akbar.
  2. Swami Haridas made Tansen his disciple.
  3. Saraswati and Rupvati sang Raag Megha.
  4. Tansen’s parents died with the wish that
  5. Tansen should visit Mohammad Ghaus of Gwalior

Choose The Correct Option

  1. (1), (2), (3), (4)
  2. (4), (3), (2), (1)
  3. (2), (4), (1) (3)
  4. (4), (1), (2), (3)

Answer: 3. (2), (4), (1), (3)

Question 10. What happens when Raga Megh is sung properly?

  1. The singer is burnt to ashes.
  2. The singer can control water.
  3. The singer can bring rain.
  4. The singer can make the Sunshine.
  5. The singer can bring rain.

Question 11. Tansen taught ………and ……… to sing Raga Megh.

  1. Saraswati and Shaukat
  2. Saraswati and Rupvati
  3. Hussaini and Rupvati
  4. Hussaini and Saraswati
  5. Saraswati and Rupvati

Read the sentences carefully and choose the correct answer.

  1. Statement 1 Shaukat Mian planned to make Tansen sing Raga Deepak.
  2. Statement 2 Tansen was worried because he could not sing Raga Deepak properly.
  3. Statement 1 is correct but statement 2 is incorrect.
  4. Statement 1 is incorrect but statement 2 is correct.
  5. Both statements are correct.
  6. Both the statements are incorrect.

Answer: 1. Statement I is correct but statement 2 is incorrect.

Tansen Class 6 NCERT Questions and Answers

Question 13. Who assembled to hear Tansen sing Raga Deepak?

  1. The entire court
  2. The entire district
  3. The entire town
  4. The royal family

Answer: The entire town

Question 13. How did the people react when flames shot up and lighted the lamps?

  1. They ran away
  2. They stayed still
  3. They cried out in terror
  4. They laughed

Answer: They cried out in terror

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 4 Extra Based Questions

Read The Extract Given And Answer The Following Questions.

Swami Haridas Did Not Punish Him. He went to Tansen’s Father And Said, “Your Son Is Very Naughty. He Is Also very talented. I think I Can Make Him A Good Singer.” Tansen Was Ten Years Old When He Went Away With Swami Haridas.

He Lived With Him For Eleven Years, Learning Music, And Became A Great Singer. At About This Time, His Parents Died. Mukandan Misra’s Dying Wish Was That Tansen Should Visit Mohammad Ghaus Of Gwalior.

Mohammad Ghaus Was A Holy Man. Mukundan Mishra Had Long Been Devoted To Him And Often Visited Him.

Question 1. Why Didn’t Swami Haridas Punish Tansen?
Answer: Swami Haridas Didn’t Punish Tansen Because It Was A Child’s Mischief.

Question 2. How Did Swami Haridas Make Tansen A Great Musician?
Answer: Swami Haridas Made Tansen A Great Musician By Teaching Him Everything About Singing And Music For Eleven Long Years.

Question 3. Why Did Mukandan Misra Want Tansen To Meet Mohammad Ghaus?
Answer: Mukandan Misra Wanted Tansen To Meet Mohammad Ghaus Because He Had Been A Disciple Of Mohammad Ghaus For A Long Time.

Question 4. What Does The Phrase ‘Dying Wish’ Mean?
Answer: The Phrase ‘Dying Wish’ Means The Final Request Of Someone Who Is About To Die.

Question 5. Tansen Went To Patna To Meet Mohammad Ghaus. Ls The Given Statement True Or False?
Answer: False. Tansen Went To Gwalior To Meet Mohammad Ghaus.

Question 2. Read The Extract Given And Answer The Following Questions.
Tansen Went To Akbar’s Court In 1-556 And Soon Became A Great Favourite Of The Emperor. Akbar Would Call Upon Tansen To Sing At Any Time During The Day Or Night. Quite Often He Would Just Walk Into Tansen’s House To Hear Him Practice. Some Of The Courtiers Became Jealous Of Tansen. “We Shall Never Be Able To Rest Till Tansen Is Ruined,” They Declared. One Of The Courtiers, Shaukat Mian, Had A Bright Idea. “Let Us Make Him Sing Raga

Deepak”, He said. “How Will Help Us?” Asked Another Man. “if Raga Deepak Is Properly Sung, It Makes The Air So Hot That The Singer Is Burnt To Ashes. Tansen Is A Very Good Singer. If He Sings Raga Deepak, He Willdie, And We Will Be Rid Of Him.”

1. Who Was Shaukat Mian?

  1. The Crown Prince
  2. Tansen’s Brother
  3. Hussaini’s Father
  4. A Courtier In Emperor Akbar’s Court

Answer: 4. A Courtier In Emperor Akbar’s Court

2. Why Would Akbar Walk Into Tansen’s Home?

  1. To Catch Him Resting
  2. To Hear Him Practice
  3. To Fly Kites With Him
  4. To Eat Dinner With Him

Answer: 2. To Hear Him Practise

NCERT Solutions for Chapter 4 Tansen

3. What did Emperor Akbar give to Tansen?

  1. Pot of honey
  2. Presents
  3. Many hugs
  4. Expensive wine

Answer: 2. Presents

4. Why did Shaukat Mian believe that Tansen would be able to sing raga Deepak properly?

  1. Because he believed in Tansen.
  2. Because he had taught Tansen to sing.
  3. Because he knew Tansen was a great singer.
  4. Because he would help Tansen with practice.

Answer: 3. Because he knew Tansen was a great singer.

5. How could the air become hot enough to kill Tansen?

  1. Burning a lamp
  2. Burning a bonfire
  3. By singing Raga Deepak properly
  4. By burning the entire kingdom

Answer: 3. By singing Raga Deepak properly

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 4 Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1. Who Was Tansen?
Answer: Tansen Was The Greatest Musician Of India Who Sang In The Court Of Emperor Akbar.

Question 2. Why Did Tansen Go To Gwalior? Diksha
Answer: Tansen Went To Gwalior To Fulfill His Father, Mukandan Misra’s Dying Wish That His Son Tansen Should Visit Mohammad Ghaus Of Gwalior.

Question 3. What Was Tansen Famous For? Diksha
Answer: Tansen Was Famous For Being The Greatest Singer In India.

Question 4. What Did The Other Courtiers Feel About Tansen3,
Answer: The Other Courtiers Were Jealous Of Tansen And Wanted To Get Rid Of Him.

Question 5. Why Did The Courtiers Become Jealous Of Tansen?
Answer: The Courtiers Were Jealous Of Tansen Because He Had Became A Favourite Of The Emperor Akbar.

Question 6. What Was The Reason Behind Tansen’s Worries?
Answer: Tansen Was Ordered By Emperor Akbar To Sing Raga Deepak, Which If Sung Properly, Could Burn Him To Ashes. So, He Was Worried About It.

Tansen Chapter 4 NCERT Notes

Question 7. What Happens If Someone Sings Raga Megh Properly?
Answer: If someone sings Raga Megh properly the sky gets clouded and it results in rainfall.

Question 8. What Happened After Tansen’s Performance?
Answer: Tansen Became Very Ill After His Performance.

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 4 Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1. Do You Think Tansen Was Naughty During His Childhood? Give Reasons To Support Your Answer. Or Tansen Was A Naughty Boy. Justify.
Answer: Yes, Tansen Was Very Naughty During His Childhood’ He Used To Copy The Calls Of Birds And Animals. Once, He Scared The Disciples Of Swami Haridas Who Visited A Forest By Roaring Like A Tiger.

Question 2. How Did Tansen Marry Hussaini? Or How Did Tansen Meet His Wife?
Answer: While Living With Mohammad Ghaus Of Gwalior, Tansen Was Taken To Visit The Court Of Rani Mrignaini’ Who Was A Great Musician Herself. There, He Met And Married One Of The Court Ladies Named Hussaini

Question 3. Why Was Tansen Afraid Of Singing Raga Deepak?
Answer: Tansen Was Afraid Of Singing Raga Deepak Because If It Is Sung Properly, It Makes The Air So Hot That The Singer Is Burnt To Ashes. Tansen Was Aware That If He Sang Raga Deepak, He Would Die.

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 4 Long Answer Type Questions

Question 1. How did Tansen manage to save his life from the deadly plan of Shaukat Mian?
Answer: Shauqat Mian and other courtiers wanted to kill Tansen so they planned to make him sing Raga Deepak. If Tansen sang the Raga correctly, he would be burnt to ashes by its effects. Tansen figured out a solution. He taught his daughter Saraswati and her friend Rupavati to sing Raga Megh.

When he started singing Raga Deepak, the birds fell dead because of the heat and the water in the rivers began to boil. Then, flames shot up out of nowhere and lit the lamps. As instructed, the two girls began singing Raga Megh and the sky clouded over. When the rain came down Tansen’s life was saved. Though he became quite ill afterward, he survived the deadly plan of Shaukat Mian

Question 2. Who was the greatest musician of lndia? Describe his life.
Answer: Tansen was the greatest musician in India. He was the only child of Mukandan Misra and his wife. They lived in Behat near Gwalior. Tansen was a naughty child and could copy the calls of birds and animals.

Swarni Haridas told his father that Tansen could be a good singer. So, Tansen lived with Haridas for eleven years. He became a great singer. He married Hussaini and had five children. Tansen became famous and sang before Akbar who was impressed with him. He went to Akbar’s court in 1556. He became Akbar’s favorite and composed many new ragas in his patronage.

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 3 The Shepherd’s Treasure Question And Answers

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 3 The Shepherd’s Treasure Question And Answers

This chapter contains the famous Iranian folktale of a wise shepherd. The story teaches us the importance of values like honesty, wisdom, and kindness. Through this story, we learn how being honest and wise can lead to a shepherd impressing a king and becoming a governor.

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 3 The Wise Shepherd Of Iran

A wise shepherd lived in a village in Iran. He was very poor and did not even own a small cottage. Since there were very few schools in those days, he was uneducated and could not read, or write.

Read and Learn More NCERT Solutions for Class 6 English

But he was known to be very wise and people came to him for advice. He would always help people face their problems with bravery and common sense.

Soon, he became famous for his wisdom and the king of Iran decided to meet him. The king wore the disguise of a shepherd and rode a mule to his cave. The shepherd welcomed him and gave him water and food.

The King was impressed by the wisdom and hospitality (care) of the shepherd. When he was leaving the next day, the shepherd addressed him as the king and thanked him for visiting. The king was impressed that the shepherd recognized him even if he was disguised.

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 3 Shepherd Becomes The New Governor

The king found the shepherd extremely wise and decided to have him work for the kingdom. So, he appointed the shepherd as the governor of a small district. The humble shepherd continued to help people wisely and his fame grew even further. The governors of other provinces grew jealous ofthe shepherd’s popularity. They told the king that the shepherd was dishonest and that he collected illegal taxes from the people. They said that the shepherd kept his treasure in an iron chest.

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 3 The Shepherd's Treasure Question And Answers

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 3 The Shepherd Impressed Everyone

Initially, the king ignored the other governors. However, he grew curious about the iron chest and called the shepherd to the palace. The shepherd arrived on a camel with his iron chest. The king grew angry and demanded the truth about the iron chest. The shepherd smiled and opened his treasure chest.

To everyone’s surprise, it only contained an old blanket. There was no gold, silver, or jewels. Holding up the blanket, the shepherd announced that it was his only treasure. He then explained that the blanket was his oldest friend and it would keep him warm even if the king took his new cloaks away.

The jealous governors were very embarrassed to hear the wise man’s reply. Now everyone knew that the shepherd was truly the wisest and humblest man of the land. The king was impressed and he made him the governor of a bigger district that same day”

Class 6 English Chapter 3 The Shepherd’s Treasure NCERT Solutions

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 3 Word Meaning

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 3 The Shepherd's Treasure Question And Answers Word Meaning

 

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 3 The Shepherd's Treasure Question And Answers Word Meaning.

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 3 Answer The Following Questions

Question 1. The shepherd hadn’t been to school because

  1. He was very poor.
  2. There were very few schools in those days.
  3. He wasn’t interested in studies.
  4. Choose the right answer.

Answer: 3 There were very few schools in those days.

Question 2. Who visited the shepherd one day and why? Or Why did the king want to meet the shepherd?
Answer: The king often visited the shepherd one day because the shepherd had become famous for his wisdom and friendly nature.

Question 3. Why did the other governors grow jealous of the shepherd?
Answer: The other governors grew jealous of the shepherd because he became a famous governor who was loved and respected by everyone. They were jealous that he became a favorite of the king due to his honesty and sincerity.

Question 4. Why was the new governor called to the palace? Or Why was the shepherd called to the court by the king?
Answer: The new governor was called to the palace because the jealous governors had made a complaint against him to the king. They told the king that he was dishonest and stealing money from the taxes.

Question 5. Why was everyone delighted to see the iron chest on the camel’s back?
Answer: Everyone was delighted to see the iron chest on the camel’s back because they thought that the contents of the iron chest would prove the governor’s dishonesty and he would be punished.

NCERT Solutions for Class 6 English Chapter 3 The Shepherd’s Treasure

Question 6. What did the iron chest contain?
Answer: The iron chest contained only an old blanket.

  1. Why did the shepherd always carry it?
    Answer: The shepherd always carried his blanket in the iron chest because it was his oldest friend. It would keep him warm even if the king took away his new cloaks.
  2. Is it an example of the shepherd’s humility wisdom or both?
    Answer: Yes, it is an example of the shepherd’s humility as well as wisdom.

Question 7. How did the king reward the new governor?
Answer: The king rewarded the new governor by making him the governor of a much bigger district.

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 3 Multiple Choice Questions

Question 1. The Shepherd Was …..

  1. Poor But Educated
  2. Rich And Educated
  3. poor and uneducated
  4. Rich but uneducated

Answer: Poor And Uneducated

Question 2. For What Did The Shepherd Become Famous?

  1. For His Charity
  2. For His Wisdom
  3. For His Friendliness
  4. Both (2) And (3)

Answer: 4. Both (2) And (3)

Question 3. Read The Given Sentences And Choose The Correct Option.

  1. Statement 1 The Shepherd Was Uneducated,
  2. Therefore He Had No Common Sense.
  3. Statement 2 The Shepherd Was Famous Throughout The Kingdom.
  4. Statement I Is Correct, But Statement 2 Is Incorrect.
  5. Statement 1 Is Incorrect, But Statement 2 Is Correct.
  6. Both The Statements Are Correct.
  7. Both The Statements Are Incorrect.

Answer: 1. Statement 1 Is Incorrect, But Statement 2 Is Correct.

Question 4. ‘Many Thanks For Your Kindness.’ Who Said The Following And To Whom?

  1. The Shepherd To The King
  2. The King To The Shepherd
  3. The New Governor To The Governor Of Other Province
  4. The Governor Of Other Provinces to The New Governor

Answer: 2. The King To The Shepherd

Question 5. Read The Given Sentences And Choose The Correct Option.

  1. Statement 1 The Shepherd Recognised The King Disguised As A Traveller.
  2. Statement 2 The King Was Angry At Having His Disguise Recognised.
  3. Statement 1 Is Correct, But Statement 2 Is Incorrect.
  4. Statement 1 Is Incorrect, But Statement 2 Is Correct.
  5. Both The Statements Are Correct.
  6. Both The Statements Are Incorrect.

Answer: 1. Statement 1 Is Correct, But Statement 2 Is Incorrect.

Question 6. After Becoming The Governor, The Shepherd ……….

  1. Become Arrogant
  2. Become Helpless
  3. Remained As Humble As Ever
  4. Become Lazy

Answer: 3. Remained As Humble As Ever

The Shepherd’s Treasure Class 6 NCERT Questions and Answers

Question 7. “The was kind and just to one and all.” the underlined word in the above line means

  1. Unfair
  2. Fair
  3. Humble
  4. Indifferent

Answer: 2. Fair

Question 8. What Happened When The Fame Of The New Governor Spread Throughout The Country?

  1. He Was Promoted.
  2. He Was Made The King.
  3. He Was Demoted.
  4. The Governors Of Other Provinces Grew Jealous Of Him.

Answer: 4. The Governors Of Other Provinces Grew Jealous Of Him

Question 8. What happened when the fame of the new governor spread throughout the country?

  1. He was promoted.
  2. He was made the king.
  3. He was demoted.
  4. The governors of other provinces grew jealous of him.

Answer: The governors of other provinces grew jealous of him

Question 9. Perhaps he carried in it the treasure he had secretly collected.” The opposite of the underlined word in the above sentence is

  1. Openly
  2. Hastily
  3. Slowly
  4. Privately

Answer: 1. Openly

Question 10. How did the new governor (Shepherd) come to the palace?

  1. Riding on a camel
  2. Riding on a horse
  3. Riding on a donkey
  4. Riding on a mule

Answer 1. Riding on a camel

Question 11. “This, my dear master, is my only treasure.” The underlined words in the above sentence refer to

  1. A bed sheet
  2. Gold jewels
  3. Silver jewels
  4. An ordinary blanket

Answer: 1. an ordinary blanket

Question 12. Arrange the following options in the correct sequence.

  1. The shepherd recognized the king disguised as a traveler.
  2. The king made the shepherd, governor of a small district.
  3. The king made the shepherd, governor of a bigger district.
  4. The uneducated shepherd lived in a cave.

Choose the correct option 

  1. (1), (2), (3), (4)
  2. (4), (3), (2), (1)
  3. (2), (4), (1), (3)
  4. (4), (1), (2), (3)

Answer: 4. (4), (1), (2), (3)

The Shepherd’s Treasure Chapter 3 NCERT Notes

Question  13. What did the shepherd rise to?

  1. Power
  2. Dignity
  3. Wisdom
  4. Both (1) and (2)

Answer: 4. Both (1) and (2)

Question  14. Who loved the shepherd for his wisdom and sympathy?

  1. The people
  2. The King
  3. Other governors
  4. His workers

Answer: 1. The people

Question  15. How was the shepherd known throughout the country?

  1. Wise and fair
  2. Fame and fair
  3. Iust and fame
  4. Kind and just

Answer: 1. Wise and fair

Question  16. Find the synonym of the word dignity.

  1. Praise
  2. Status
  3. Fair
  4. Sympathy

Answer: 2. Status

Question  17. What is the meaning of the phrase ‘one and all’?

  1. Anyone
  2. Someone
  3. Everyone
  4. Only one

Answer: 3. Everyone

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 3 Question And Answers

Question 1. Read The Given Extract And Answer The Following Questions.

Disguised As A Shepherd And Riding A Muie, One Day The King Came To The Cave Where The Wise Shepherd Lived. As Soon As The Shepherd Saw The Traveller Coming Towards The Cave, He Rose To Welcome Him.

He Took The Tired Traveller Inside The Cave and gave Him Water To Drink And A Share Of His Own Meagre Meal. The King Rested For The Night In The Cave And Was Greatly Impressed By The Shepherd’s Hospital It and Wise Conversation.

Question 1. What Did The King Use As A Ride On His Way To The Shepherd?
Answer: The King Rode A Mule On His Way To The Shepherd.

Question 2. What Did The Shepherd Do When He First Saw The Traveller?
Answer: The Shepherd Welcomed And Took The Traveller Inside The Cave When He First Saw Him.

Question 3. What Impressed The King?
Answer: The King Was Impressed With The Shepherd’s Hospitality And Wise Conversation.

Question 4. Find The Word From The Extract Which Means Small.
Answer: Meagre.

The Shepherd’s Treasure Class 6 NCERT Summary

Question 5. Find The One Word Substitution Of ‘Friendly And Generous Reception Of Visitors’.
Answer: Hospitality

Question 2. Read the given extract and answer the following questions.

Although he rose to power and dignity, the shepherd remained as humble as ever. People loved and honored him for his wisdom, sympathy, and goodness. He was kind and just to one and all. His fame as a fair and wise governor soon spread throughout the country.

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 3 Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1. Describe Some Good Qualities Of The Shepherd.
Answer: The Shepherd Was Very Wise, Helpful, And Had A Friendly Nature.

Question 2. How Did The Shepherd Become Famous In The Country? Or Why Did The Shepherd Become Famous?
Answer: The Shepherd Was Kind And Fair To All. He Became Famous For His Wisdom, Goodness, Sympathy, And Friendly Nature.

Question 3. How Was The King Dressed Up When He Met The Shepherd?
Answer: The King Was Dressed Up As A Shepherd And Rode On A Mule When He Met The Shepherd.

Question 4. What Was The Living Condition Of The New Governor Before Meeting The King?
Answer: The New Governor Was A Poor Shepherd Before Meeting The King. He Did Not Have Even A Small Cottage And Lived In A Cave.

Question 5. Why Did The King Appoint The Shepherd As The Governor Of A District?
Answer: The King Appointed The Shepherd As The Governor of the District Because Of His Wisdom. He Wanted People Like The Shepherd To Work For Him

Question 6. Why did the king become angry?
Answer: The king became angry after hearing endless stories about the shepherd’s dishonesty and his iron chest.

Question 7. Why did the shepherd carry an iron chest was Opened?
Answer: The shepherd carried an iron chest with him to keep his blanket in it.

Question 8. Why were the people astonished when the chest was opened?
Answer: The people were astonished when the chest was opened because they had expected it to contain jewels but it only had an old blanket.

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 3 Short Answer Type Question

Question 1. How Did The Shepherd Help The Common People?
Answer: Many People Came To The Shepherd For Advice. He Understood People’s Sorrows And Troubles And Helped Them Face Their Problems With Courage And Common Sense.

Question 2. What Did The Shepherd Offer The King Inside The Cave?
Answer: The Shepherd Welcomed The King Dressed As An Ordinary Shepherd. He Took The Traveller Inside The Cave, Offered Him Water, And Shared His Meal with him. The King Was Impressed By His Hospitality And Wise Conversation.

NCERT Solutions for Chapter 3 The Shepherd’s Treasure

Question 3. What Did The Other Governors Tell The King About The New Governor? What Allegations Were Put Against The Shepherd By The Governors?
Answer: The Other Governors Told The King That The New Governor Was Dishonest And Kept Sorne’s Money Which He Collected As A Tax for the People. They Said That His Iron Box Contained The Treasure That He Had Secretly Collected.

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 3 Long Answer Type Questions

Question 1. Why Did The King Reward The Shepherd Twice In The Story?
Answer: The King Rewarded The Shepherd Twice. First, He Was Impressed By The Shepherd’s Goodness And Wisdom When He Visited His Cave And Made Him The Governor Of A Small District.

Second, The King Doubted The Shepherd’s Honesty After Hearing False Stories About Him. He Asked The Shepherd The Reason Behind Always Carrying An Iron Box The Shepherd Said That

The Box Contained The Blanket Which Was His Oldest Friend. It Would Protect Him Even If The King Took Away His New Cloaks. The King Was Pleased To Hear The Shepherd’s Reply And Made Him The Governor Of A Much Bigger District.

Question 2. What Is The Moral Of The Lesson, ‘The Shepherd’s Treasure’? How Does The Story Justify It?
Answer: The Moral Of The Lesson Is That One Should Be Humble and down-to-earth As These Qualities Will Help One In Life. These Qualities Will Allow One To Shine And Rise To Higher Places. The Lesson Teaches Us This Through The Story Of a Poor And Uneducated Shepherd Who Lived In A Cave In Iran.

He Was A Wise Man And Would Ofter Advice And To Help The Common People During Time Of Trouble. He Was Loved And Respected By Many People. After An Encounter with the King Of The Country, He Was Given The Position Of The Governor Of A Small District.

Despite His Power And Popularity, He Remained Humble, Honest And Helpful. When The Jealous Governors Accused Him Of Stealing Money, He Proved Them Wrong. The King Was Even More Impressed By His Humble Nature And Granted Him A Bigger District To Govern.

Question 3. Honesty And Wisdom Are Great Virtues Which Always End Up Getting Rewarded. Justify The Given Statement With Evidence From The Story.
Answer: It Is Entirely True That Honesty And Wisdom Are Great Virtues In Human Beings. They Are Always Recognised And Rewarded. This Lesson Is Taught By The Story Of The Old Shepherd Of Iran. Although He Was Very Poor And Uneducated, He Did Have A Great Virtue. He Was Very Wise And Kind.

That Is Wiry, Even Though He Was Very Poor, People From Far Off Places Would Come To Meet Him And They Would Ask Him To Solve Their Problems. It Was His Honesty And Wisdom Which Made The King Notice Him And Award Him With The Position Of Governor.

Later, When The King Grew Suspicious Of The Iron Chest, The Shepherd Showed a Great Amount Of Wisdom And Honesty. He Humbly Opened The Chest And Showed Everyone The Common Blanket That He Claimed As His Only Treasure Because It Would Keep Him Warm Even If The King Decided To Take His New Cloaks Away.

The Honesty And Wisdom Of The Shepherd Is The Reason Why He Ends Up Getting Rewarded Twice By The King. Therefore, Honesty And Wisdom Are Great Virtues that end Up Getting rewarded sooner or Later.

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 2 The Friendly Mongoose Question And Answers

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 2 The Friendly Mongoose Question And Answers

The Following Chapter Is A Moral Tale Taken From Panchtantra. It Is An Emotional Story That Revolves Around How A Mongoose Is Misunderstood And Killed By A Human.

The Story Shows How Humans Are Unable To See The Truth Because Of Their Wreng And Twisted Ideas. They Take Actions Even Before They Think Because Ofthese Ideas.

Read and Learn More NCERT Solutions for Class 6 English

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 2 The Farmer Brought A Baby Mongoose

Once, A farmer, His Wife, And His Small Son Lived In A Village. The Farmer And His Wife Loved Their Son Very Much.

The Farmer Wanted His Son To Have A Companion When He Grew Up. So, He Told His Wife That They Should Get A Pet’ His Wife Liked The Idea, So One Evening, The Farmer Brought A Baby Mongoose To The House.

Five Or Six Months Later, The Mongoose Had Grown To Its Full Size. It Had Shining Black Eyes And A Bushy Tail. The Farmer’s Son Was Still A Small Baby In The Cradle, Who Would Sleep Or Cry The Entire Time.

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 2 The Friendly Mongoose Question And Answers

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter – Alone In The House

One Day, The Farmer’s Wife Wanted To Go To The Market to shop, so she fed the baby and put him to sleep.

Then, She Asked Her Husband To Take Care Of The Baby, Because She Was Afraid Of Leaving The Baby Alone With The Mongoose. The Farmer Replied That The Mongoose Was A Friendly Animal And The Best Friend Of Their Son.

When His Wife went shopping, The Farmer Did Not Have Anything To Do In The House. So, He Also Went Out To Take Care Of His Fields And Then Met Some Friends When He Was Returning. As A Result, He Could Not Come Home Early.

NCERT Class English Chapter 2 The Farmer’s Wife Killed The Mongoose

When The Farmer’s Wife Returned Home With A Basketful Of Groceries, She Saw The Mongoose Sitting Outside. When He Ran Up To Welcome Her, The Farmer’s Wife Screamed Because The Face And Paws Of The Mongoose Were Covered With Blood.

She Thought That The Mongoose Had Killed Her Little Son. She Became Angry And Hit The Mongoose With Her Basket Of Groceries.

Class 6 English Chapter 2 The Friendly Mongoose NCERT Solutions

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 2 The Farmer’s Wife Regrets Killing The Mongoose

When She Checked The Baby, She Found That It Was Sleeping Safely, But A Dead And Bleeding Black Snake Lay On The Floor. She Realised The Truth That The Mongoose Had Saved Her Baby From The Snake.

She Ran Outside To Check On The Mongoose Who Was Already Dead. She Kept Staring At The Mongoose And Cried As She Touched It. Then She Heard Her Son Crying And Went Inside The House To Feed Him.

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 2 The Friendly Mongoose Word Meaning

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 2 The Friendly Mongoose Question And Answers Word Meaning

E:\All in one English class 6\ch-19\New folder\New folder\2\NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 2 The Friendly Mongoose Question And Answers Word Meaning..png

Question 1. Why did the farmer bring a baby mongoose into the house?
Answer: The farmer bought the baby mongoose as a companion for his small son.

Question 2. Why didn’t the farmer’s wife want to leave the baby alone with the mongoose?
Answer: The farmer’s wife did not want to leave the baby alone with the mongoose because she was afraid that the mongoose might harm the baby in her absence.

Question 3. What was the farmer’s comment on his wife’s fears?
Answer: The farmer commented that there was no need to worry as the mongoose was a friendly animal. He further comforted her by saying the mongoose and their baby were best friends.

Question 4. Why did the farmer’s wife strike the mongoose with her basket?
Answer: The farmer’s wife struck the mongoose with the basket because she thought that the mongoose had killed her baby. She thought that the blood covering the mongoose was that of her son.

NCERT Solutions for Class 6 English Chapter 2 The Friendly Mongoose

Question 5. Did she repent her hasty action? How does she show her repentance?
Answer: Yes, she repented her hasty action as soon as she saw her son sleeping and a dead snake on the floor. She realized that the mongoose had protected her son from the snake.

She shows her repentance by crying and checking if the mongoose is still alive. She stared at the dead mongoose for a long time while repenting her hasty and rash actions

Question 6. Do you have a pet – a cat or a dog? If not, would you like one? How would you, look after it? Are you for or against keeping birds in a cage as pets?
Answer: Do it yourself.

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 2 Multiple Choice Questions

Question 1. ‘We must have a pet’. Who said this and to whom?

  1. The farmer said to his wife
  2. The farmer’s wife said to her husband
  3. The farmer said to his son
  4. The farmer’s son said to his mother

Answer: 1. The farmer said to his wife

Question 2. Which of the following words means ‘companion’?

  1. Friend
  2. Enemy
  3. Superior
  4. Inferior

Answer: 1. Friend

Question 3. Read the given statements and choose the correct option.

  1. Statement 1 The mongoose was a lovely animal with a bushy tail.
  2. Statement 2 The farmer’s son would speak with the mongoose.
  3. Statement 1 is correct, but statement 2 is incorrect.
  4. Statement 1 is incorrect, but statement 2 is correct.
  5. Both statements are correct.
  6. Both the statements are incorrect.

Answer: 1. Statement I is correct, but statement 2 is incorrect.

Question 4. The farmer worked in the field and his wife looked after household work. This shows

  1. They Were Co-Operative
  2. They Did Not Care For Each Other
  3. They Were Selfish
  4. They were jealous of each other

Answer: 1. They were co-operative

Question 5. How much time did it take for the mongoose to grow to its full size?

  1. Five or six months
  2. Five or six days
  3. Five or six weeks
  4. Five or six years

Answer: 1. Five or six months

Question 6. The farmer’s wife wanted to go to the

  1. Forest
  2. Office
  3. Bazar
  4. Theatre

Answer: 1. Bazaar

Question 7. While Going Out, The Farmer’s Wife Told Her Husband

  1. Take The Baby to The Field
  2. To Play With The Baby
  3. To Keep An Eye On The Baby
  4. To Teach The Baby

Answer: 3 To Keep An Eye On The Baby

Question 8. Why Did The Farmer Take Some Time To Return Home?

  1. His Field Got Attacked By Animals
  2. He Was Watering His Field
  3. He Met Some Of His Friends
  4. He Fell Asleep Under A Tree

Answer: 3. He Met Some Of His Friends

The Friendly Mongoose Class 6 NCERT Questions and Answers

Question 9. The Farmer’s Wife Returned…..

  1. With A Bucket Of Sweets
  2. With A Basketful Of Groceries
  3. With A Bag Of Groceries
  4. With A Packet Of Eatables

Answer: 2. With A Basketful Of Groceries

Question 10. When The Farmer’s Wife Returned From The Bazar, The Mongoose Ran To Welcome Her

  1. Which Was Not Expected
  2. Which Was Unusual
  3. Which Was Customary
  4. And Dance with Her

Answer: 3. Which Was Customary

Question 11. Seeing blood on the face of the mongoose, the farmer’s wife was

  1. Excited
  2. Scared
  3. Unconscious
  4. Filled With Rage

Answer: 4. filled with rage

Question 12. After killing the mongoose and seeing her baby safe, the farmer’s wife

  1. Got excited
  2. Started dancing
  3. Felt happy
  4. Repented

Answer: 4. repented

Question 13. What Did The Farmer’s Wife Bring Back From The Shopping?

  1. A Basketful of groceries
  2. A Basketful of Flowers
  3. A basketful of toys
  4. A Bunch of Her Son’s Clothes

Answer: 1. A Basketful Of groceries

Question 14. What Did The Mongoose Do On Seeins Her Back?

  1. It Pounced on Her
  2. It Led out A Loud Cry
  3. It Ran To Welcome Her
  4. It Hugged The Wife’s Leg

Answer: 3. It Ran To Welcome Her

Question 15. What Was The Mongoose’s Face And Paws Covered With?

  1. Vermillion
  2. Blood
  3. Water
  4. Ink

Answer: 2. Blood

Question 16. What Is The Meaning Of ‘Customary’?
Answer: The Customary’ Means According To The Customs Or Tradition.

Question 17. Which Of The Following Words Has The Meaning Opposite To’smear’?

  1. Clear
  2. Clean
  3. Coated
  4. Plaster

Answer: 2. Clean

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 2 Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1. What Happened To The Mongoose In Five Or Six Months?
Answer: The Mongoose Had Grown To Its Full Size In Five Or Six Months.

Question 2. How Differently Did The Mongoose And The Son Grow?
Answer: The Mongoose Had Grown Up Fully When The Son Was Still In The Cradle. They Grew At A Different Pace.

Question 3. Explain The appearance of The Grown-Up Mongoose.
Answer: The Mongoose Was A Lovely Animal With Two Shining Eyes And A Bushy Tail.

Question 4. Find The Word In The Extract Which Has The Same Meaning As ‘Crib’.
Answer: ‘Cradle’ Is The Word In The Extract Which Has The Same Meaning As’crib’.

The Friendly Mongoose Chapter 2 NCERT Notes

Question 5. Find A Word In The Extract Which Means The Opposite Of The Word ‘Awful’.
Answer: ‘Lovely’

Question 6. Why did the farmer want to have a pet?
Answer: The farmer wanted a pet so that it could be his son’s companion and friend in the future.

Question 7. How did the child and mongoose grow?
Answer: In five or six months, when the mongoose had grown to its full size, the child was still a baby.

Question 8. Where did the farmer’s wife want to go?
Answer: The farmer’s wife wanted to go to the market to buy groceries.

Question 9. Why did the farmer go out of the house?
Answer: The farmer went out because he had nothing to do in the house. So, he decided to take a look at his fields.

Question 10. What was customary for the mongoose?
Answer: It was customary for the mongoose to run and welcome the farmer’s wife when she returned home.

Question 11. What did the farmer’s wife notice after returning home?
Answer: ‘The farmer’s wife noticed that the face and paws of the mongoose were covered with blood.

Question 12. What is the moral of the story?
Answer: The moral of the story is to think twice before acting out of anger.

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 2 Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1. Describe the appearance and nature of the mongoose.
Answer: The mongoose was a tiny and lovely animal with two shining black eyes and a bushy tail. It had grown to its full size in just five or six months. It was a friendly animal and was as sweet as the farmer’s son.

Question 2. What did the farmer tell his wife about the mongoose when she had to leave the baby alone?
Answer: The farmer told his wife that the mongoose was a friendly animal and that his baby and the mongoose were best friends. So, she need not worry while leaving the baby alone with the mongoose.

Question 3. What did the farmer’s wife realize after killing the mongoose?
Answer: The farmer’s wife realizes her mistake after killing the mongoose. She thought that the mongoose had killed her baby. In reality, the mongoose had saved her baby from a snake

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 2 Long Answer Type Questions

Question 1. What made the farmer’s wife kill the mongoose?
Why did she cry after killing the mongoose?
Answer: Upon returning from the market, the farmer’s wife saw the mongoose waiting for her. When she looked at it closely, she noticed a lot of blood covering its mouth and paws. Looking at the blood, she believed that the mongoose had killed her small son.

That is why she killed the mongoose by hitting it with a basket full of groceries with full strength. When she went inside the house, she found her son sleeping safely and soundly.

She also noticed that a black snake was lying torn and dead on the floor near her son. Looking At This Scene, She Realised That The Mongoose Had Protected Her Son From The Snake. She Realised That She Had Made A Mistake.

When She Ran Out To Check On The Mongoose, She Found It Lying Dead. She Felt Guilty for her Hasty Actions And Regretting What She Did, She Looked At The Dead Mongoose And Cried Bitterly.

The Friendly Mongoose Class 6 NCERT Summary

Question 2. “The Farmer And His Wife Loved Their Son Very Much.” Justify The Statement.
Answer: The Farmer And His Wife Loved Their Son Very Much. They Took Care Of Him And They Were Always Thinking About Different Ways They Could Make Their Son’s Life Better.

They Decided To Bring A Pet Home, So That Their Son Could Have A Companion Growing Up. The Baby Mongoose Was Brought To Their Home To Be A Faithful Companion To Their Son. The Farmer’s Wife Would Lovingly Feed Their Son And She Always Took The Time To Put Him To Sleep.

When She Misunderstood That The Mongoose Had Harmed Her Son, She Didn’t Hesitate Even A Single Moment In Killing The Mongoose. All Of These Instances Show That The Farmer And His Wife Loved Their Son A Lot.

Question 3. What Do You Learn From The Story Of ‘Mongoose’?
Answer: The Story Of The Friendly Mongoose Shows That People Should Always Consider Their Actions Carefully Before Doing Anything Rash. The Case Of The Farmer’s Wife Shows The Horrible Result Of Actions Taken In Hasty Misunderstanding Because Of Her Misunderstanding, She Killed The Mongoose That Had Saved The Life Of Her Son From A Snake.

Thus, She Repaid The loyalty of The Mongoose By Killing Him In Anger. When She Later Realised Her Mistake, She Regretted Her Actions And Wished That She Could Bring The Dead Mongoose Back To Life. This Incident Teaches Us Why We Should Always Look Before We Leap And Carefully Consider The Consequences Of Our Actions.

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 1 A Tale Of Two Birds Question And Answers

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 1 Question And Answers

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 1 A Tale Of Two Birds Question And Answers

‘The Tale Of Two Birds’ Is A Moral Tale That Tells The Story Of Two Birds In The Forest. The Two Birds Are Brothers, But They Are Separated By A Storm, And Land At Two Different Places’ The Story Shows How Their Different Environments Affect Their Nature As They Grow Up. Through The Story, We Learn That The People Who Surround Us, Influence Us’

Read and Learn More NCERT Solutions for Class 6 English

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 1 Two Birds In The Forest

Once Upon A Time, A Mother Bird Lived In A Nest On A Tall Tree In A Forest With Her Two New-Born Babies One Day, There Was A Storm With Thunder, Lightning And Rain. The Strong Wind Blew Down Many Trees.

As A Result, A Big Branch Fell On The Nest And Killed The Mother Bird While The Baby Birds Were Thrown To Different Sides Of The Forest’ One Of The Birds Fell Near A Cave Where A gang of Robbers Lived. The Other Bird Fell Near An Ashram’ As Time Passed’ The Birds Grew Up.

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 1 The King Meets the Other Bird

One Day, It’s Of The Country Came To Hunt In The Forest. He Saw A Deer There And Followed It Deep Into The Forest. Soon, He Was Lost As He Did Not Know Where He Was. So, He Kept Moving Till He Reached The Other Side Of The Forest.

By Now, He Was Very Tired. So, He Sat Under A Tree. Suddenly, He Heard A Voice Calling The Robbers To Come And Take His Jewels And Horse Away. The King Was Shocked To See A Big, Brown Bird Sitting On The Tree When He Heard Some Noises Coming From The Cave, He Quickly Went Away On His Horse’

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 1 A Tale Of Two Birds Question And Answers

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 1 The King Meets The Other Bird

Soon, He Reached The Rishi’s Ashram. As The King Sat Under A Tree Near The Ashram, He Heard Another Gentle Voice Speaking. The Voice Welcomed Him To The Ashram And Asked Him To Rest Inside. It Also Told The King That There Was Cold Water In The Pot And He Should Feel Comfortable. The King Looked Up And He Saw Another Big, Brown Bird Sitting On The Tree.

He Was Surprised As This Bird Looked Exactly Like The Bird He Had Seen Before. So, The Bird Told Him That The Other Bird Was His Brother Who Was Friends With The Robbers. So, His Brother Talked And Acted Like The Robbers And Does Not Talk To Him.

A Tale of Two Birds Class 6 NCERT Question and Answers

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 1 The King Talks to the Rishi

As the bird was talking to the king, the rishi entered the ashram. The rishi welcomed the king and asked him to rest. He also told the king that he could share his food.

The king told the rishi about the two birds he had met and how they were very different even though they looked the same. The rishi told the king that the forest was full of surprises.

He added that every being in this world is influenced by the people they surround themselves with. The bird who lived with the robbers had always heard the talk of robbers.

So, he talks like them while the bird in the ashram always welcomes people to the ashram.  Then, the rishi asked the king to come inside the ashram where he would tell the king more about the forest and the birds.

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 1 Word Meaning

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 1 A Tale Of Two Birds Question And Answers Word Meaning

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 1 A Tale Of Two Birds Multiple Choice Questions

Question 1. Where Had The Mother Bird Built Her Nest?

  1. In A Tall, Shady Tree In A Park.
  2. In A Short Tree In A Forest.
  3. In A Tdl, Shady Tree In A Forest.
  4. In A Shorttree In Apark.

Answer: 3. In A Tall, Shady Tree In A Forest.

Question 2. Read The Given Statements And Choose The Correct Answer.

  1. Statement 1 The Newborn Babies Lived With Their Mother.
  2. Statement 2 They Had A Nest In A Tall, Shady Tree.
  3. Statement 1 Is Correct, But Statement 2 Is Incorrect.
  4. Statement 1 Is Incorrect, But Statement 2 Is Correct.
  5. Both The Statements Are Correct.
  6. Both The Statements Are Incorrect.

Answer: 3. Both The Statements Are Correct.

Question 3. What Hit The Nest Of The Birds During The Big Storm?

  1. A Big, Heavy branch
  2. Some Stones
  3. Trunk Of A Tree
  4. All Of These

Answer: 1. A big, Heavy branch

Question 4. Which Animal Made The King Go Deep Into The Forest?

  1. The Birds
  2. Deer
  3. Rabbit
  4. A wild pig

Answer: 3. Deer

Question 5. Read The Given Statements And Choose The Correct Answer.

  1. Statement 1 The King Came To The Forest To Hunt.
  2. Statement 2 The Rishitaught the King that Hunting Innocent Animals Is Wrong.
  3. Statement 1 Is Correct, But Statement 2 Is Incorrect.
  4. Statement 1 Is Incorrect, But Statement 2 Is Correct.
  5. Both The Statements Are Correct.
  6. Both The Statements Are Incorrect.

Answer: 1. Statement 1 Is Correct, But Statement 2 Is Incorrect

Question 6. Quick! Hurry Up! There’s Someone Under The Tree. Come And Take His Jewels And His Horse. Who Is The Speaker Here?

  1. The King
  2. The First Bird
  3. The Second Bird
  4. Mother Bird

Answer: 2. The First Bird

Class 6 English Chapter 1 A Tale of Two Birds NCERT Solutions

Question 2. Why Was The King Amazed As He Stood Near The Cave?

  1. He Heard A Bird Calling Out To Robbers To Loot The Stranger.
  2. He Saw A Little Bird Singing Melodiously.
  3. He Saw The Rishi Digging The Ground.
  4. He Saw A Beautiful Sight.

Answer: He Heard A Bird Calling Out To Robbers To Loot The Stranger.

Question 8. Why Did The King Ride Away As Fast As He Could?

  1. Because He Wanted To Rob People.
  2. Because He Did Not Want To Get Robbed.
  3. Because He Wanted To Meet The Rishi.
  4. Because He Wanted To Meet The Queen.

Answer: 2. Because He Did Not Want To Get Robbed.

Question 9. Choose The Correct Option.

  1. Statement 1 The Second Bird Welcomed The King.
  2. Statement 2 The King Was Offered To Take Rest Inside The Ashram.
  3. Statement 1 Is Incorrect But Statement 2 Is Correct.
  4. Statement 2 Is Correct But Statement 1 Is Incorrect.
  5. Both Statements 1 and 2 Are Correct.
  6. Both Statements 1 And 2 Are Incorrect.

Answer: 3. Both Statements 1 And 2 Are Correct.

Question 10. Arrange The Following Options In The Correct Sequence.

  1. The King Fled From The Cave.
  2. The Big, Brown Bird Welcomed The King.
  3. The Rishitalked To The King.
  4. The Big, Brown Bird Shouted At The Robbers To Loot The King.

Choose The Option Correct 

  1. (1), (2), (3) and (4)
  2. (4), (3) (2) and (1)
  3. (2), (4), (1) and (3)
  4. (4), (1), (2), (3)

Answer: 4. (4), (1), (2), (3)

Question 11. What did you learn from the story?

  1. We should behave politely.
  2. We should be kind to everyone.
  3. We should always keep good company.
  4. We should behave differently.

Answer: 3. We should always keep good company

Question 12. Where Did The King See The Bird?

  1. On A Tree Under Which He Was Sitting.
  2. At The Entrance Of the Cave.
  3. Deep In The Forest.
  4. Inside The Cave.

Answer: 2. On A Tree Under Which He Was Sitting.

Question 13. What Kind Of Noise Did The King Hear From The Cave?

  1. A Loud Noise
  2. A Faint Noise
  3. A Buzzing
  4. A Drumming Noise

Answer: 2. A Faint Noise

Question 14. Which One Of The Following Words Means ‘Amaze’?

  1. Labyrinth
  2. Surprised
  3. Bored
  4. Pleased

Answer: 3. Surprised

Question 15. Which Of The Following Words Means ‘Slip Away’?

  1. Crawl
  2. Escape
  3. Tripped
  4. Slide

Answer: 2. Escape

NCERT Solutions for Class 6 English Chapter 1 A Tale of Two Birds

Question 16. What Made The King Move Away From Under The Tree?

  1. He Saw The Gang Of Robbers.
  2. He Saw The Big, Brown Bird.
  3. He Heard The Cry Of The Bird.
  4. He Heard Noises Coming From The Cave.

Answer: 4. He Heard Noises Coming From The Cave.

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 1 A Tale Of Two Birds Very Short Answer Questions

There once lived a bird and her two newborn babies in a forest. They had a nest in a tall, shady tree and there the mother bird took care of her little ones day and night. One day, there was a big storm.

There was thunder, lightning, and rain, and the wind blew down many trees. The tall tree in which the birds lived also came down. A big, heavy branch hit the nest and killed the bird. Fortunately for the baby birds, the strong wind blew them away to the other side of the forest.

Question 1. What does the phrase came down’ mean in What does the phrase came down’ mean in the extract?
Answer: The phrase ‘came down’ in the extract means that ‘the tree broke’.

Question 2. Why was it ‘fortunate’ that the baby birds got blown away to the other side of the forest?
Answer: It was fortunate that the baby birds got blown away because they could have been killed by the thunderstorm too.

Question 3. There was thunder, …..and …and the wind blew down many trees.
Answer: Lightning and rain.

Question 4. Find a pair of synonyms in the given extract.
Answer: The pair of synonyms is ‘thunder’ and ‘storm’

Question 5. Write A One-Word Substitution For The Phrase ‘New-Born Babies’.
Answer: The Word’infant’is The One Word Substitution For ‘New-Born Babies’

Question 6. How did the mother bird die?
Answer: The mother bird died during the storm. The tree was uprooted and a big, heavy branch hit the nest and killed the mother bird.

Question 7. Why did the king visit the forest?
Answer: The king of the country visited the forest to hunt.

A Tale of Two Birds Class 6 NCERT Questions and Answers

Question 8. What made the king sit down under a tree?
Answer: The king sat down under the tree because he was tired after traveling to the other side of the forest.

Question 9. What can be learned from the rishi’s welcome of the king?
Answer: We can learn to be kind and welcoming to our guests from the way the rishi welcomed the king.

Question 10. How did the king meet the first bird in the forest?
Answer: The king met the first bird in the forest when he took shelter under a tree near the cave. The meeting was not pleasant since the first bird shouted at the robbers to rob the king of his jewels and horse.

Question 11. How did the king reach the cave?
Answer: The king Found his way into the forest when he was following a deer. As he did not know where he was, he continued to ride till he reached the other side ofthe forest. Being tired, he got off his horse and sat down under a tree near the cave.

Question 12. What did the king tell the rishi about those birds?
Answer: The king told the rishi that the two birds behaved very differently but they looked exactly like each other. He was amazed after meeting the two birds in the forest.

Question 13. Why was the king amazed after meeting the two birds?
Answer: The king was amazed to see the different behaviors of two birds who looked alike. The first bird he met near a cave was calling out to the robbers to come quickly and rob the king. The second bird he met near the ashram welcomed him inside and asked him to drink water.

Question 14. Suddenly He Heard A Voice Cry Out, “Quick! Hurry Up! There’s Someone Under The Tree. Come And Take His Jewels And His Horse. Hurry, Or Else He’ll Slip Away.” The King Was Amazed. He Looked Up And Saw A Big, Brown Bird On The Tree Under Which He Was Sitting. He Also Heard Faint Noises Issuing From The Cave. He Quickly Got On To His Horse And Rode Away As Fast As He Could.

 Question 15. How Did The Two Baby Birds Get Separated?
Answer: The Babybirds Got Separated Due To A Storm Which Killed Their Mother And Blew Them To The Other Side Of The Forest.

Question 16. Where Did Each Of Them Find A Home?
Answer: One Of The Birds Fell Near A Cave Where A Gang Of Robbers Lived. The Other Landed Outside A Rishi’s Ashram.

Question 17. What Did The First Bird Say To The Stranger?
Answer: When The First Bird Saw The King, It Started Calling The Robbers To Hurry Up And Take His Jewels And Horses.

Question 18. What Did The Second Bird Say To Him? Or How Did The Other Bird Greet The King?
Answer: The Second Bird Welcomed The King To The Ashram And Requested Him To Have Some Water. The Bird Also Told Him To Take Rest And Make Himself Comfortable.

Question 19. How Did The Rishi Explain The Different Ways In Which The Birds Behaved? Or How Did Different Companies Affect The Character And Behaviour Of The Two Birds?
Answer: The Rishi Explained To The King That One Is Known By The Company One Keeps. In Other Words, The Behaviour And Actions Of The People whom we Surround Ourselves With, Influence Us Greatly.

The First Bird Behaved Like The Robbers It Lived With As It Heard What The Robbers Talked About. The Second Bird Behaved Kindly Like The Rishi And Welcomed People To The Ashram.

A Tale of Two Birds Class 6 NCERT Summary

Question 20. Which One Of The Following Sums Up The Story Best? Or What Do You Learn From The Story? 

  1. A Bird In Hand Is Worth Two In The Bush.
  2. One Is Known By The Company One Keeps.
  3. A Friend In Need Is A Friend Indeed.

Answer: 2. One Is Known By The Company One Keeps.

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 1 A Tale Of Two Birds Long Answer Type Questions

Question 1. “The Forest Is Full Of Surprises”. Justify The Statement According To Your Understanding Of The Chapter’
Answer: The King Says That The Forest Is Full Of Surprises Because Of The Story Of The Two Birds. First, The King Encounters The Bird That Begins Shouting For The Robbers To Loot Him. Then, The King Encounters The Bird That Welcomes Him To The Ashram And Asks Him To Rest. In Such A Way The King Is Continuously Surprised During His Time In The Forest. So, It Is Correct To Say That The Forest Is Full Of Surprises.

Question 2. Describe The Journey Of The King And Mention The People Or Creatures That He Met.
Answer: One Day, The King Went To A Forest For Hunting. He Saw A Deer And While Chasing The Deer On His Horse, He Lost His Way In The Forest. He Was Tired Of Riding For A Long Time And Took Shelter Under A Tree’ Suddenly, He Heard A Voice Shouting For People To Rob Him Of His Jewels And Horse.

He Saw That It Was A Big, Brown Bird Informing A Gang Of Robbers Who Lived In The Cave Near The Tree. He Rode Out Fast From There And Came Across A Similar Bird Outside A Rishi’s Ashram. He Was Amazedto Find The Difference In Their Behaviour. Unlike The First Bird, The Second Bird Welcomed Him And Spoke In A Gentle Voice.

The Rishi Later Explained To Him That The Two Birds Were Brothers But They Were Separated When They Were Young. They Behaved Differently Due To The People They Lived With.

Question 3, “One Is Known By The Company One Keeps”. Do You Agree? Give Reasons For Your Answer.
Answer: It Is True To Say That One Is Known By The Company One Keeps. Living Beings Are Influenced By The People They Are Surrounded By. This Is Aptly Shown In The Story Wherein Two Brother Birds Who Look Alike, Behave Very Differently. One Of The Birds Lived With A Gang Of Robbers.

He Saw Robbers Talking Of Theft And So He Copied Them. When This Bird Sees The King, He Calls The Robbers To Take Away All Of The King’s Jewels And Horse. In Complete Contrast Is The Other Bird Who Had Lived With A Rishi In An Ashram.

This Bird Is Gentle And Welcoming. He Not Only Welcomes The King Into The Ashram But Also Asks Him To Rest And Drink Water.

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 7 A Pact With The Sun Question And Answers

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 7 A Pact With The Sun Question And Answers

The Story ‘A Pact With The Sun’ Has Been Written By The Third President Of India Dt. Hussain. It Was Originally Written In Urdu Language And Later Translated Into English. It Is A Hopeful Tale Of The Innocence Of A Young Girl That Makes A Pact With The Sun To Bring Sunshine To Her Il1 Mother.

Saeeda’s Mother Was Unwell

Saeeda’s Mother Was Suffering Due To Many Diseases. She Had Fever, Cough, Body, Painful Joints Among Many Other Illnesses. She Had Been Created By Many Doctors But She Could Never Get Well.

Read and Learn More NCERT Solutions for Class 6 English

She Stayed In A Small, Dark Room With Closed Doors And Windows To Be Away From Sunshine And Fresh Air. Even Though She Was Weak And Pale’ She wasn’t Allowed To Eat Normal Food.

When Her Health Became Worse, Her Relatives And Neighbours Convinced Her To Consult A Specialist Whose Fee Was High. Saeeda’s Mother Was Poor But She Followed Their Advice. To Pay The Fee, She Sold Some Of Her Jewellery (Trinkets) To Consult A Specialist

The Doctor’s Advice

The Doctor Examined Saeeda’s Mother And Prescribed Her Effective Medicines, But They Were Very Costly’ He Told Her To Eat Anything She Wished And To Leave The Dark Room. He Also Advised Her To Sit In Sunshine For An Hour Daily He Said That Sunshine And Fresh Air Are More Important Than Medicines.

When People Heard The Doctor’s Advice, They Began A Debate. Some People Like An Old Experienced Lady Opposed The Doctor’s Advice. According To The Lady, Frestrair, And Sunshine Are Dangerous For A Person With A Long-Lasting Cough. In Contrast, The Younger Generation Accepted The Doctor’s Advice.

However, Saeeda’s Mother Ignored All Of Them And Decided To Do Everything The Doctor ruined. Sh” Got Her Charpoy (A Moveable Sitting And Laying Bed) Moved To Another Room And Waited For The Sun To Come Out.

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 7 A Pact With The Sun Question And Answers

Saeeda Makes A Pact With The Sun

The Sky Was Covered With Clouds For The Next Few Days. Saeeda’s Mother Was Worried And Asked The God Why He Had Ordered The Sun To Stay Hidden.

Saeeda Was Playing With Her Doll Nearby When She Heard Her Mother’ She Remained Calm And Asked Her Mother To Sit In The Little Sunlight That Was There.

But The People Around Her Told Her That It Was Of No Use As The Weather Had Become Chilly. This Made Saeeda Sad. The Sun Was Going Away As Only Little Sunlight Could Be Seen Through The Mango Tree.

Saeeda, Then, Asked The Last Rays Of The Sun To Come With Lots Of Warmth And Brightness The Next Day’ She Also Told Them That She Needed Them For Her Mother Who Needed Sunlight To Recover. The Rays Promised Saeeda That They Would Return.

The Rays Revolt against the Sun

The next day, the Sun told his rays that they wouldn’t go to the Earth that day because an army of clouds had covered the road to Earth. But doing so would cause the rays to break the pact with Saeeda.

All of the rays stayed quiet but one of the rays told the Sun that it could not stay back. It had promised Saeeda that it would come to help her mother recover. It also added that it would tear the clouds to reach Saeeda.

Hearing this, all of the rays insisted on going to Earth because they had promised Saeeda. They didn’t want to be called liars by the people of the Earth.

NCERT Solutions for Class 6 English Chapter 7 A Pact With The Sun

Going to Saeeda’s house

The Sun agreed to the rays, demands but asked them to be careful with their clothes. The little rays told the Sun that they could always change clothes, but they must go to the earth.

They focused their heat on the clouds and burst through them to reach Saeeda’s courtyard. Saeeda’s mother cried with happiness when the sunshine arrived. She sat in the sunlight for over an hour and immediately began feeling happier and better.

The morning air carried the scent of flowers, and the birds were singing sweetly. Soon, she was fully recovered but she always followed the doctor’s advice- an hour of sunlight and lots of fresh air.

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 7 A Pact With The Sun Question And Answers.

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 7 Word Meaning

 

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 7 A Pact With The Sun Question And Answers Word Meaning

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 7 A Pact With The Sun Question And Answers Word Meaning 2

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 7 A Pact With The Sun Question And Answers Word Meaning 3

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 7 A Pact With The Sun Question And Answers Word Meaning 4

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 7 Intext Exercise Questions

Question 1. What Did The Physicians Ask Saeeda’s Mother To Do To Get Well? Did Their Advice Help Her? If Not, Why?
Answer: The Physicians Asked Saeeda’s Mother Not To Take Normal Food And Remain Confined To Her Small And Dark Room With Doors And Windows Closed. No, Their Advice Did Not Help Her. Lack Of Sunshine And Fresh Air Even Made Her Health Worse.

Question 2. What Did The Specialist Prescribe In Addition To Medicine?
Answer: In Addition To The Medicine, The Specialist Told Saeeda’s Mother To Eat something that She Liked’ He Also Told Her To Sit Under The Sun For An Hour Every Morning And To Inhale Fresh Air.

Question 3. What Did Saeeda Tell The Sunrays To Do?
Answer: Saeeda Requested The Sunrays To Come The Next Day With Lots Of Warmth And Brightness Because Her Mother Needed Them To Recover From Her Illness.

Question 4. Why Were The Sunrays Keen To Go Down To The Earth The Next Day?
Answer: The Sunrays Were Keen To Go Down To The Earth Next Day Because They Had Promised Saeeda That They Would Come Down To Help Her Mother Recover.

A Pact With The Sun Class 6 NCERT Questions and Answers

Question 5. What is your formula for keeping good health? My formula for good health is to eat healthy food, exercise regularly, and wake up early in the morning. Who would you recommend to a patient in your neighborhood – the physicians contacted first or the specialist contacted next? Give reasons for your choice.

If the illness is something minor then I would recommend the patient to go to a physician’ If the illness of the patient is serious, then I would recommend them to consult a specialist. When would you make a pact with the Sun? When you are going on a picnic or when you are playing a cricket match? Think of other occasions

Answer: I would make a pact with the sun in the cold months of winter and the months of the rainy seasons. Both of these weathers cause the absence of the sun and its warmth. Sitting in the sunshine during the winter afternoons is a perfect way to spend a day. Meanwhile, when the Sun shines after it has rained, I would get to see a rainbow

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 7 Multiple Choice Questions

Question 1. Who was under strict orders to remain confined to a small, dark room?

  1. Saeeda
  2. The specialist
  3. Saeedas mother
  4. Saeeda’s grandmother

Answer: 3. Saeeda’s mother

Question 2. Which of the following persuaded Saeeda’s mother to consult a specialist?

  1. Saeeda
  2. Her relatives and neighbors
  3. Her husband
  4. Her father

Answer: 2. Her relatives and neighbors

Question 3. According to the advice of the neighbors, what was more precious than money?

  1. Time
  2. Life
  3. Laughter
  4. Family
  5. Life

Read the given statements and choose the correct answer.

  1. Statement 1 Saeeda’s mother had many diseases.
  2. Statement 2 She always recovered very quickly.
  3. Statement 1 is correct, but statement 2 is incorrect.
  4. Statement 1 is incorrect, but Statement 2 is correct
  5. Both The Statements 1 and 2 Are Correct.
  6. Both The Statements 1 And 2 Are Incorrect.

Answer: 1. Statement 1 Is Correct, But Statement 2 Is Incorrect.

Question 5. Complete The Following Dialogue.’Sit In The Sun Every Morning From

  1. Sixtoseven
  2. Eighttonine
  3. Nine To Ten
  4. Seven To Eight

Answer: 1. Eight To Nine

Question 6. According To An Experienced Lady

  1. Exposure To Rain And Hail For Someone Afflicted With Chronic Cough Was Dangerous
  2. Exposure To Sun And Fresh Air For Someone Afflicted With Chronic Cough Was Beneficial
  3. Exposure To Rain And Hail For Someone Afflicted With Chronic Cough Was Beneficial
  4. Exposure To Sun And Fresh Air For Someone Afflicted With Chronic Cough Was Dangerous

Answer: 4. Exposure To Sun And Fresh Air For Someone Afflicted With Chronic Cough Was Dangerous

The Pact With The Sun Chapter 7 NCERT Notes

Question 7. Who Said The Following? Forget The Consequences.”

  1. Saeeda
  2. Anexperiencedlady
  3. Ayoungerneighbour
  4. Saeedatmother

Answer: 4. Saeeda’s Mother

Question 8. The Last Remnant Of The Sun Rays That Shone Through The Top Branches Of The Family Mango Tree Is Depicted By ………..

  1. A Spot Ofbright Sunshine In The Courtyard
  2. Sunshine Flooding The Courtyard
  3. A Spot Ofpale Sunshine In The Courtyard
  4. Sunshine Playing Among The Leaves

Answer: 3. A Spot Ofpale Sunshine In The Courtyard

Question 9. How Did Saeeda Address The Last Departing Ray Of The Sun?

  1. Dearest Friend
  2. Dearest Aunt
  3. Dearest Sister
  4. Dearests Cousin

Answer: Dearest Sister

Question 10.”What Will The People Of The Earth Say About Us? That We Of The Heavens Have Turned Liars?” Why Would The People Of The Earth Say That They Had Turned Liars?

  1. Because The Sun Shone Everyday Even During The Rainy Season
  2. Because the Sun refused to follow the orders ofthe clouds
  3. Because the Sun wouldn’t allow its rays to go to Earth
  4. Because the Sun would rise from the West and not from the East

Answer: 3. Because the Sun wouldn’t allow its rays to go to Earth

Question 11. What stood guard between the sun’s rays and Saeeda’s courtyard?

  1. The clouds
  2. The trees
  3. The heat
  4. The tent

Answer: 1. The clouds

Question 12. Read the given statements and choose the correct answers.

Statement 1 The Sun rays were not allowed to go to the Earth because of a battalion of clouds. Statement 2 The Sun rays revolted against the Sun and burst through a battalion of clouds.

  1. Statement 1 is correct, but statement 2 is incorrect.
  2. Statement 1 is incorrect, but statement 2 is correct.
  3. Both the statement 1 and 2 are correct.
  4. Both statements 1 and 2 are incorrect.

Answer: 3. Both the statements I and 2 are correct.

Question 13. ‘The old lady’ eyes welled up with tears of gratitude.’

The underlined phrase in the above sentence means

  1. Filled
  2. Looked Up
  3. Opened
  4. Closed

Answer: 1. filled

Question 14. Arrange the following options in the correct sequence.

  1. The sky remained covered with clouds.
  2. Saeeda’s mother was confined to her dark room.
  3. Saeeda made a pact with the Sun.
  4. The specialist told her to move out of the room and sit in the Sun.

Choose The correct option 

  1. (1), (2), (3), (4)
  2. (4), (2), (2), (1)
  3. (2), (4), (1), (3)
  4. (4), (1), (2), (3)

Answer: 3. (2), (4), (1), (3)

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 7 Extra-Based Questions

Question 1. Read The Following Passage And Answer The Given Questions Carefully.

Saeeda’s Mother Had Been Ailing For A Long Time with Fever, Cough, Body Aches, Painfuljoints, And What Not. Treated By A Variety Of Physicians For Weeks, She Often Showed Signs Of Improvement But Soon Relapsed Into Her Old, Sick Self, One Complaint Substituted By Another.

Though Weak And Colourless, She Was Forbidden Normal Food And Was Under Strict Ordered To Remain Perpetually Confined To Her Small, Dingy Room With Doors And Windows Fastened, Deprived Of Sunshine And Fresh Air.

1. “Treated By A Variety Of …………’. For Weeks, She Often Showed Signs Of Improvement.” Fill the Given Blank With The Correct Answer.
Answer: Physicians

2. What Would Happen Each Time Saeeda’s Mother Showed Improvement?
Answer: Every Time Saeeda’s Mother Showed Improvement She Would Relapse Into Her Old, Sick Self’

4. What Was Saeeda’s Mother Forbidden To Eat?
Answer: Saeeda’s Mother Was Forbidden To Eat Normal Food.

5. Which Word From The Given Passage Means ‘Forever’?
Answer: From The Given Passage The Word’perpetual’means ‘Forever’.

6. ‘Though Weak And Colourless, She Was Expected To Eat Rich And Heavy Food’. Is The Given Statement True Or False?
Answer: The Given Statement Is False.

NCERT Solutions Class 6 A Pact With The Sun Chapter 7

Question 2. Read The Given Passage Carefully And Answer The Following Questions. Now, Children Have At Their Command A Secret Language, foreign to Grownups Altogether, In Which They Fluently Communicate With Trees, Flowers, Animals, The Sun, And The Moon, Perhaps Even With The Almighty.

Using That Special Language, Saeeda Addressed Her Remark To The Last Departing Rays Of The Sun. “Dearest Sister, Do Come Tomorrow With Lots Of Warmth And Brightness. You See, My Mother Is Ill And Needs Your Help”. “Surely,” Answered The Light, Don’t Look Unhappy’ We’ll Be Here At The Fixed Hour.”

Question 1. Who Has A Secret Language At Their Command?

  1. Children
  2. Trees
  3. Foreigners
  4. Animals

Answer: 1. Children

Question 2. With Whom Can The Children Fluently Communicate With By Using Their Special Language?

  1. Trees
  2. Animals
  3. The Sun And The Moon
  4. All Of These

Answer: 4. All Of These

Question 3. Which Word From The Given Passage Means ‘Unfamiliar Or Alien’?

  1. Secret
  2. Fluent
  3. Foreign
  4. Almighty

Answer: 3. Foreign

Question 4. Why Did Saeeda Ask The Sunrays To Return The Next Day?

  1. Because It Was Winter Time.
  2. Because They had Drytheir Clothes.
  3. Because Saeeda Wanted To Get A Tan.
  4. Because Saeeda’s Mother Needed The Sun.

Answer: 4. Because Saeeda’s Mother Needed The Sun.

Question 5. “Surely,” Answered The Light, Don’t Look

  1. We’ll Be Here At The Fixed Hour.”
  2. Unhappy
  3. Excited
  4. Depressed
  5. Murderous

Answer: 1. Unhappy

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 7 Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1. What Happened To Saeeda’s Mother? Or What Was Saeeda’s Mother Ailing From?
Answer: Saee. As Mother Was Suffering From Fever, Cough, Body-Ache And Painful Joints

Question 2. Why Didn’t Saeeda’s Mother’s Condition Improve?
Answer: Saeeda’s Mother’s Conditions Did Not Improve Because She Was Forbidden Normal Food And Confined To A Small And Dark Room.

Question 3. How Did Saeeda’s Mother Afford To Pay The Doctor’s Fees?
Answer: Saeeda’s Mother Afforded To Pay The Doctor’s Fees By Selling A Few Trinkets.

Question 4. What Became A Subject Of Noisy Commentary?
Answer: The Specialist’s Advice For Saeeda’s Mother Became A Subject Of Noisy Commentary Among All People Who Present In The House

Question 5. What did Saeeda do when she heard he mother lament from the other room?
Answer: Saeeda remained silent when she heard her mother lament from the other room. Later, she made a pact with the Sun.

Question 6. How did Saeeda communicate with sun rays?
Answer: Saeeda communicated with the last departing sunrays with the help of a secret language, that is not known to grown-ups.

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 7 Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1. How did Saeeda’s mother react to the doctor’s advice? a
Answer: Saeeda’s mother remained quiet and was determined to follow the doctor’s advice to recover from her illness. Hence, when a debate regarding the doctor’s advice was going on in her house, she remained out of it.

Question 2. What do you understand by ‘a secret language’?
Answer: ‘A secret language’ is a language that is unknown to others. In the context of the lesson, it means that children know a secret language, foreign to grown-ups. They use this language to communicate with natural things like trees, flowers, animals, the Sun, the moon, and even with God.

Question 3. Why did the Sunrays stage a revolt against their father, the Sun?
Answer: When the sunrays were preparing themselves to reach the Earth, the Sun told them not to go as there were clouds in the way. One of the rays said that she had made a pact with Saeeda, so she had to keep her promise. The rays said that they couldn’t stay back and revolted against their father, the Sun, to reach the Earth.

A Pact With The Sun Class 6 NCERT Summary

Question 4. How did Saeeda’s mother recover from her illness?
Answer: Saeeda’s mother recovered fully from her illness by following the doctor’s advice – an hour of sunlight and lungfuls of fresh air every day. She used to feel the Sun on her hands and face. She breathed in the fresh air outside her room and ate whatever she liked.

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 7 Long Answer Type Questions

Question 1. Why Did Saeeda’s Mother Consult A Doctor? How Did She Manage To Arrange The Doctor’s Fees And Afford Costly Medicines?
Answer: Saeeda’s Mother Became Critical And People Around Her House Advised Her To Consult A Doctor Even Though His Fee Was Likely To Be High. Saeeda’s Mother Was Poor And Could Not Afford The Doctor’s Fees And Costly Medicines.

Therefore, She Sold Some Of Her Trinkets To Pay The Doctor’s Fees And Buy The Costly Medicines. The Doctor Told Her To Leave The Dark Room And Get Into A Bigger Room With Open Doors And Windows. The Doctor Also Advised Her To Sit Under Sunshine For An Hour Daily And Breathe In Fresh Air.

Question 2. Comment On The Title Of The story Pact With The Sun.
Answer: ‘A Pact With The Sun’ Is An Inspirational Story Where A Daughter (Saeeda) Requested The Sunrays To Provide Warmth To Her Mother And Make Her Well.

It Shows A Daughter’s Love And Affection For Her Mother. Her Mother Was Ill And The Doctor Had Advised Her To Sit In The Sun And Breathe In Fresh Air.

But There Was No Sunshine For A Few Days Which Made Saeeda Worried. Therefore, Saeeda Made A Pact With The Sunrays That They Would Come Down To The Earth The Next Day To Make Her Mother Healthy And Well.

The Sunrays Also Fulfilled Their Promise And Reached The Earth The Next Morning. The Title Was Appropriate Because A Pact Made Her Mother Healthy And Well.

Question 3. What Message Does The Story Pact With The Sun’ Conveys?
Answer: The Story Pact With The Sun’ Is An Inspirational Story That Brings Forward Many Lessons Through The Characters Saeeda And Her Ill Mother.

The Story, First, And Foremost, Tells Us About The Importance Of Being Huppy, Eating Good Food, Basking In Sunshine, And Breathing Fresh Air. Humans Especially Old People, Need All Of These Things To Live A Healthy Life Free Of Medical Worries.

The Story Also Teaches Us That When We Are Determined To Do Something, Even Natural Forces Help Us In Achieving It.

Saeeda Wanted Her Mother To Recover And Her Determination Made The Sun Rays Help Her. Further, The Story Conveys The Importance Of Keeping One’s Promise. The Sun Says Revolted Against Their Father To Help Saeeda As They Had Promised Her.

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 6 The Wonder Called Sleep Question And Answers

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 6 The Wonder Called Sleep Question And Answers

The chapter ‘The Wonder Called Sleep’ tells us about the importance of sleep in our lives. It also explains the concept of dreams and how they are very important for humans. The chapter also contains a Person called poem Lights Out’ written by Edward Thomas about the experience of falling asleep.

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 6 The Wonder Called Sleep Question And Answers

Sleep is a State of Rest

Sleep is a mystery as we all know what it is but do not know what causes us to sleep. Sleep is a state of rest in which we are unaware of our surroundings. When we sleep, we give our body time to recover after completing our daily activities. After sleep, we become alert and active

Read and Learn More NCERT Solutions for Class 6 English

We are not aware of what happened while we were sleeping. We may remember a dream but the rest of our sleep is unknown to us. It is a kind of darkness in which nothing seems to have taken Place.

Changes in Body

Several changes happen in our body when we sleep. Our muscles relax, heartbeat becomes slower and temperature as well as blood pressure level goes down. Our brain also rests and so, we cannot be aware of anything while sleeping. When we wake up our temperature, blood pressure, heartbeat, and breathing become normal and we forget most of our dreams.

The dream is an Activity of the Mind

Dream is an activity of the mind that takes place when we are asleep. When we sleep, we dream many things’ Some dreams can happen in reality while others cannot. Dreams are important to humans for many reasons

They help us sleep even with noise or disturbances. Doctors have found that dreams can also tell us about the problems we face. However, dreams can never tell the future’ Sleep is common but it is a wonderful and powerful experience. Many poets have written poems on sleep’

Class 6 English Chapter 6 The Wonder Called Sleep NCERT Solutions

Lights Out

The chapter includes a poem titled ‘ Lights Out ‘ written by Edward Thomas about the wonders of sleep’ The poet writes that he is feeling sleepy. The state of sleep is like an impossibly deep forest where everyone must lose their way no matter who they are. Sleep is not a matter of choice as each one of us has to sleep’ People cannot choose any book or the face of a loved one when one is feeling sleepy. The poet states that he has to leave everything behind and go into the unknown land of sleep all alone.

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 6 Word Meaning

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 6 The Wonder Called Sleep Question And Answers Word Meaning

Chapter 6 The Wonder Called Sleep Intext And Exercise Questions

Question 1. What is the most obvious advantage of sleep?
Answer: The most obvious advantage of sleep is that through it we can recover from fatigue.

Question 2. What happens to our body when we sleep?
Answer: When we sleep, our muscles relax more and our heartbeat becomes slower. Our temperature and blood pressure go down.

Question 3. Define a dream in your own words.
Answer: A dream is an activity of the mind which takes place when we are asleep.

Question 4. Why are dreams important? Mention two reasons.
Answer: Dreams are important due to the following reasons

  • They help us sleep through noise and other disturbances.
  • They can provide details and solutions for the problems we face.

Question 5. Why has sleep been called a wonder?
Answer: Sleep has been called a wonder for the following reasons

Nobody knows the cause of sleep It is a common experience but many details about it are still unknown. It refreshes our tired bodies and minds. While sleeping, we are completely unaware of our surroundings. It is necessary for us. We cannot choose to stay awake for long

Question 6. Describe briefly to the class an improbable dream you have ever had.
Answer: Once I had a dream that I had been transferred to the era of Emperor Akbar. I saw the majestic palaces, the army, and the artillery. I saw the entire kingdom and was welcomed everywhere. People were happy with the administration of the kingdom. I met the queen and all the courtiers of the court. It felt as if I was witnessing the entire history with my own eyes.

NCERT Solutions for Class 6 English Chapter 6 The Wonder Called Sleep

Question 7. Grandmothers and mothers sing nice little songs while rocking little ones to sleep. Such a song is called a ‘lullaby’. Do you remember a lullaby in your language? Tell the class in English what the lullaby says.
Answer: Do it yourself.

Chapter 6 The Wonder Called Sleep Multiple Choice Questions

Question 1. “Sleep Is A State Of Unconscious Rest’ Even Our Ever-Active Brain Slows Down So We Can’t Think Or Act Consciously”. What Do The Underlined Words In The Given Sentence Mean?

  1. Inactive – Active
  2. Unaware – Aware
  3. Absent – Present
  4. Carefree – Guarded

Answer: 2. Unaware – Aware

Question 2. “Some Dreams Are Probable, While Others Are Not”‘ What Does The Given Statement Mean?

  1. Events That Happen In Our Dreams Can Never Happen In Reality
  2. Events That Happen In Our Dreams Always Happen Again In Reality
  3. Events That Happen In Our Dreams Might Happen In Reality
  4. Events That Happen In Our Dreams And Our Reality Are Never Connected

Answer: 3. Events That Happen In Our Dreams Might Happen In Reality

Question 3. Read The Given Statements And Choose The Correct Answer.

  1. Statement 1as We Sink Deeply In Sleep, Our Blood
  2. Pressure And Temperature Goes Down
  3. Statement 2 When We Wake Up Our Temperature And Blood Pressure Rises Back To Normal.
  4. Statement 1 Is Correct, But Statement 2 Is Incorrect’
  5. Statement I Is Incorrect, But Statement 2 Is Correct’
  6. Both statements are Correct.
  7. Both statements are Incorrect.

Answer: Both The Statements Are Correct’

Question 4. Read The Given Statements And Choose The Correct Answer.

  1. Statement 1 Our Sleep Is A Kind Of Darkness In Which Nothing Seems To Have Taken Place
  2. Statement 2 We Do Not Remember Anything that May Have Happened During Our Sleep Because It Causes Distraction To Our Sleep.
  3. Statement 1 Is Correct, But Statement 2 Is Incorrect’
  4. Statement 1 Is Incorrect, But Statement 2 Is Correct’
  5. Both The Staternent Are Correct’
  6. Both The statements are Incorrect’

Answer: 1. Statement I Is Correct, But Statement 2 Is Incorrect’

Question 5. ” As We Sink Deeper Into Sleep, ……….” The Underlined Word In The Above Line Means

  1. Go
  2. Drown
  3. Ride
  4. Slide

Answer: 1. Go

Question 6. What Becomes Slower When We Sleep?

  1. Blood Pressure
  2. Temperature
  3. Heartbeat
  4. All Of These

Answer: 4. All Of These

The Wonder Called Sleep Class 6 NCERT Questions and Answers

Question 7. Why Can’t We Think Or Act Consciously When We Sleep?

  1. Because Our Brain Remains Active
  2. Because Ourbrain Speeds Up
  3. Because Ourbrain Shuts Down
  4. Because Our Brain Slows Down

Answer: 4. Because Our Brain Slows Down

Question 8. To What Level Does Our Temperature Rise When We Wake Up?

  1. To Normal Level
  2. To High Level
  3. To Low Level
  4. To Medium Level

Answer: 1. To Normal Level

Question 9. Which Of The following statements Is True?

  1. Some Dreams Are Probable
  2. Aii Dreams Are Probable
  3. Dreams Are Not Probable
  4. Half Of The Dreams Are Probable

Answer: 1. Some Dreams Are Probable

Question 10. Arrange The Following Options In The Correct Sequence.

  1. Our Temperature And Blood Pressure Rises Back To Normal And We Wake Up
  2. We Slip Into The State Of Dreams And Become Unaware Of Our Surroundings
  3. Our Muscles Relax And Heartbeat Becomes Lower.
  4. Our Body Becomes Tired From The Fatigue Caused By The Day’ Activities’

Choose The Correct Answer

  1. (1), (2), 3), (4)
  2. (4), (3), (2)’ (1)
  3. (2), (4), (1) (3)
  4. (4), (1), (2)’ (3)

Answer: (4), (3), (2), (1)

Chapter 6 The Wonder Called Sleep Extra-Based Questions

Question 1. Read the following passage and answer the questions carefully.

We know enough about what sleep is, though we don’t know what exactly causes sleep. Sleep is a state of rest – an unconscious rest. When we sleep our body recovers from fatigue caused by the day’s activities.

After a good sleep and the rest that it gives, we become alert and active again, ready for the normal activities of the day. When we wake up in the morning, it is not always possible for us to remember what happened when we were asleep.

We may remember a dream but the rest of our sleep was a kind of darkness in which nothing seems to have taken place.

1. Why is sleep called an unconscious rest?
Answer: Sleep is called an unconscious rest because we lose consciousness and are unaware ofour surroundings during sleep.

2. What happens to our body during the day?
Answer: During the day, our body performs many functions and gets tired.

3. How can one become active and alert after being fatigued by a day’s activities?
Answer: After a good night’s sleep and the rest that it gives, we can become alert and active again.

4. What is the meaning of the word fatigue?
Answer: The word fatigue means ‘to get tired’.

5. Why is it not possible for us to remember what happened when we were asleep?
Answer: We can’t remember what happened when we were asleep because our brain shuts down and we are unaware of our surroundings.

The Wonder Called Sleep Chapter 6 NCERT Notes

Question 2. Read the following passage and answer the questions carefully.
Several things happen to our bodies while we are sleeping. As we sink deeper into sleep, our muscles relax more and more.

Our heartbeat becomes slower. Our temperature and blood pressure go down. The ever-active brain also slows down so that we can’t think or act consciously. But we dream. When we wake up, our temperature and blood pressure rise to normal. Our heartbeat and breathing also become normal and we are fully awake and have forgotten most, is not all, of the dreams we had while sleeping.

1. What Happens To Our Body While We Sleep?

  1. Our Muscles Relax More And More.
  2. Our Heartbeat Becomes Slower.
  3. Our Temperature And Blood Pressure Goes Down.
  4. All Of The Above

Answer: 4. All Of The Above

2. As We Sink Deeper Into Sleep, Our …………… Relax.

  1. Emotions
  2. Nerves
  3. Muscles
  4. Heart Beat

Answer: 2. Muscles

3. When Does Our Heartbeat Become Slower?

  1. When We Sleep
  2. When We Breathe
  3. When We Dance
  4. When We Wake

Answer: When We Sleep

4. Which Quality Is Attached To The Brain In The Passage?

  1. Ever-Active
  2. Siow
  3. Sensitive
  4. Tired

Answer: 1. Ever-Active

5. When We Wake Up, Our Temperature And Blood Pressure Become

  1. The Top
  2. A Feverish Degree
  3. Normal
  4. See The Sun

Answer: 2. Normal

Chapter 6 The Wonder Called Sleep Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1. What Do You Mean By Sleep? Or What Is The State Of Unconscious Rest?
Answer: Sleep Is A State Of Rest Where We Remain In An Unconscious State.

Question 2. Why Is It Necessary To Sleep?
Answer: It Is Necessary to Sleep Because It Makes Us Alert And Active. It Gives Us the Energy To Perform The Usual Activities Of The Day.

Question 3. What Happens To Our Temperature And Blood Pressure When We Sleep?
Answer: During Sleep, Our Heartbeat Becomes Slower And Our Temperature And Blood Pressure Goes Down.

Question 4. Are All Our Dreams Probable?
Answer: Only Some Dreams Are Probable Which Means That Many Of The Things That Happen In Dreams Could Happen When We Are Awake.

Question 5. Can Dreams Tell The Future?
Answer: No, Dreams Can Never Tell The Future.

Chapter 6 The Wonder Called Sleep Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1. What Does A Good Sleep Provide?
Answer: A Good Sleep Provides A Complete Rest To Our Body And Become Active Again And Ready For The Normal Activities Of The Day.

Question 2. What Kind Of Changes Occurs In Our Body When We Wake Up? Or What Happens To Us After Waking Up From Sleep?
Answer: When We Wake Up After Sleep, Our Temperature And Blood Pressure Rise To Normal Or Average. Our Heartbeat And Breathing Also Become Normal.

Question 3. What Do Our Dreams Reveal About Us? How Do They Help Us?
Answer: Our Dreams May Reveal Many Details About Our Life And The Problems We Face. Although Dreams Cannot Tell The Future, They Might Still Help Us By Providing Clues To Solutions To Our Problems That Escape Us In Our Waking State’

The Wonder Called Sleep Class 6 NCERT Summary

Question 4. What Is The Theme Of The Poem ‘Lights Out’?
Answer: The Theme Of the poem ” Lights Out is That Sleep Is Necessary. Nothing Can Cause Us Not To Sleep. However, Nobody Knows What Causes Sleep.

Chapter 6 The Wonder Called Sleep Long Answer Type Questions

Question 1. What Physical Changes Occur In Our Body When We Sink Deeper Into Sleep?
Answer: When We Enjoy More And More Sound Sleep, Our Muscles Relax And Our Heartbeat Becomes Slower. Our Temperature And Blood Pressure Both Go Down. The ever-active brain also slows down so that we cannot think and put pressure on our minds. In sleep, we are not in the position to think or act consciously’ When we are awake, our temperature and blood pressure are normal. Our heartbeat and breathing are also normal.

Question 2. What is the importance of dreams in our life?
Answer: A dream is an activity of the mind that takes place when we are asleep. Some dreams appear to be true while others are not. Many things that happen in dreams won’t happen when we are awake. Dreams are important as they can help us to sleep despite noise or other disturbances. Some doctors say that dreams can reveal a great deal about one’s problems and can provide a key to the solution to those Problems.

Question 3. What does the poet Edward Thomas write about sleep? Explain with the help of the poem included in the chapter ‘ Lights Out’.
Answer: ‘Lights Out’ is a poem written by Edward Thomas about the wonders of sleep. The poet writes that the state of sleep is like an impossibly deep forest where everyone must lose their way no matter how careful they are. Edward Thomas insists that sleep is not a matter of choice and we all have to sleep. People can’t choose any book or the face of a loved one instead of sleeping. The poet further states that he has no choice but to leave everything behind and go into the unknown land of sleep all alone.

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 5 The Monkey And The Crocodile Question And Answers

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 5 The Monkey And The Crocodile Question And Answers

The Story Of ‘The Monkey And The Crocodile ‘ has Been Taken From The Tales Of Panchatantra. It Is A Story That Teaches Us To Choose Our Friends Wisely and Act Smartly, And Calmly In A Dangerous Situation.

It Also Teaches Us Not To Take Advantage Of Anyone And Their Kindness. The Monkey In The Story Gets Caught In A Dangerous Situation because of Trusting His Friend, The Crocodile.

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 5 The Monkey And The Crocodile Question And Answers

The Monkey And The Crocodile

A Monkey Lived On A Fruit Tree On The River Bank. He Was Very Happy But Lonely. He Wanted A Friend To Talk To And Share Fruits With. One Day, A Crocodile Appeared On The Riverside.

Read and Learn More NCERT Solutions for Class 6 English

The Monkey Welcomed Him And Offered Him Fruits. The Crocodile Told Him He Had Come To Search For Food For Himself And His Wife. So, The Monkey Plucked The Fruits And Gave It To Him.

The Crocodile Asked The Monkey If He Could Get Some Fruits On His Next Visit. The Monkey Agreed And Invited Him To The River Bank Again.

The Friendship Between The Monkey And The Crocodile

Soon, The Monkey And The Crocodile Became Good Friends. The Crocodile Visited The Monkey Regularly To Eat Fruits And Talk With Him. They Talked About Birds And Animals And The Difficulties That The Villagers Had In Growing Crops Due To Lack Of Rain.

The Monkey and the Crocodile Class 6 NCERT Question and Answers

The Greed Of Crocodile’s Wife

One Day, The Crocodile Stayed Late With The Monkey Which Annoyed His Wife. This Was So Because She Had To Take Care Of The Babies By Herself. She Asked The Crocodile About The Friend He Was Spending Time With And Her Husband Replied That It was R.R., A Very Nice Monkey Who Sends Fruits For Her Every Day.

She Demanded The Crocodile To Bring The Monkey So She Could Eat His Heart. The Crocodile Got Angry And Refused’ So, His Wife Dove To The Bottom Of The River In Anger So That The Crocodile Would Have To Take Care Of The Children.

The Crocodile’s Dilemma

The Crocodile Was Confused About What To Do. Although He Loved His Wife, He Was Very Fond Of His Friend Too. He Agreed To Betray His Friend And Invited The Monkey Home. The Monkey Accepted The Invitation And Sat On The Crocodile’s Back To Cross The River Since He Could Not Swim.

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 5 The Monkey And The Crocodile Question And Answers.

The Monkey And His Clever Trick

When They Were Going To The Crocodile’s Home, The Crocodile Stopped In The Middle Of The River Where It Was The Deepest And Confessed. He Told The Monkey That He Had Planned To Kill The Monkey So His Wife Could Eat His Heart.

The Monkey Was Scared But He Remained Calm And Came Up With A Clever Plan To Save His Life. He Told The Crocodile That He un Happy To Give His Heart For The Crocodile’s Wife.

However, The Crocodile Should Have Told Him Earlier Because Monley Hadn’t Brought His Heart With Him. The Crocodile Turned Around So The Monkey Could Get His Heart.

As soon as the monkey jumped on the tree, he sighed in relief. He told the crocodile that eating fruits is good for the mind and body, and ended his friendship with the crocodile. The crocodile was sad at losing a good friend and cried some real tears. He also wanted to tell his wife how her greed had lost him a great friendship.

Word Meaning

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 5 The Monkey And The Crocodile Question And Answers Word Meaning

NCERT Class 6 English Chapter 5 The Monkey And The Crocodile Question And Answers Word Meaning.

Chapter 5 The Monkey And The Crocodile Intext And Exercise Questions

Question 1. The monkey was happy living in the fruit tree, but his happiness was not complete. What did he miss?
Answer: The monkey was happy living on the tree full of fruits, but he wanted a companion to talk to and share the fruits with. He missed having friends.

Question 2. What did the two friends generally talk about?
Answer: The two friends talked about birds, animals, and the villagers who lived nearby. They also talked about the difficulties faced by the villagers in growing good crops due to lack of rain.

Question 3. Why was the crocodile’s wife annoyed with her husband one day?
Answer: The crocodile’s wife is annoyed with her husband one day because he stayed with the monkey for a long time. His wife waited for him and had to manage the little crocodiles alone at home.

Class 6 English Chapter 5 The Monkey and the Crocodile NCERT Solutions

Question 4. Why was the crocodile unwilling to invite his friend home?
Answer: The crocodile was unwilling to invite his friend home because his wife wanted to kill him and eat his heart

Question 5. What did the crocodile tell the monkey midstream?
Answer: When the crocodile and the monkey reached the middle of the river, the crocodile confessed that he had brought the monkey to kill him because the crocodile’s wife would not survive without eating the monkey’s heart.

Question 6. How did the monkey save himself?
Answer: The clever monkey saved his life by playing a trick. He told the crocodile that he would meet his wife’s demand but added that he had left his heart on the tree. He asked the crocodile to turn back and take him to the tree so that he could get his heart. As soon as they reached the riverbank, the monkey jumped onto the tree and saved his life.

Question 7. What does the last sentence of the story suggest? What would the crocodile tell his wife?
Answer: The last sentence ofthe story suggests that the crocodile would tell his wife about how her greed had broken a great friendship between him and the monkey

Chapter 5 The Monkey And The Crocodile Multiple Choice Questions

Question 1. Why Did The Monkey Need A Companion?

  1. To Talk To
  2. To Share The Fruits
  3. To Play
  4. Both (1) And (2)

Answer: 4. Both (1) And (2)

Question 2. Read The Statements Given Below And Choose The Correct Answer.

  1. Statement 1 a Monkey Made A Home In A Tree Laden With Fruit.
  2. Statement 2 The Monkey Uras Unhappy Because He Wanted To Eat Vegetables.
  3. Statement I Is Correct But Statement 2 Is Incorrect.
  4. Statement 1 Is Incorrect But Statement 2 is correct.
  5. Both The Statements Are Correct.
  6. Both The Statements Are Incorrect.

Answer: 1. Statement 1 Is Correct But Statement 2 Is Incorrect.

Question 3. How Did The Monkey Feel At The Absence Of A Companion?

  1. Angry
  2. Envy
  3. Sorrow
  4. Sorrow

Answer: 3. Sorrow

Question 4. Why Did The Crocodile Come To The Riverside?

  1. He Came In Search Of Food For Himself And His Wife.
  2. He Came In Search Of Someone To Talkwith’
  3. He Came To Befriend The Monkey.
  4. He Came To Eat The Monkey.

Answer: 1. He Came In Search Of Food For Himself And His Wife.

Question 5. How Did The Crocodile Describe The Monkey To His Wife?

  1. “Oh, He Is A Very Nice Monkey “
  2. “Oh, He Is A Very Lazy Monkey”
  3. “Oh, He Is A Bad Monkey”
  4. ‘Oh, He Is A Selfish Monkey”

Answer: 1. “Oh, He Is A Very Nice Monkey”

NCERT Solutions for Class 6 English Chapter 5 The Monkey and the Crocodile

Question 6. The Crocodile Cared For His Wife And Was Very Fond Of His Friend Too. This Suggests The Crocodile Is

  1. Loving
  2. Stingy
  3. Jealous
  4. Proud

Answer: 1. Loving

Question 7. When He Came To Know That His Life Was In Danger’ The Monkey Was

  1. Furious
  2. Indifferent
  3. Thunderstruck
  4. Lonely

Answer: 3. Thunderstruck

Question 8. But He Was Like All Monkeys.

  1. Violent And Angry
  2. Sensible And Clever
  3. Foolish And Childish
  4. Dumb Andlazy

Answer: 2. Sensible And Clever

Question 9. What Did The Monkey Tell The Crocodile About His Heart?

  1. That His Heart Was Already Dead
  2. That His Heart Had Been Stolen By Another Monkey
  3. That He Had Left His Heart On The Tree.
  4. That His Heart Was Poisonous And Eating It Would Kill The Crocodile Wife.

Answer: That He Had Left His Heart On The Tree.

Question 10. Who Said The Following? “Thought You Carried It All The Time.”

  1. The Monkey
  2. The Crocodile’s Wife
  3. The Crocodile
  4. The Little Crocodile

Answer: 2. The Crocodile

Question 11. When Did The Monkey Release A Deep Sigh Of Relief?

  1. In The Middle Of The River
  2. After Jumping On The Tree
  3. Before Jumping On The Tree
  4. After Climbing On The Crocodile Back

Answer: 2. After Jumping On The Tree

Question 12. The Monkey Decided To Discontinue His ………… With The Crocodile.

  1. Enmity
  2. Relationship
  3. Agreement
  4. Friendship

Answer: 4. Friendship

Question 13. Read The Statements $Iven Below And Choose The Correct Answer.

Statement 1 The Monkey Was Very Clever, But The Crocodile Was Smarter Than Him. Statement 2 The Crocodile’s Wife Wanted To Eat The Monkey’s Heart

  1. Statement I Is Correct, But Statement 2 Is Incorrect.
  2. Statement 1 Is Incorrect, But Statement 2 Is Correct.
  3. Both statements are Correct.
  4. Both statements are Incorrect.

Answer: Statement 1 Is Incorrect, But Statement 2 Is Correct’

The Monkey and the Crocodile Class 6 NCERT Questions and Answers

Question 14. Arrange The Following Options In The Correct Sequence.

  1. The Crocodile’s Wife Demanded The Monkey’s Heart.
  2. The Monkey On The Tree Was Looking For A Friend
  3. The Monkey Outsmarted The Crocodile.
  4. A Crocodile Came To The Riverbank And The Monkey Shared Fruits With Him,

Choose The Correct option 

  1. (1), (2), (3), (4)
  2. (4), (3), 2), (1)
  3. (2), (4), (1), (3)
  4. (4), (1), (2), (3)

Answer: 3. (2), (4), (1), (3)

Chapter 5 The Monkey And The Crocodile Extract-Based Questions

Question 1. Read The Given Passage Carefully And Answer The Questions

The Monkey Plucked Some From The Nearest Branch
And Threw Them Down. The Crocodile Found Them
Delicious. “Thanks,” He Said. “May I Have Some On
My Next Visit?” “Certainly, As Many As You Like And
Some For Your Wife Too,” Said The Monkey. “Do Come
Again. I’d Rather Lonely Here”. The Crocodile Visited
The Monkey Regularly And Ate The Fruits Which His
Host Threw Down. He Took Some Home For His Wife.
The Monkey And The Crocodile Were Now The Best Of
Friends. They Talked And Were Never Tired Of Talking.
They Talked About Birds And Animals, About The
Villages Nearby And The Difficulties Villagers Faced In
Raising Good Crops For Lack Of Rain.

1. “The Monkey Plucked Some From The Nearest Branch And Threw Them Down.” What Did The Monkey Throw Down?
Answer: The Monkey Threw Down Some Fruits For The, Crocodile To Eat.

2. What Did The Crocodile Ask The Monkey?
Answer: The Crocodile Asked The Monkey If He Could Have The Fruits Again On His Next Visit.

3. Why Did The Monkey Invite The Crocodile To Visit Regularly?
Answer: The Monkey Invited The Crocodile To Visit Regularly Because He Was Lonely And Wanted A Friend To Talk With.

4. “The Monkey And The Crocodile Were The Best Of Friends.” What Is The Opposite Of The Underlined Phrase?
Answer: The Worst Of Enemies.

5. Why Did The Villagers Have Trouble Raising Good Crops?
Answer: The Villagers Had Trouble Raising Good Crops Because Of the Lack Of rain.

Question 2. Read The Given Passage Carefully And Answer The Questions

“Who Is This Friend Of Yours You Are So Fond Of?”
“Oh, He Is A Very Nice Monkey,” He Replied. “He Lives
On A Fruit-Tree. He Sends Fruits For You Every Day. You
Don’t Expect Me To Climb Trees, Do You?” “A Nice
Monkey, L’m Sure,” Replied The Wife With Obvious
Sarcasm. “If you Ask Me, This Monkey Should Be My
Food. I Want To Eat His Heart So Much.” “What A
Foolish Thing To Say!” Shouted The Crocodile. “L Can’t
Kill A Friend, Though I Won’t Mind A Monkey
Occasionally For A Change Of Taste.”

1. ‘Who is This Friend Of Yours You Are So Fond Of?’ Whom Was The Crocodile’s Wife Referred?

  1. The Snake
  2. The Monkey
  3. The Lion
  4. The Fox

Answer: 2. The Monkey

2. ‘You Don’t Expect Me To Climb Trees, Do You?’ Why Couldn’t The Speaker Of This Line Be Expected To Climb Trees?

  1. Because He Didn’t Have A Tail
  2. Because He Wasn’t Good At Climbing Trees
  3. Because He Was A Monkey
  4. Because He Was A Crocodile

Answer: 1. Because He Was A Crocodile

3. Why Did The Wife Of The Crocodiles Call The Monkey Nice?

  1. She Was Being Sarcastic
  2. She Was Joking
  3. She Was Trying To Win Over The Monkey
  4. She Was Trying To Make Her Husband Jealous

Answer: 1. She Was Being Sarcastic

4. What Part Of The Monkey Did The Crocodile Wife Want To Eat

  1. Liver
  2. Heart
  3. Brain
  4. Intestines

Answer: 2. Heart

The Monkey and the Crocodile Class 6 NCERT Summary

5. Choose The Antonym Of The Word ‘Fond’.

  1. Devoted
  2. Tender
  3. Hostile
  4. Loving

Answer: 3. Hostile

Chapter 5 The Monkey And The Crocodile Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1. Where did the monkey live?
Answer: The monkey lived on a tree laden with fruit on the bank of a river.

Question 2. Why was the monkey happy?
Answer: The monkey was happy because he could eat the fruit of his choice as much as he wanted.

Question 3. Why was the monkey sad?
Answer: The monkey was sad because he was lonely and wanted a companion to talk with.

Question 4. Why did the crocodile come near the bank of the refi
Answer: The crocodile came near the bank of the river in search of food for him and his wife.

Question 5. What did the crocodile’s wife want? Diksha
Answer: The crocodile’s wife wanted to eat the monkey’s heart’

Question 6. Which character betrayed the monkey and why?
Answer: The crocodile betrayed the monkey because his wife wanted to eat the monkey’s heart.

Question 7. Why did the crocodile shout at his wife? Diksha
Answer: The crocodile shouted at his wife because she wanted to eat the heart of the monkey.

Question 8. How did the monkey react to the crocodile’s invitation?
Answer: The monkey completely trusted the crocodile and accepted the invitation to visit the crocodile’s home.

Question 9. Where did the crocodile reveal the truth to The monkey?
Answer: The crocodile revealed the truth that he had brought the monkey to kill him in the middle of the river, where the current was the strongest.

Question 10. What happened after the monkey came to know that his life was in danger?
Answer: The monkey remained calm and tricked the crocodile
to swim back to the tree after he came to know that his life was in danger.

Chapter 5 The Monkey And The Crocodile Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1. How did the crocodile and the monkey become best friends?
Answer: The crocodile and the monkey became best friends as the crocodile visited the monkey frequently and ate fruits with him. He also took some fruits home for his wife. They talked about many things and their bonding resulted in friendship.

Question 2. Who Was In A Serious Dilemma? Give Reasons Behind It.
Answer: The Crocodile Was In A Serious Dilemma Because His Wife Wanted To Eat The Heart Of His Best Friend. He Was Not Able To Decide What To Do. He Loved His Wife And Was Very Fond Of His Friend Too. He Did Not Want To Kill His Friend.

Question 3. What Did The Oocodile’s Wife Do To Get Her Unreasonable Demand Accepted By Her Husband?
Answer: The Crocodile’s Wife Became Angry And Refused To Take Care Ofthe Kids Unless Her Husband Accepted Her Demand To Bring Her The Monkey’s Heart.

NCERT Solutions for Chapter 5 The Monkey and the Crocodile

Question 4. How Did The Crocodile Deceive The Monkey?
Answer: The Crocodile Deceived The Monkey By Inviting Him Home For Dinner While Planning To Kill Him And Take His Heart.

Question 5. What Advice Did The Crocodile Receive From The Monkey At The End Of The Story?
Answer: The Advice That The Crocodile Received From The Monkey Was That Fresh Fruits Are Good For Mind And Body. Therefore, The Crocodile’s Wife Should Eat Fresh Fruits Rather Than The Monkey’s Heart

Chapter 5 The Monkey And The Crocodile Long Answer Type Question

Question 1. Comment On The Crocodile’s Decision To Betray And Kill His Monkey Friend.
Answer: The Crocodile Took The Decision To Kill The Monkey Because He Wanted To Please His Wife. It Was The Wrong Thing To Do Because One Should Never Take Advantage Of Someone’s Trust And Betray Them.

It’s Even More Wrong To Betray And Kill A Friend. The Demand Of The Crocodile’s Wife Was Unreasonable And Cruel. The Crocodile Knew That But He Compromised With His Principals To Please His Wife. If he Had Not Done That He Would Have Had A Strong Friendship With The Monkey And Access To The Fruits Of The Tree.

Question 2. Why Did The Monkey Decide To Discontinue His Friendship With The Crocodile?
Answer: The Monkey’s Decision To Discontinue His Friendship With The Crocodile Was Justified. The Monkey Was Deceived By His Friend, The Crocodile Who Had Invited The Monkey For A Meal To His Home. The Monkey Agreed, But The Crocodile Told Him In The Middle Of The River That His Wife Wanted To Eat His Heart.

The Monkey Was Scared, But He Remained Calm. He Convinced The Crocodile To Take Him Back So That He Could Save Himself. The Foolish Crocodile Turned Back And Reached The Tree On The River Bank.

As Soon As They Reached The River Bank, The Monkey Jumped On The Tree And Saved His Life- He Broke His Friendship With The Selfish Crocodile As The Crocodile Wanted To Take Advantage of their friendship And Broken His Trust.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices Multiple Choice Questions

Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices Multiple Choice Questions Exercise -1 Section (A) Semiconductor, Energy Band

Question 1. A N-type semiconductor is

  1. Negatively charged
  2. Positively charged
  3. Neutral
  4. None of these

Answer: 3. Neutral

Question 2. The forbidden energy band gap in conductors semiconductors and insulators are EG1, EG2, and EG3 respectively, The relation among them is

  1. EG1 = EG2 = EG3
  2. EG1 < EG2 < EG3
  3. EG1 > EG2 > EG3
  4. EG1 < EG2 > EG3

Answer: 2. EG31 < EG2 < EG3

Question 3. The mobility of free electrons is greater than that of free holes because

  1. They carry a negative charge
  2. They are light
  3. They mutually collide less
  4. They require low energy to continue their motion

Answer: 4. They require low energy to continue their motion

Question 4. Electric conduction in a semiconductor takes place due to

  1. Electrons Only
  2. Holes Only
  3. Both Electrons And Holes
  4. Neither electrons nor Holes

Answer: 3. Both Electrons And Holes

Solids and Semiconductor Devices MCQs for NEET Physics Class 12

Question 5. Let n p and n e be the numbers of holes and conduction electrons in an intrinsic semiconductor

  1. np > ne
  2. np = ne
  3. np < ne
  4. np ≠ ne

Answer: 2. np = ne

Question 6. Let np and ne be the numbers of holes and conduction electrons in an extrinsic semiconductor

  1. np > ne
  2. np = ne
  3. np < ne
  4. np ≠ ne

Answer: 4. np ≠ ne

Question 7. An electric field is applied to a semiconductor. Let the number of charge carriers be n and the average drift speed be. If the temperature is increased,

  1. Both N And υ Will Increase
  2. N Will Increase But υ Will Decrease
  3. υ Will Increases But N Will Decrease
  4. Both N And υ Will Decrease

Answer: 2. N Will Increase But υ Will Decrease

Question 8. When an impurity is doped into an intrinsic semiconductor, the conductivity of the semiconductor

  1. Increases
  2. Decreases
  3. Remains The Same
  4. Become Zero

Answer: 1. Increases

Question 9. In a P-type semiconductor, the acceptor level is 57 meV, above the valence band. The maximum wavelength of light required to produce a hole will be

  1. 57 A°
  2. 57 × 10¯³ A°
  3. 217100 A°
  4. 11.61 × 10 A°

Answer: 3. 217100 A°

Question 10. The electrical conductivity of pure germanium can be increased by

  1. Increasing The Temperature
  2. Doping Acceptor Impurities
  3. Doping Donor Impurities
  4. Irradiating Ultraviolet Light On It.

Answer: 1. Increassing The Temperature

Question 11. A semiconductor is doped with a donor impurity

  1. The hole concentration increases
  2. The hole concentration decreases
  3. The electron concentration increases
  4. The electron concentration decreases

Answer: 2. The hole concentration decreases

Question 12. Which of the following when added as an impurity into silicon produces an n-type semiconductor?

  1. P
  2. Al
  3. B
  4. Mg

Answer: 1. P

Question 13. Which of the following diagrams correctly represents the energy levels in the p-type semiconductor?

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs The Energy Levels In The p–type

Question 14. In p-type semiconductor, the major charge carriers are :

  1. Holes
  2. Electrons
  3. Protons
  4. Neutrons

Answer: 3. Protons

Question 15. Copper and silicon are cooled from 300 K to 60K, and the specific resistance:-

  1. Decrease in copper but an increase in silicon
  2. Increase in copper but an increase in silicon
  3. Increase in both
  4. Decrease in both

Answer: 1. Decrease in copper but increase in silicon

Question 16. The value of the forbidden energy gap for the conductor is:

  1. 1 eV
  2. 6 eV
  3. 0 eV
  4. 3 eV

Answer: 1. 1 eV

Question 17. Ga As is a /an :

  1. Element Semiconductor
  2. Alloy Semiconductor
  3. Bad Conductor
  4. Metalic Semiconductor

Answer: Alloy Semiconductor

Question 18. The number of free electrons in Si at normal temperature is :

  1. 2.5 × 106 per cm3
  2. 1.5 × 1010 per cm3
  3. 1.5 × 1013 per cm3
  4. 2.5 × 1013 per cm3

Answer: 2. 1.5 × 1010 per cm3

Question 19. Hole are the charge carriers in :

  1. Semiconductor
  2. Ionic Solids
  3. P-Type Semiconductor
  4. Metals

Answer: 1. Semiconductor

Question 20. Regarding a semi-conductor which one of the following is wrong?

  1. There are no free electrons at 0 K
  2. There are no free electrons at room temperature
  3. The number of free electrons increases with the rise in temperature
  4. The charge carriers are electrons and holes.

Answer: 2. There are no free electrons at room temperature

Question 21. At absolute zero, Si acts as :

  1. Non-Metal
  2. Metal
  3. Insulator
  4. None Of These

Answer: 3. Insulator

Question 22. By increasing the temperature, the specific resistance of a conductor and ~ semiconductor:

  1. Increases For Both
  2. Decreases For Both
  3. Increases, Decreases Respectively
  4. Decreases, Increases Respectively

Answer: 3. Increases, Decreases Respectively

Question 23. The energy band gap is maximum in:

  1. Metals
  2. Superconductors
  3. Insulators
  4. Semiconductors

Answer: 3. Insulators

Question 24. A strip of copper and another of germanium are cooled from room temperature to 80 K. The resistance of :

  1. Each Of These Decreases
  2. Copper Strip Increases And That Of Germanium Decreases
  3. Copper Strip Decreases And That Of Germanium Increases
  4. Each Of These Increases

Answer: 3. Copper Strip Decreases And That Of Germanium Increases

Question 25. The difference in the variation of resistance with temperature in a metal and a semiconductor arises essentially due to the difference in the:

  1. Crystal Structure
  2. Variation Of The Number Of Charges Carries With Temperature
  3. Type Of Bonding
  4. Variation Of Scattering Mechanism With Temperature

Answer: 2. Variation Of The Number Of Charges Carries With Temperature

Question 26. In p-type semiconductors germanium is doped with :

  1. Gallium
  2. Aluminium
  3. Boron
  4. All Of These

Answer: 4. All Of These

Question 27. In a good conductor of electricity, the type of bonding that exists is :

  1. Ionic
  2. Van Der Waal
  3. Covalent
  4. Metallic

Answer: 4. Metallic

Question 28. Which of the following statements is true for an n-type semiconductor?

  1. The donor level lies closely below the bottom of the conduction band
  2. The donor level lies closely above the top of the valence band
  3. The donor level lies at the halfway mark of the forbidden energy gap
  4. None of the above

Answer: 1. The donor level lies closely below the bottom of the conduction band

Question 29. An n-type semiconductor is

  1. Negatively Charged
  2. Positively Charged
  3. Neutral
  4. None Of The Above

Answer: 3. Neutral

Question 30. The difference in the variation of resistance with temperature in a metal and a semiconductor arises essentially due to the difference in the

  1. Crystal Structure
  2. Change In The Number Of Charge Career
  3. Type Of Bonding
  4. None Of These

Answer: 2. Change In The Number Of Charge Career

Question 31. In P-Type Semiconductors Majority Charge Carriers Are

  1. Electrons
  2. Holes
  3. Neutrons
  4. Protons

Answer: 2. Holes

Question 32. Wire P and Q have the same resistance at ordinary (room) temperature. When heated, the resistance of P increases, and that of Q decreases. we conclude that

  1. p and Q are conductors of different materials.
  2. p is an n-type semiconductor and Q is a p-type semiconductor
  3. p is semiconductor and Q is conductor
  4. p is conductor and Q is semiconductor

Answer: 4. p is a conductor and Q is a semiconductor

Question 33. The resistance of a semiconductor and a conductor:

  1. Increases With Temperature For Both
  2. Decreases With Temperature For Both
  3. Increases And Decreases Respectively With Increase In Temperature
  4. Decreases And Increases Respectively With Increase In Temperature

Answer: 4. Decreases And Increases Respectively With Increase In Temperature

Question 34. In semiconductors at room temperature

  1. The valence band is filled and the conduction band is partially filled
  2. The valence band is filled
  3. The conduction band is empty
  4. The valence band is partially empty and the conduction band is partially filled

Answer: 4. The valence band is partially empty and the conduction band is partially filled

Question 35. Carbon, Silicon, and Germanium atoms have four valence electrons each. Their valence and conduction bonds are separated by energy band gaps represented by (Eg ) C, (Eg)si, and (Eg) Ge respectively. Which one of the following relationships is true in their case

  1. (Eg)c < (Eg)Ge
  2. (Eg)c > (Eg)si
  3. (Eg)c = (Eg)si
  4. (Eg)c < (Eg)si

Answer: 2. (Eg)c > (Eg)si

Question 36. In the energy band diagram of a material shown below, the open circles and filled circles denote holes and electrons respectively. The material is a/an :

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs In the energy band

  1. P-Type Semiconductor
  2. Insulator
  3. Metal
  4. N-Type Semiconductor

Answer: 1. P-Type Semiconductor

 

Question 35. Choose the correct option for the forward-biased characteristics of a p–n junction.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs the forward biased characteristics of a p–n junction.

Answer: 3.

Question 36. The emitter-base junction of a transistor is …….biased while the collector-base junction is …….biased

  1. Reverse, forward
  2. Reverse, reverse
  3. Forward, forward
  4. Forward, reverse

Answer: 4. Forward, reverse

Question 37. If the two ends of a P-N junction are joined by a wire-

  1. There will not be a steady current in the circuit
  2. There will be a steady current from the N-side to the P-side
  3. There will be a steady current from the P-side to the N-side
  4. There may or may not be a current depending upon the resistance of the connecting wire.

Answer: 1. There will not be a steady current in the circuit

Question 38. The region that has no free electrons and holes in a P-N juction is-

  1. P-region
  2. N-region
  3. Junction
  4. Depletion Region

Answer: 4. Depletion Region

Question 39. In the P-N junction at the near junction, there are-

  1. Only Positive Ions
  2. Only Negative Ions
  3. Positive And Negative Ion Both
  4. Electron And Holes Both

Answer: 3. Positive And Negative Ion Both

Class 12 NEET Physics Solids and Semiconductor Devices MCQs

Question 40. A diode is made forward biased by a two-volt battery however there is a drop of 0.5 V across the diode which is independent of the current. Also, a current greater than 10 mA produces large joule loss and damages the diode. If the diode is to be operated at 5 mA, the series resistance to be put is-

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs A diode made forward biased by a two volt battery

  1. 3 KΩ
  2. 300 KΩ
  3. 300Ω
  4. 200 KΩ

Answer: 3. 300Ω

Question 41. The ratio of resistance for forward to reverse bias of the P–N junction diode is-

  1. 10²: 1
  2. 10–²: 1
  3. 1: 10–4
  4. 1: 10

Answer: 4. 1: 10

Question 42. Zener diode is used-

  1. As an amplifier
  2. As a rectifier
  3. As an oscillator
  4. As a voltage regulator

Answer: 2. As a rectifier

Question 43. The zener breakdown will occur if-

  1. The impurity level is low
  2. The impurity level is high
  3. Impurity is less on the N-side
  4. Impurity is less on P-side

Answer: 2. Impurity level is high

Question 44. In the given fig. which of the diodes are forward-biased

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs the diodes are foward biased

  1. 1,2,3
  2. 2,4,5
  3. 1,3,4
  4. 2,3,4

Answer: 1. 1,2,3

Question 45. Consider the following statements A and B and identify the correct answer-

  • A zener diode is always connected in reverse bias.
  • The potential barrier of a P-N junction lies between 0.1 to 0.3 V approximately.

Choose The Correct Answer

  1. A and B are correct
  2. A and B are wrong
  3. A is correct, but B is wrong
  4. A is wrong, but B is correct

Answer: 3. A is correct, but B is wrong

Question 46. The function of the rectifier is

  1. To convert AC into DC
  2. To convert dc into ac
  3. Both and
  4. None of these

Answer: 1. To convert AC into dc

Question 47. The cause of the potential barrier in a p-n diode is:

  1. Depletion Of Positive Charges Near The Junction
  2. Concentration Of Positive Charges Near The Junction
  3. Depletion Of Negative Charges Near The Junction
  4. Concentration Of Positive And Negative Charges Near The Junction

Answer: 4. Concentration Of Positive And Negative Charges Near The Junction

Question 48. A semi-conducting device is connected in a series in a circuit with a battery and a resistance. A current is allowed to pass through the circuit. If the polarity of the battery is reversed, the current drops to almost zero. The device may be:

  1. A P-N Junction
  2. An Intrinsic Semiconductor
  3. A P-Type Semiconductor
  4. An N-Type Semiconductor

Answer: 1. A P-N Junction

Question 49. In a junction diode, the holes are due to:

  1. Protons
  2. Extra Electrons
  3. Neutrons
  4. Missing Electrons

Answer: 4. Missing Electrons

Question 50. The depletion layer consists of:

  1. Electrons
  2. Protons
  3. Mobile Charge Carriers
  4. Immobile Ions

Answer: 4. Immobile Ions

Question 51. In forward bias the width of the depletion layer in a p-n junction diode:

  1. Increases
  2. Decreases
  3. Remains Constant
  4. First Increases Then Decreases

Answer: 2. Decreases

Question 52. The current (I) in the circuit will be

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs Current in the circuit

  1. \(\frac{5}{40} \mathrm{~A}\)
  2. \(\frac{5}{50} \mathrm{~A}\)
  3. \(\frac{5}{10} \mathrm{~A}\)
  4. \(\frac{5}{20} \mathrm{~A}\)

Answer: 2. \(\frac{5}{50} \mathrm{~A}\)

Question 53. In a P-N junction diode not connected to any circuit-

  1. High potential at the N side and low potential at the P side
  2. High potential at the P side and low potential at the N side
  3. P and N both have at same potential
  4. The potentials of the N side and P side are undetermined

Answer: 1. High potential at the N side and low potential at the P side

Question 54. In a PN junction:-

  1. High potential at the N side and low potential at the P side
  2. High potential at the N side and low potential at the N side
  3. P and N both have at same potential
  4. Undetermined

Answer: 1. High potential at the N side and low potential at the P side

Question 55. Reverse bias applied to a junction diode-

  1. Lowers the potential barrier
  2. Raises the potential barrier
  3. Increases the majority carrier’s current
  4. Decreases the minority carrier’s current

Answer: 2. Raises the potential barrier

Question 56. The barrier potential of a p-n junction diode does not depend on-

  1. Diode design
  2. Temperature
  3. Forward bias
  4. Doping density

Answer: 1. Diode design

Question 57. The inverse saturation current in a P-N junction diode at 27°C is 10–5 amp. The value of forward current at 0.2 volts will be (e7.62 = 2038.6)

  1. 2037.6 × 10–3 A
  2. 203.76 × 10–3 A
  3. 20.376 × 10–3 A
  4. 2.0376 × 10–3 A

Answer: 3. 20.376 × 10–3 A

Question 58. The reason for the potential barrier in the p-n junction is:

  1. Excess Of Positive Charge At Junction
  2. Deficiency Of Positive Charge At Junction
  3. Deficiency Of Negative Charge At Junction
  4. Excess Of Positive And Negative Charge At Junction

Answer: 4. Excess Of Positive And Negative Charge At Junction

Question 59. In p-n junction depletion region decreases when:

  1. Zero Bias
  2. Forward Bias
  3. Reverse Bias
  4. Temperature Decreases

Answer: 2. Forward Bias

Question 60. Two identical P-N junctions may be connected in series with a battery in three ways (fig below). The potential drops across the two P-N junctions are equal in

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs Two identical P-N junction

  1. Circuits 1 and 2
  2. Circuits 2 and 3
  3. Circuit 3 and 1
  4. Circuit 1 only

Answer: 3. Circuit 3 and 1

Question 62. In a P-N junction diode which is not connected to any circuit-

  1. The potential is the same everywhere
  2. The P-type side is at a higher potential than the N-type side
  3. There is an electric field at the junction directed from the N-type side to the P-type side
  4. There is an electric field at the junction directed from the P-type side to the N-type side

Answer: 2. The P-type side is at a higher potential than the N-type side

Question 63. For the given circuit shown in Fig, to act as a full wave rectifier, a.c. input should be connected across ……..and……..the d.c. output would appear across……..and……..

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs output would appear across

  1. A, C and B, D
  2. B, D and A, C
  3. A, B C, D
  4. C, A and D, B

Answer: 3. A, B C, D

Question 64. In a……biased P-N junction the net flow holes is from the N-region to the P-region-

  1. Forward Bias
  2. Reverse Bias
  3. no
  4. Both 1 and 2

Answer: 2. Reverse Bias

Question 65. For making the p-n junction diode forward biased:

  1. The same Potential Is Applied
  2. Greater Potential Is Given To N Compared To P
  3. Greater Potential Is Given To P Compared To N
  4. Unbalanced Concentration

Answer: 3. Greater Potential Is Given To P Compared To N

Question 66. When a p-n junction diode is reverse-biased, then

  1. No Current Flows
  2. The Depletion Region Is Increased
  3. The Depletion Region Is Reduced
  4. The Height Of The Potential Barrier Is Reduced

Answer: 2. The Depletion Region Is Increased

Question 67. In the middle of the depletion layer of reverse biased p – n juction, the

  1. Electric Field Is Zero
  2. Potential Is Maximum
  3. The Electric Field Is the Maximum
  4. Potential Is Zero

Answer: Electric Field Is Zero

Question 68. If the input is given between A and C, then the output at the ends of R will be

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs If the input is given between A and C

  1. Fully Rectified
  2. Half Rectified
  3. Ac
  4. None Of These

Answer: 2. Half Rectified

Question 69. Of the diodes shown in the following diagrams, which one of the diodes is reverse biased?

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs the diode is reverse biased.

 

Answer: 2.

Question 70. Application of a forward bias to a p-n junction –

  1. Widens the depletion zone
  2. Increases the number of donors on the N-side
  3. Increases the potential difference across the depletion zone
  4. Increases the electric field in the depletion zone

Answer: 4. Increases the electric field in the depletion zone

Question 71. A forward-biased diode is:-

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs A frorward biased diode

Answer: 4.

Question 72. A p-n photodiode is made of a material with a band gap of 2.0 eV. The minimum frequency of the radiation that can be absorbed by the material is nearly

  1. 10 × 1014 Hz
  2. 5 × 1014 Hz
  3. 1 × 1014 Hz
  4. 20 × 1014 Hz

Answer: 2. 5 × 1014 Hz

Question 73. When the P-N junction diode is forward-biased, then-

  1. The Depletion Region Is Reduced And Barrier Height Is Increased.
  2. The Depletion Region Is Widened And the Barrier Height Is Reduced.
  3. Both The Depletion Region And Barrier Height Are Reduced.
  4. Both The Depletion Region And Barrier Height Are Increased.

Answer: 3. Both The Depletion Region And Barrier Height Are Reduced.

Question 74. In a full wave rectifier circuit operating from 50 Hz mains frequency, the fundamental frequency in the ripple would be:

  1. 50Hz
  2. 25Hz
  3. 100Hz
  4. 70.7Hz

Answer: 3. 100Hz

Question 75. In the following, which one of the diodes is reverse-biased?

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs the diodes is reverse biased

Answer: 2.

Question 76. The circuit has two oppositely connected ideal diodes in parallel. What is the current flowing in the circuit?

  1. 2.31A
  2. 1.33A
  3. 1.71A
  4. 2.00A

Answer: 4. 2.00A

Question 77. The drift current in a p-n junction is

  1. From The N-Side To The P-Side
  2. From The P-Side To The N-Side
  3. From The N-Side To The P-Side If The Junction Is Forward-Baised And In The Opposite Direction If It Is Reverse-Biased
  4. From The P-Side To The N-Side If The Junction Is Forward-Biased And In The Opposite Direction If It Is Reverse-Baised

Answer: 1. From The N-Side To The P-Side

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 MCQs on Solids and Semiconductors

Question 78. The diffusion current in a p-n junction is

  1. From The N-Side To The P-Side
  2. From The P-Side To The N-Side
  3. From The N-Side To The P-Side Of The Junction Is Forward-Biased And In The opposite direction If It Is Reverse-Baised
  4. From The P-Side To The N-Side If The Junction Is Forward-Baised And In The Opposite Direction If It Is Reverse-Biased

Answer: 2. From The P-Side To The N-Side

Question 79. A semiconducting device is connected in a series circuit with a battery and a resistance. A current is found to pass through the circuit. If the polarity of the battery is reversed, the current drops to almost zero. The device may be

  1. An Intrinsic Semiconductor
  2. A P-Type Semiconductor
  3. An N-Type Semiconductor
  4. A P-N Junction

Answer: 4. A P-N Junction

Question 80. If the two ends P and N of a P-N of a P-N diode junction are joined by a wire

  1. There will not be a steady current in the circuit
  2. There will be a steady current from the N side to the P side
  3. There will be a steady current from the P side to the N side
  4. There may not be a current depending upon the resistance of the connecting wire

Answer: 1. There will not be a steady current in the circuit

Question 81. To make a PN junction conducting

  1. The value of forward bias should be more than the barrier potential
  2. The value of forward bias should be less than the barrier potential
  3. The value of reverse bias should be more than the barrier potential
  4. The value of reverse bias should be less than the barrier potential

Answer: 1. The value of forward bias should be more than the barrier potential

Question 82. Zener diode is used as

  1. Half Wave Rectifier
  2. Full Wave Rectifier
  3. Ac Voltage Stabilizer
  4. Dc Voltage Stabilizer

Answer: 3. Ac Voltage Stabilizer

Question 83. In the P-N junction, the barrier potential offers resistance to

  1. Free electrons in the N region and holes in the P region
  2. Free electrons in the P region and holes in the N region
  3. Only free electrons in the N region
  4. Only holes in the P region

Answer: 1. Free electrons in the N region and holes in the P region

Question 84. Two identical P-N diodes are connected in series in the following ways. Maximum current will flow in a circuit

  1. A
  2. B
  3. C
  4. D

Answer: 2. B

Question 85. In the following circuit readings in ammeters A1 and A2 will be

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs Two ideal diodes

  1. 0.2A, Zero
  2. Xero, o.2 A
  3. 0.2A, 0.2A
  4. 0.2A,0.4A

Answer: 2. Xero, o.2 A

Question 86. A light-emitting diode has a voltage drop of 2 v across it and passes a current of 10 A. When it operates with a 6 v battery through a limiting resistor R, the value of R is

  1. 40 kΩ
  2. 4 kΩ
  3. 200 kΩ
  4. 400 kΩ

Answer: 4. 400 kΩ

Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices Multiple Choice Questions Section (C): Transistors

Question 1. An amplifier is nothing but an oscillator with –

  1. Positive Feedback
  2. High Gain
  3. No Feed Back
  4. Negative Feed Back

Answer: 1. Positive Feedback

Question 2. In A Normal Operation Of A Transistor,

  1. The Base-Emitter Junction Is Forward-Biased
  2. The Base-Collector Junction Is Forward-Biased
  3. The Base-Emitter Junction Is Reverse-Baised
  4. The Base-Collector Junction Is Reverse-Baised

Answer: 1. The Base-Emitter Junction Is Forward-Biased

Question 3. In the case of constants α and β of a transistor

  1. α = β
  2. β < 1 α > 1
  3. αβ = 1
  4. β > 1 α< 1

Answer: 4. β > 1 α< 1

Question 4. If α= 0.98 and current through emitter i e = 20 mA, the value of β is

  1. 4.9
  2. 49
  3. 96
  4. 9.6

Answer: 2. 49

Question 5. The transfer ratio B of a transistor is 50. the input resistance of the transistor when used in the common emitter configuration is 1 kΩ The peak value of the collector AC for an AC input voltage of 0.01 V peak is:

  1. 100 µA
  2. 0.01 mA
  3. 0.25 mA
  4. 500 µA

Answer: 4. 500 µA

Question 6. For a common emitter circuit if E I = 0.98 then the current gain for the common emitter circuit will be :

  1. 49
  2. 98
  3. 4.9
  4. 25.5

Answer: 1. 49

Question 7. A n-p-n transistor conducts when

  1. Both Collector And Emitter Are Positive Concerning The Base
  2. Collector Is Positive And Emitter Is Negative Concerning The Base
  3. Collector Is Positive And Emitter Is At the Same Potential As The Base
  4. Both Collector And Emitter Are Negative Concerning The Base

Answer: 2. Collector Is Positive And Emitter Is Negative Concerning The Base

Question 8. A Transistor (Pnp Or Npn) Can Be Used As

  1. An Amplifier
  2. An Oscillator
  3. A Switch
  4. All Of These

Answer: 4. All Of These

Question 9. The part of a transistor that is most heavily doped to produce a large number of majority charge carries is :

  1. Emitter
  2. Base
  3. Collector
  4. Can Be Any Of The Above Three

Answer: 1. Emitter

Question 10. In a common-base configuration of transistor. α = 0.98, I B = 0.02 mA, RL = 5 kΩ. The output voltage across the load is:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs In a common-base configuration of transistor

  1. 3.2 v
  2. 4.9v
  3. 5.2v
  4. 6.2v

Answer: 2. 4.9v

Question 11. The minimum potential difference between the base and emitter required to switch a silicon transistor ‘ON’ is approximately?

  1. 1 V
  2. 3 V
  3. 5 V
  4. 4.2 V

Answer: 1. 1 V

Question 12. In the circuit shown in the figure, the current gainβ= 100 for an npn transistor. The bias resistance RB so that V CE = 5V is (VBE << 10 V)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs In a common-base configuration of transistor

  1. 2 × 103Ω
  2. 105Ω
  3. 2 × 105Ω 
  4. 5 × 105Ω

Answer: 3. 2 × 105Ω

Question 13. In a common emitter amplifier using an output resistance of 5000 ohms and input resistance of 2000 ohm, if the peak value of input signal voltage is 10 mV and β= 50 then the calculated power gain will be

  1. 6.25 × 103
  2. 1.4
  3. 62.5
  4. 2.5 × 10

Answer: 1. 6.25 × 103

Question 14. A transistor oscillator using a resonant circuit with an inductor L (of negligible resistance) and a capacitor C in series produces oscillations of frequency. If L is doubled and C is changed to 4C, the frequency will be:

  1. \(\frac{f}{4}\)
  2. 8f
  3. \(\frac{f}{2 \sqrt{2}}\)
  4. \(\frac{f}{2}\)

Answer: 3. \(\frac{f}{2 \sqrt{2}}\)

Question 15. A transistor is operated in a common emitter configuration at constant collector voltage Vc = 1.5 V such that a change in the base current from 100 µA to 150 µA produces a change in the collector current from 5 mA to 10 mA. The current gain (β) is:-

  1. 67
  2. 75
  3. 100
  4. 50

Answer: 3. 100

Question 16. A common emitter amplifier has a voltage gain of 50 and a current gain is 25. The power gain of the amplifier is:

  1. 500
  2. 1000
  3. 1250
  4. 100

Answer: 3. 1250

Question 17. When npn transistor is used as an amplifier:

  1. Electrons Move From Base To Collector
  2. Holes Move From Emitter To Base
  3. Electrons Move From Collector To Base
  4. Holes Move From Base To Emitter

Answer: 4. Holes Move From Base To Emitter

Question 18. In a common base amplifier, the phase difference between the input signal voltage and output voltage is :

  1. \(\frac{\pi}{4}\)
  2. Zero
  3. \(\frac{\pi}{2}\)

Answer: 3. Zero

Question 19. In a common–base mode of transistor, the collector current is 5.488 mA for an emitter current of 5.60 mA. The value of the base current amplification factor will be:

  1. 49
  2. 50
  3. 51
  4. 48

Answer: 1. 49

Question 20. A working transistor with its three legs marked P, Q, and R is tested using a multimeter. No conduction is found between P and Q. By connecting the common (negative) terminal of the multimeter to R and the other (positive) terminal to P or Q, some resistance is seen on the multimeter. Which of the following is true for the transistor?

  1. It is a PNP transistor with R as a collector
  2. It is a PNP transistor with R as an emitter
  3. It is an NPN transistor with R as a collector
  4. It is an NPN transistor with R as the base

Answer: 4. It is a PNP transistor with R as a collector

Question 21. An N-P-N transistor is connected in a common emitter configuration in which the collector supply is 9V and the voltage drop across the load resistance of 1000 connected in the collector circuit is 1 V. If the current amplification factor is (25/26), if the internal resistance of the transistor is 200, then which of the following options is incorrect amplification factor is (25/26), if the internal resistance of the transistor is 200, then which of the following options is incorrect

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs An N-P-N transisto

  1. \(V_{C E}=8 \mathrm{~V}\)
  2. The collector current is 1.0 mA
  3. Voltage gain \(\frac{50}{23}\) and power gain is 4.6
  4. The emitter current is 2.04 mA

Answer: 3. Voltage gain \(\frac{50}{23}\) and power gain is 4.6

Question 22. In a common emitter (CE) amplifier having a voltage gain of G, the transistor used has a transconductance of 0.03 mho and a current gain of 25. If the above transistor is replaced with another one with a transconductance of 0.02 mho and a current gain of 20, the voltage gain will be:

  1. 1.5 g
  2. \(\frac{1}{3} G\)
  3. \(\frac{5}{4} G\)
  4. \(\frac{2}{3} G\)

Answer: 4. \(\frac{2}{3} G\)

Question 23. The input resistance of a silicon transistor is 100. Base current is changed by 40 A which results in a change in collector current by 2mA. This transistor is used as a common emitter amplifier with a load resistance of 4 K. The voltage gain of the amplifier is :

  1. 2000
  2. 3000
  3. 4000
  4. 1000

Answer: 1. 2000

Question 24. For a given CE biasing circuit, if the voltage across the collector-emitter is 12V and current gain is 100, and the base current is 0.04 mA then determine the value collector resistance RC.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs For given CE biasing circuit,

  1. 1200
  2. 200
  3. 400
  4. 2000

Answer: 4. 2000

Question 25. The A-C current gain of a transistor is β= 19. In its common-emitter configuration, What will be the change in the emitter current for a change of 0.4 mA in the base current?

  1. 7.6 mA
  2. 7.2 mA
  3. 8 mA
  4. 6.8 mA

Answer: 3. 8 mA

Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices Multiple Choice Questions Section D: Logic Gates

Question 1. The truth table shown in the figure is for

  1. A 0 0 1 1
  2. B 0 1 0 1
  3. Y 1 0 0 1
  4. XOR
  5. AND
  6. XNOR
  7. OR

Answer: 1. XOR

Question 2. For the given combination of gates, if the logic states of inputs A, B, C are as follows A = B = C = 0 and A = B = 1, C = 0 then the logic states of output D are

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs For the given combination of gates,

  1. 0,0
  2. 0,1
  3. 1,0
  4. 1,1

Answer: 4. 1,1

Question 3. A gate has the following truth table

  1. P 1 1 0 0
  2. Q 1 0 1 0
  3. R 1 0 0 0

The gate is

  1. NOR
  2. OR
  3. NAND
  4. AND

Answer: 4. AND

Question 4. Which of the following gates will have an output of 1

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs gates will have an output of 1

Answer: 3.

NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs on Solids and Semiconductor Devices

Question 5. If A and B are two inputs in the AND gate, then the AND gate has an output of 1 when the values of A and B are

  1. A = 0, B = 0
  2. A = 1, B = 1
  3. A = 1, B = 0
  4. A = 0, B = 1

Answer: 4. A = 0, B = 1

Question 6. The Boolean equation of the NOR gate is

  1. C=A+B
  2. \(\mathrm{C}=\overline{\mathrm{A}+\mathrm{B}}\)
  3. C=A.B
  4. \(\mathrm{C}=\overline{\mathrm{A} \cdot \mathrm{B}}\)

Answer: 1. C=A+B

Question 7. The following circuit represents

  1. OR gate
  2. XOr Gate
  3. AND gate
  4. NAND gate

Answer: 2. XOr Gate

Question 8. The following truth table represents which logic gate

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs logic gate

  1. XOR
  2. NOT
  3. NAND
  4. AND

Answer: 4. AND

Question 9. The given truth table is for which logic gate:-

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs logic gate -

  1. NAND
  2. XOR
  3. NOR
  4. OR

Answer: 1. NAND

Question 10. The truth table is of the

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs NAND gate

  1. NAND gate
  2. OR gate
  3. NOT gate
  4. And gate

Answer: 1. NAND gate

Question 11. Zener dode is used for :-

  1. Rectification
  2. Stabilization
  3. Amplification
  4. Producing oscillations in an oscillator

Answer: 2. Stabilisation

Question 12. The output of the OR gate is 1:

  1. If either or both inputs are 1
  2. Only if both inputs are 1
  3. If either input is zero
  4. If both inputs are zero

Answer: 1. If either or both inputs are 1

Question 13. Name the type of gate used in the circuit given, find the relation between A, B, and Y, and draw the truth table.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs The given logic gate

  1. AND gate
  2. NAND gate
  3. NOR gate
  4. OR gate

Answer: 1. AND gate

Question 14. The following figure shows a logic gate circuit with two inputs A and B and the output C. The voltage waveforms of A, B, and C are as shown below –

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs The Voltage waveforms

The logic circuit gate is:-

  1. AND gate
  2. NAND gate
  3. NOR gate
  4. OR gate

Answer: 1. AND gate

Question 15. The circuit is equivalent to

  1. AND gate
  2. NAND gate
  3. NOR gate
  4. OR gate

Answer: 3. NOR gate

Question 16. In the circuit below, A and B represent two inputs and C represents the output.

  1. The circuit represents
  2. AND gate
  3. NAND gate
  4. OR gate
  5. NOR gate

Answer: 3. OR gate

Question 17. Given below are symbols for some logic gates

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs symbols for some logic gates

The XOR gate and NOR gate respectively are

  1. 1 and 2
  2. 2 and 3
  3. 3 and 4
  4. 1 and 4

Answer: 2. 2 and 3

Question 18. The following truth table corresponds to the logic gate

  1. A 0 0 1 1
  2. B 0 1 0 1
  3. X 0 1 1 1
  4. NAND
  5. OR
  6. AND
  7. XOR

Answer: 2. OR

Question 19. A truth table is given below. Which of the following has this type of truth table

  1. A 0 1 0 1
  2. B 0 0 1 1
  3. y 1 0 0 0
  4. XOR gate
  5. NOR gate
  6. AND gate
  7. OR gate

Answer: 2. AND gate

Question 20. An AND gate can be prepared by repetitive use of

  1. NOT gate
  2. OR gate
  3. NAND gate
  4. NOR gate

Answer: 4. NOR gate

Solids and Semiconductor Devices NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs

Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices Multiple Choice Questions Exercise 2

Question 1. For a given circuit potential difference VAB is-

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs Circuit Potential Difference VAB is

  1. 10V
  2. 20V
  3. 30V
  4. None

Answer: 1. 10V

Question 2. The resistance of a discharge tube is:

  1. Zero
  2. Ohmic
  3. Non-ohmic
  4. Infinity

Answer: 3. Non-ohmic

Question 3. For a transistor \(\frac{I_c}{I_E}=0.96\) then current gain for common emitter configuration:

  1. 12
  2. 6
  3. 48
  4. 24

Answer: 4. 24

Question 4. For the given circuit of the P-N junction diode, which is correct

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs P-N junction diode

  1. In F.B. the voltage across R is V
  2. In R.B. the voltage across R is V
  3. In F.B. the voltage across R is 2 V
  4. In R.B. the voltage across R is 2 V

Answer: 1. In F.B. the voltage across R is V

Question 5. A sinusoidal voltage of peak-to-peak value of 310 V is connected in series with a diode and a load resistance R so that Half-wave rectification occurs. If the diode has negligible forward resistance, the root mean square voltage across the load resistance is

  1. 310 V
  2. 155 V
  3. 109.5 V
  4. 77.5

Answer: 4. 77.5

Question 6. A photocell employs the photoelectric effect to convert

  1. Change in the frequency of light into a change in electric voltage
  2. Change in the intensity of illumination into a change in photoelectric current
  3. Change in the intensity of illumination into a change in the work function of the photocathode
  4. Change in the frequency of light into a change in the electric current

Answer: 2. Change in the intensity of illumination into a change in photoelectric current

Question 7. Semiconductor Ge has a forbidden gap of 1.43 eV. Calculate the maximum wavelength that results from the electron-hole combination.

  1. 8654 Å
  2. 7650 Å
  3. 4982 Å
  4. 10500 Å

Answer: 1. 8654 Å

Question 8. 1. For a given transistor circuit, the base current is 10 A and the collector current is 5.2 mA. Can this transistor circuit be used as an amplifier? Your answer must be supported with a proper explanation.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs Transistor circuit

Answer: yes, \(\beta=520\)

2. For a common emitter amplifier, the current gain is 69. If the emitter current is 7 mA then calculate the base current and collector current.

Answer: \(i_b=0.1 \mathrm{~mA}, \mathrm{i}_{\mathrm{c}}=6.9 \mathrm{Ma}\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids and Semiconductor Devices Question Bank

Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices Multiple Choice Questions Exercise 3 Part – 1: Neet Or Aipmt Question (Previous Years)

Question 1. A p-n photodiode is fabricated from a semiconductor with a band gap of 2.5 eV. It can detect a signal of wavelength

  1. 6000 Å
  2. 4000 nm
  3. 6000 nm
  4. 4000 Å

Answer: 4. 4000 Å

Question 2. The symbolic representation of four logic gates

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs The symbolic representation of four logic gates

The logic symbols for OR, NOT, and NAND gates are respectively

  1. (1) (3), (4), (2)
  2. (2) (4), (1), (3)
  3. (3) (4), (2), (1)
  4. (4) (1), (3), (4)

Answer: 3. (3) (4), (2), (1)

Question 3.

  1. Draw the circuit diagram of the reversed bias p-n junction.
  2. Draw the output waveform across the diode in the given circuit.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs The output wavefrom across diode in given circuit

3. Draw the truth table for the given logic gate.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs The given logic gate

Question 4. Which one of the following statements is false?

  1. Pure Si doped with trivalent impurities gives a p-type semiconductor.
  2. The majority of carriers in a n-type semiconductor are holes.
  3. Minority carriers in a p-type semiconductor are electrons.
  4. The resistance of intrinsic semiconductors decreases with an increase in temperature.

Answer: 2. Majority of carriers in a n-type semiconductor are holes.

Question 5. The device that acts as a complete electronic circuit is

  1. Junction diode
  2. Integrated circuit
  3. Junction transistor
  4. Zener diode

Answer: 2. Integrated circuit

Question 6. A common emitter amplifier has a voltage gain of 50, an input impedance of 100, and an output impedance of 200. The power gain of the amplifier is

  1. 500
  2. 1000
  3. 1250
  4. 50

Answer: 3. 1250

Question 7. To get an output Y = 1 from the circuit shown below the input must be

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs To get an output

  1. 0 1 0
  2. 0 0 1
  3. 1 0 1
  4. 1 0 0

Answer: 3. 1 0 1

Question 8. The following figure shows a logic gate circuit with two inputs A and B and the output Y. The voltage waveforms of A, B, and Y are as given.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs Logical Gate cirucit

The logic gate is

  1. NOR gate
  2. OR gate
  3. AND gate
  4. NAND gate

Answer: 4. NAND gate

Question 9. In the following figure, the diodes which are forward-biased, are:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs The diodes which are forward biased

  1. (3) only
  2. (3) and (1)
  3. (2) and (4)
  4. (1), (2), and (4)

Answer: 2. (3) and (1)

Question 10. Pure Si at 500K has an equal number of electron (n e) and hole (NH) concentrations of 1.5 × 1016 m–3. Doping by indium increases n h to 4.5 x 1022 m–3. The doped semiconductor is of:

  1. n-type with electron concentration n e = 5 × 1022 m–3
  2. p-type with electron concentration n e = 2.5 ×1010 m–3
  3. n-type with electron concentration n e = 2.5 × 1023 m–3
  4. p-type having electron concentrations n e = 5 × 109 m–3

Answer: 4. p-type having electron concentrations n e = 5 × 109 m–3

NEET Physics Chapter 6 MCQs on Solids and Semiconductor Devices

Question 11. A Zener diode, having a breakdown voltage equal to 15V, is used in a voltage regulator circuit shown in the figure. The current through the diode is:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs A zener diode

  1. 10 mA
  2. 15 mA
  3. 20 mA
  4. 5 mA

Answer: 4. 5 mA

Question 12. A transistor is operated in a common emitter configuration at VC = 2V such that a change in the base current from 100 μA to 300 μA produces a change in the collector current from 10 mA to 20 mA. The current gain is:

  1. 50
  2. 75
  3. 100
  4. 25

Answer: 1. 50

Question 13. In forward biasing of the p–n junction:

  1. The positive terminal of the battery is connected to p–the side and the depletion region becomes thick
  2. The positive terminal of the battery is connected to n–the side and the depletion region becomes thin
  3. The positive terminal of the battery is connected to n–the side and the depletion region becomes thick
  4. The positive terminal of the battery is connected to p–the side and the depletion region becomes thin

Answer: 4. The positive terminal of the battery is connected to p–side and the depletion region becomes thin

Question 14. Symbolic representations of four logic gates are shown as:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs symbols for some logic gates

Pick out which ones are for AND, NAND, and NOT gates, respectively:

  1. (1) (2), (3) and (4)
  2. (2) (3), (2) and (1)
  3. (3) (3), (3) and (4)
  4. (4) (2), (4) and (3)

Answer: 4. (4) (2), (4) and (3)

Question 15. If a small amount of pentavalent atoms is added to germanium crystal:

  1. It becomes a P-type semiconductor
  2. The antimony becomes an acceptor atom
  3. There will be more free electrons than holes in the semiconductor
  4. Its resistance is increased

Answer: 3. There will be more free electrons than holes in the semiconductor

Question 16. Two ideal diodes are connected to a battery as shown in the circuit. The current supplied by the battery is:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs Two ideal diodes

  1. 0.75 A
  2. Zero
  3. 0.25 A
  4. 0.5 A

Answer: 4. 0.5 A

Question 17. In a CE transistor amplifier, the audio signal voltage across the collector resistance of 2k is 2V. If the base resistance is 1k and the current amplification of the transistor is 100, the input signal voltage is:

  1. 0.1 V
  2. 1.0 V
  3. 1 mV
  4. 10 mV

Answer: 4. 10 mV

Question 18. C and Si both have the same lattice structure, having 4 bonding electrons in each. However, C is an insulator where as Si is intrinsic semiconductor. This is because:

  1. In the case of C the valence band is not filled at absolute zero temperature.
  2. In the case of C the conduction band is partly filled even at absolute zero temperature.
  3. The four bonding electrons in the case of C lie in the second orbit, whereas in the case of Si, they lie in the third.
  4. The four bonding electrons in the case of C lie in the third orbit, whereas for Si they lie in the fourth orbit.

Answer: 3. The four bonding electrons in the case of C lie in the second orbit, whereas in the case of Si, they lie in the third.

Question 19. Transfer characteristics [output voltage (V 0) vs input voltage (Vi )] for a base-biased transistor in CE configuration are shown in the figure. For using a transistor as a switch, it is used:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs Output voltage (V0) vs input voltage

  1. In region 3
  2. Both in the region (1) and (3)
  3. In region 2
  4. In region 1

Answer: 2. Both in regions (1) and (3)

Question 20. The figure shows a logic circuit with two inputs A and B and the output C. The voltage waveforms across A, B, and C are as given. The logic circuit gate is:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs The voltage wave forms

  1. OR gate
  2. NOR gate
  3. AND gate
  4. NAND gate

Answer: 1. OR gate

Question 21. The input resistance of a silicon transistor is 100Ω. Base current is changed by 40 mA which results in a change in collector current by 2 mA. This transistor is used as a common emitter amplifier with a load resistance of 4 KΩ. The voltage gain of the amplifier is:

  1. 2000
  2. 3000
  3. 4000
  4. 1000

Answer: 1. 2000

Question 22. To get an output Y = 1 in a given circuit which of the following inputs will be correct:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs To get an output Y = 1

Answer: 2.

Question 23. In a n-type semiconductor, which of the following statement is true:

  1. Electrons are minority carriers and pentavalent atoms are dopants.
  2. Holes are minority carriers and pentavalent atoms are dopants.
  3. Holes are majority carriers and trivalent atoms are dopants.
  4. Electrons are majority carriers and trivalent atoms are dopants.

Answer: Holes are minority carriers and pentavalent atoms are dopants.

Question 24. In a common emitter (CE) amplifier having a voltage gain of G, the transistor used has a transconductance of 0.03 mho and a current gain of 25. If the above transistor is replaced with another one with a transconductance of 0.02 mho and a current gain of 20, the voltage gain will be:

  1. 1.5 G
  2. \(\frac{1}{3} G\)
  3. \(\frac{5}{4} G\)
  4. \(\frac{2}{3} G\)

Answer: 4. \(\frac{2}{3} G\)

Question 25. The output(X) of the logic circuit shown in the figure will be:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs The output(X) of the logic circuit

  1. \(X=\overline{A \cdot B}\)
  2. X = A.B
  3. \(X=\overline{A+B}\)
  4. \(X=\overline{\bar{A}}, \overline{\bar{B}}\)

Answer: 2. X = A.B

Question 26. The given graph represents the V- I characteristic of a semiconductor device.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs semiconductor device.

Which of the following statements is correct?

  1. It is a V – I characteristic for solar cells where point A represents open circuit voltage and point B short circuit current.
  2. It is for a solar cell and points A and B represent open circuit voltage and current, respectively.
  3. It is for a photodiode and points A and B represent open circuit voltage and current respectively.
  4. It is for an LED and points A and B represent open circuit voltage and short circuit current, respectively.

Answer: 1. It is a V – I characteristic for solar cells where point A represents open circuit voltage and point B short circuit current.

Question 27. The barrier potential of a p-n junction depends on:

  1. Type of semiconductor material
  2. Amount of doping
  3. Temperature

Which one of the following is correct?

  1. (1) and (2) only
  2. (2) only
  3. (2) and (3) only
  4. (1), (2), and (3)

Answer: 4. (1), (2) and (3)

Question 28. Which logic gate is represented by the following combination of logic gates?

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs combination of logic gate

  1. NAND
  2. AND
  3. NOR
  4. OR

Answer: 2. AND

Question 29. To get output 1 for the following circuit, the correct choice for the input is:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs To get output 1 for the following circuit,

  1. A = 1, B = 0, C = 1
  2. A = 0, B = 1, C = 0
  3. A = 1, B = 0, C = 0
  4. A = 1, B = 1, C = 0

Answer: 1. A = 1, B = 0, C = 1

Question 30. Consider the junction diode as ideal. The value of current flowing through AB is:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs The junction diode as ideal

  1. 10–3 A
  2. 0 A
  3. 10–2 A
  4. 10–1 A

Answer: 3. 10–2 A

Question 31. An NPN transistor is connected in a common emitter configuration in a given amplifier. A load resistance of 800 is connected in the collector circuit and the voltage drop across it is 0.8 V. If the current amplification factor is 0.96 and the input resistance of the circuit is 192, the voltage gain and the power gain of the amplifier will respectively be:

  1. 4,3.69
  2. 4,3.84
  3. 3.69, 3.84
  4. 4, 4

Answer: 2. 4,3.84

Question 32. The given electrical network is equivalent to

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs Electrical network is equivalent to

  1. AND gate
  2. OR gate
  3. NOR gate
  4. NOT gate

Answer: 3. NOR gate

Question 33. In a common emitter transistor amplifier, the audio signal voltage across the collector is 3V. The resistance of the collector is 3k. If the current gain is 100 and the base resistance is 2k, the voltage and power gain of the amplifier are:

  1. 200 and 1000
  2. 15 and 200
  3. 150 and 15000
  4. 20 and 2000

Answer: 3. 150 and 15000

Question 34. Which one of the following represents the forward bias diode?

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs bias diode

Answer: 1.

Question 35. In the circuit shown in the figure, the input voltage Vi is 20 V, VBE = 0, and VCE = 0. The values of I B, I C and are given by

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs he input voltage

  1. IB = 40 IA, IC = 10 mA, β = 250
  2. IB = 40 IA, IC = 5 mA, β= 125
  3. IB = 20 IA, IC = 5 mA, β = 250
  4. IB = 25 IA, IC = 5 mA, β= 200

Answer: 2. IB = 40 IA, IC = 5 mA, β= 125

Question 36. In a p-n junction diode, change in temperature due to heating

  1. Affects only reverse resistance
  2. Affects the overall V – I characteristics of p-n junction
  3. Does not affect the resistance of the p-n junction
  4. Affects only forward resistance

Answer: 2. Affects the overall V – I characteristics of p-n junction

Question 37. In the combination of the following gates the output Y can be written in terms of inputs A and B as

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs Gates the output Y

  1. \(\overline{A \cdot B}\)
  2. \(\overline{A+B}\)
  3. \(\overline{A \cdot B}+A \cdot B\)
  4. \(\text { A. } \bar{B}+\bar{A} \cdot B\)

Answer: 4. \(\text { A. } \bar{B}+\bar{A} \cdot B\)

Question 38. For a p-type semiconductor, which of the following statements is true?

  1. Electrons are the majority carriers and pentavalent atoms are the dopants.
  2. Electrons are the majority carriers and trivalent atoms are the dopants.
  3. Holes are the majority carriers and trivalent atoms are the dopants.
  4. Holes are the majority carriers and pentavalent atoms are the dopants.

Answer: 3. Holes are the majority carriers and trivalent atoms are the dopants.

Question 39. The correct Boolean operation represented by the circuit diagram drawn is:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs The correct Boolean operation

  1. NOR
  2. AND
  3. OR
  4. NAND

Answer: 4. NAND

Question 40. An LED is constructed from a p-n junction diode using GaAsP. The energy gap is 1.9 eV. The wavelength of the light emitted will be equal to

  1. 10.4 x 10–26 m
  2. 654 nm
  3. 654 Å
  4. 654 x 10–11 m

Answer: 1. NAND

Question 41. The circuit diagram shown here corresponds to the logic gate.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs Corresponds to the logic gate

  1. NOR
  2. AND
  3. OR
  4. NAND

Answer: 4. NAND

Question 42. Out of the following which one is a forward-biased diode?

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs biased diode

Answer: 4.

Question 43. A n-p-n transistor is connected in a common emitter configuration (see figure) in which the collector voltage drop across load resistance (800 ) connected to the collector circuit is 0.8 V. The collector current is:

  1. 2 mA
  2. 0.1 mA
  3. 1 mA
  4. 0.2 Ma

Answer: 3. 1 mA

Question 44. Which of the following gates is called a universal gate?

  1. OR gate
  2. AND gate
  3. NAND gate
  4. NOT gate

Answer: 3. NAND gate

NEET Physics Solids and Semiconductors Devices Practice MCQs

Question 45. An intrinsic semiconductor is converted into an n-type extrinsic semiconductor by doping it with

  1. Phosphorous
  2. Aluminium
  3. Silver
  4. Germanium

Answer: 1. Phosphorous

Question 46. The increase in the width of the depletion region in a p-n junction diode is due to:

  1. Increase in forward current
  2. Forward bias only
  3. Reverse bias only
  4. Both forward bias and reverse bias

Answer: 3. Reverse bias only

Question 47. For transistor action which of the following statements is correct?

  1. The base region must be very thin and lightly doped.
  2. Base, emitter, and collector regions should have the same doping concentration
  3. Base, emitter, and collector regions should have the same size
  4. Both the emitter junction as well as the collector junction are forward-biased

Answer: 1. The base region must be very thin and lightly doped.

Question 48. The electron concentration in an n-type semiconductor is the same as the hole concentration in a p-type semiconductor. An external field (electric) is applied across each of them. Compare the currents in them

  1. Current in p-type > current in n-type
  2. Current in n-type > current in p-type
  3. No current will flow in p-type, current will only flow in n-type
  4. Current in n-type = current in p-type

Answer: 2. Current in n-type > current in p-type

Question 49. Consider the following Statements (1) and (2) and identify the correct answer.

  1. A zener diode is connected in reverse bias when used as a voltage regulator.
  2. The potential barrier of the p-n junction lies between 0.1 V to 0.3 V
  3. (1) and (2) both are incorrect
  4. (1) is correct and (2) is incorrect
  5. (1) is incorrect but (2) is correct
  6. (1) and (2) both are correct

Answer: 2. (1) is correct and (2) is incorrect

Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices Multiple Choice Questions Part – 2 Aims Question (Previous Years)

Question 1. In the following common emitter configuration, an NPN transistor with a current gain = 100 is used. The output voltage of the amplifier will be

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs The Output voltage of the amplifer will be

  1. 10 mV
  2. 0.1 V
  3. 1.0 V
  4. 10 V

Answer: 3. 1.0 V

Question 2. The temperature (T) dependence of the resistivity of a semiconductor is represented by

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs The temperature (T) dependence of resistivity () of a semiconductor is represented by

Answer: 3.

Question 3. Which logic gate is represented by the following combination of logic gates?

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs Logic Gate Is Represented By The Following Combination Of Logic Gates - Copy

  1. OR
  2. NAND
  3. AND
  4. NOR

Answer: 3. AND

Question 4. A transistor connected at common emitter mode contains a load resistance of 5 k and an input resistance of 1 k. If the input peak voltage is 5 mV and the current gain is 50, find the voltage gain.

  1. 250
  2. 500
  3. 125
  4. 50

Answer: 1. 250

Part – 3: Jee (Main) Or Aieee Problems (Previous Years)

Question 1. The logic circuit shown below has the input waveforms ‘A’ and ‘B’ as shown. Pick out the correct output waveform.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs The logic circuit

Answer: 4.

Question 2. A p-n junction (D) shown in the figure can act as a rectifier. An alternating current source (V) is connected to the circuit.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs A p-n junction

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs The current () in the resistor (R)

Answer: 2.

Question 3. The output of an OR gate is connected to both the inputs of a NAND gate. The combination will serve as a:

  1. NOT gate
  2. NOR gate
  3. AND gate
  4. OR gate

Answer: 2. NOR gate

Question 4. The truth table for a system of four NAND gates as shown in the figure is:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs Truth table for system of four NAND gates

Answer: 1.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids and Semiconductor Devices MCQs

Question 5. The forward-biased diode connection is

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs bias diode

Answer: 1.

Question 6. The temperature dependence of resistances of Cu and undoped Si in the temperature range 300 – 400 K, is best described by:

  1. Linear increase for Cu, exponential increase for Si
  2. Linear increase for Cu, exponential decrease for Si
  3. Linear decrease for Cu, linear decrease for Si
  4. Linear increase for Cu, linear increase for Si

Answer: 2. Linear increase for Cu, exponential decrease for Si

Question 7. If a,b,c,d are inputs to a gate and x is its output, then, as per the following time graph, the gate is:

  1. AND
  2. OR
  3. NAND
  4. NOT

Answer: 2. OR

Question 8. Identify the semiconductor devices whose characteristics are given below, in the order (1),(2),(3),(4)

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs Identify the semiconductor devices

  1. Zener diode, simple diode, Light dependent resistance, Solar cell
  2. Solar cell, Light dependent resistance, Zener diode, simple diode
  3. Zener diode, Solar cell, Simple diode, Light dependent resistance
  4. Simple diode, Zener diode, Solar cell, Light dependent resistance.

Answer: 4. Simple diode, Zener diode, Solar cell, Light-dependent resistance.

Question 9. For a common emitter configuration, if α and β have their usual meanings, the incorrect relationship between α and β is.

  1. \(\alpha=\frac{\beta}{1-\beta}\)
  2. \(\alpha=\frac{\beta}{1+\beta}\)
  3. \(\alpha=\frac{\beta^2}{1+\beta^2}\)
  4. \(\frac{1}{\alpha}=\frac{1}{\beta}+1\)

Answer: 1.

  1. \(\alpha=\frac{\beta}{1-\beta}\)
  2. \(\alpha=\frac{\beta^2}{1+\beta^2}\)

Question 10. In a common emitter amplifier circuit using an n-p-n transistor, the phase difference between the input and the output voltages will be:

  1. 180°
  2. 45°
  3. 90°
  4. 135°

Answer: 1. 180°

Question 11. The reading of the ammeter for a silicon diode in the given circuit is:

  1. 11.5mA
  2. 13.5 mA
  3. 0
  4. 15 mA

Answer: 1. 11.5mA

Question 12. The mobility of electrons in a semiconductor is defined as the ratio of their drift velocity to the applied electric field. If, for an n-type semiconductor, the density of electrons is 1019 m-3 and their mobility is 1.6 m2/(V.s) then the resistivity of the semiconductor (since it is an n-type semiconductor (since it is an n-type semiconductor contribution of holes is ignored) is close to:

  1. 4Ωm
  2. 0.4Ωm
  3. 0.2Ωm
  4. 2Ωm

Answer: 2. 0.4Ωm

Question 13. Ge and Si diodes start conducting at 0.3 V and 0.7 V respectively. In the following figure if the Ge diode connection is reversed, the value of V0 changes by: (assume that the Ge diode has a large breakdown voltage)

  1. 0.6 V
  2. 0.2 V
  3. 0.4 V
  4. 0.8 V

Answer: 3. 0.4 V

Question 14. To get output ‘1’ at R, for the given logic gate circuit the input values must be:

  1. X = 1, Y = 1
  2. X = 0, Y = 0
  3. X = 0, Y = 1
  4. X = 1, Y = 0

Answer: 4. X = 1, Y = 0

Question 15. For the circuit shown below, the current through the Zener diode is:

  1. 14 mA
  2. 9 mA
  3. Zero
  4. 5 mA

Answer: 2. 9 mA

Question 16. The circuit shown below contains two ideal diodes, each with a forward resistance of 50Ω. If the battery voltage is 6 V, the current through the 100Ω resistance (in Amperes) is:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs the current through the 100 resistance

  1. 0.020
  2. 0.030
  3. 0.027
  4. 0.036

Answer: 1. 0.020

Question 17. In the given circuit the current through the Zener Diode is close to:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs The current through Zener Diode

  1. 0.0 mA
  2. 6.7 mA
  3. 6.0 mA
  4. 4.0 mA

Answer: 1. 0.0 mA

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids and Semiconductor Devices MCQs

Question 18. In the figure, given that supply can vary from 0 to 5.0 V, VCC= 5V,βdc= 200, RB= 100 kΩ, RC= 1 kΩ, and VBE= 1.0 V. The minimum base current and the input voltage at which the transistor will go to saturation will be, respectively:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs The minimum base current and the input voltage

  1. 25μA and 2.8 V
  2. 20μA and 3.5 V
  3. 20μA and 2.8 V
  4. 25μA and 3.5 V

Answer: 4. 25μA and 3.5 V

Question 19. The output ofthe given logic circuit is:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs logic circuit - Copy

  1. \(A \bar{B}+\bar{A} B\)
  2. \(\overline{\mathrm{A}} \mathrm{B}\)
  3. \(A \bar{B}\)
  4. \(\mathrm{AB}+\overline{\mathrm{AB}}\)

Answer: 3. \(A \bar{B}\)

Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices Multiple Choice Questions Self Practice Paper

Question 1. In the circuit shown in the figure, A.C. of peak value 200 volts is being rectified. As compared to the resistance R, the diode resistance is negligible, the r.m.s. value of potential across the R in volts will be approximately_____

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs A.C. of peak value 200 volts

  1. 200
  2. 100
  3. \(\frac{200}{\sqrt{2}}\)
  4. 280

Answer: 2. 100

Question 2. A semiconductor X is made by doping a germanium crystal with arsenic (Z = 33). A second semiconductor Y is made by doping germanium with indium (Z = 49). The two are joined end to end and connected to a battery as shown. Which of the following statements is correct_____

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs A semi-conductor X

  1. X is p-type, Y is n-type and the junction is forward biased.
  2. X is n-type, Y is p-type and the junction is forward biased.
  3. X is p-type, Y is n-type and the junction is reverse-biased.
  4. X is n-type, Y is p-type and the junction is reverse-biased.

Answer: 4. X is n-type, Y is p-type, and the junction is reverse-biased.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids and Semiconductor Devices MCQs

Question 3. In the following figure, a battery of 2 volts is connected between A and B. It is assumed that the resistance of a diode is zero in forward bias and infinite in reverse bias. If the positive terminal of the battery is connected to A, then the current flowing in the circuit will be________

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 6 Solids And Semiconductors Devices MCQs A battery of 2 volt is connected between A and B.

  1. 0.1 A
  2. 0.2 A
  3. 0.3 A
  4. Zero

Answer: 2. 0.2 A

Question 4. The reverse current in a P- N junction diode at low reverse voltage is 25µA. The value of forward current at a forward voltage of 0.05 V will be if \(\frac{K T}{e}=0.025\) Volt_______

  1. 16 mA
  2. 1.6 mA
  3. 0.16 mA
  4. 160 mA

Answer: 3. 0.16 mA

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes For Chapter 2 Measurement Errors And Experiments

Chapter 2 Measurement Errors And Experiments Errors In Measurement

To get an overview of error, least count, and significant figures, consider the example below.

Suppose we have to measure the length of a rod. How can we?

1. Let’s use a cm scale: (a scale on which only cm marks are there)

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments A cm Scale

We will measure length = 4 cm

Although the length will be a bit more than 4, we cannot say its length to be 4.1 cm or 4.2 cm, as the scale can measure upto cm only, not closer than that.

It (this scale) can measure upto cm accuracy only.

so we’ll say that its least count is 1 cm

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Least Count

Class 12 NEET Physics Measurement Errors and Experiments Notes

2. Let us use an mm scale: (a scale on which mm marks are there)

We will measure length “l”= 4.2 cm, which is a closer measurement. Here also if we observe closely, we’ll find that the length is a bit more than 4.2, but we cannot say its length to be 4.21, 4.22, or 4.20 as this scale can measure upto 0.1 cms (1 mm) only, not closer than that.

It (this scale) can measure upto 0.1 cm accuracy

Its least count is 0.1 cm

Max uncertainty in “l” can be = 0.1cm

Max possible error in “l” can be = 0.1cm

Measurement of length = 4.2 cm. has two significant figures; 4 and 2, in which 4 is correct, and 2 is reasonably correct (Doubtful) because uncertainty of 0.1 cm is there.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments To Get Closer Measurment

3. We can use Vernier calipers: ( which can measure more closely, upto 0.01 cm)

Then we’ll measure length “l” = 4.23 cm which is more closer measurement.

It can measure upto 0.01 cm accuracy

Least count = 0.01 cm Max uncertainty in “l” can be = 0.01cm

Max possible error in “l” can be = 0.01cm

Measurement of length = 4.23 cm. has three significant figures; 4, 2, and 3, in which 4 and 2 are correct, and 3 is reasonably correct (Doubtful) because uncertainty of 0.01 cm is there.

To get further closer measurement:-

4. We can use a Screw Gauge: ( which can measure more closely, upto 0.001 cm )

  • We’ll measure length l = 4.234 cm.
  • Max possible uncertainty (error) in l can be = 0.001 cm
  • Length = 4.234 cm. has four significant figures; 4, 2, 3 and 4.
  • Reasonably
  • Correct correct correct correct
  • To get a furthermore closer measurement

5. We can use a microscope:

  • We’ll measure length l = 4.2342 cm.
  • Max possible uncertainty (error) in l can be = 0.0001cm
  • length = 4.2342cm. has five significant figures; 4, 2, 3, 4, and 2

2. Significant Figures

From the above example, we can conclude that, in a measured quantity, Significant figures are = correct Figures + The first uncertain figure

Common rules of counting significant figures:

Rule 1:

  • All non-zero digits are significant e.i. 123.56 has five S.F.

Rule 2:

  • All zeros occurring between two non-zeros digits are significant (obviously) e.i. 1230.05 has six S.F.

Rule 3:

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Common Rules Of Counting

So trailing zeroes after the decimal place is significant (Shows further accuracy) Once a measurement is done, significant figures will be decided according to the closeness of measurement.

Now if we want to display the measurement in some different units, the S.F. shouldn’t change (S.F. depends only on the accuracy of measurement) Number of S.F. is always conserved, change of units cannot change the S.F. Suppose measurement was done using mm scale, and we get = 85 mm (Two S. F.) If we want to display it in other units.

All should have two S.F.

The following rules support the conservation of S.F.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Suppose Measurement Was Done Using mm Scale

Rule 4:

From the previous example, we have seen that 8 and 5, So leading Zeros are not significant.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Rule 5

In the number less than one, all zeros after the decimal point and to the left of the first non-zero digit are insignificant (arises only due to change of unit)

0.000305 has three S.F.

⇒ 3.05 × 10–4 has three S.F.

Rule 5:

From the previous example, we have also seen that, 8 and 5. So the trailing zeros are also not
significant.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Zeroes

The terminal or trailing zeros in a number without a decimal point are not significant. (Also arises only due to change of unit)

154 m = 15400 cm = 15400 mm = 154 × 109 nm

All have only three S.F. All trailing zeros are insignificant

Rule 6:

There are certain measurements, that are exact i.e

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Rule 6

Number of apples are = 12 (exactly) = 12.000000……….∞

This type of measurement is infinitely accurate so, it has ∞ S.F.

  • Numbers of students in class = 125 (exact)
  • Speed of light in the vacuum = 299,792,458 m/s (exact)

Solved Examples:

Example 1. Count the total number of S.F. in 3.0800
Solution: S.F. = Five, as trailing zeros after decimal place are significant.

Example 2. Count the total number of S.F. in 0.00418
Solution: S.F. = Three, as leading zeros are not significant.

Example 3. Count the total number of S.F. in 3500
Solution: S.F. = Two, the trailing zeros are not significant.

Example 4. Count the total number of S.F. in 300.00
Solution: S.F. = Five, trailing zeros after the decimal point are significant.

Example 5. Count the total number of S.F. in 5.003020
Solution: S.F. = Seven, the trailing zeros after the decimal place are significant.

Example 6. Count the total number of S.F. in 6.020 × 1023
Solution: S.F. = Four; 6, 0, 2, 0; remaining 23 zeros are not significant.

Example 7. Count the total number of S.F. in 1.60 × 10–19
Solution: S.F. = Three; 1, 6, 0; remaining 19 zeros are not significant.

Operations according to significant figures:

Now let’s see how to do arithmetic operations ie. addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division according to significant figures

Addition ←→ subtraction

For this, let’s consider the example given below. In a simple pendulum, the length of the thread is measured (from mm scale) as 75.4 cm. and the radius of the bob is measured (from vernier) as 2.53 cm. Find leg = l+ radius

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments In a simple pendulum

NEET Physics Chapter 2 Measurement Errors and Experiments Study Notes

l is known upto 0.1 cm( first decimal place) only. We don’t know what is at the next decimal place. So we can write l =75.4 cm = 75.4? cm and the radius r = 2.53 cm. If we add l and r, we don’t know which number will be added with 3. So we have to leave that position.

leq= 75.4? + 2.53 = 77.9? cm = 77.9 cm

Rules for Addition ←→ subtraction: (based on the previous example)

  • First, do the addition/subtraction in the normal manner.
  • Then round off all quantities to the decimal place of the least accurate quantity.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Suppose Measurement Was Done Using mm Scale

Rules for Multiply ←→ Division

Suppose we have to multiply 2.11 x 1.2 = 2.11. x 1.2?

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Rules for Multiply

  1. Multiply divide in the normal manner.
  2. Round off the answer to the weakest link (number having the least S.F.)

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Round off the answer to the weakest link

Solved Example

Example 8. A cube has a side l= 1.2 × 10–2 m. Calculate its volume
Solution: l= 1.2 × 10–2

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments A cube has a side

Rules of Rounding off

If the removable digit is less than 5 (50%); drop it.

⇒ \(47.833 \frac{\text { Round off }}{\text { till one decimal place }} 47.8\)

If the removable digit is greater than 5(50%), increase the last digit by 1.

⇒ \(47.862 \frac{\text { Round off }}{\text { till one decimal place }} 47.9\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Rules of Rounding off 3

Example 9. Using a screw gauge radius of the wire was found to be 2.50 mm. The length of wire found by mm. scale is 50.0 cm. If the mass of the wire was measured as 25 gm, the density of the wire in the correct S.F. will be (use π = 3.14 exactly )
Solution: 

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Using screw gauge radius of wire was found to be 2.50 mm

Least Count

We have studied (from page 1) that no measurement is perfect. Every instrument can measure upto a certain accuracy; called least count.

Least count: The Smallest quantity an institution can measure

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Least Count.

Permissible Error

Error in measurement due to the limitation (least count) of the instrument, is called permissible error. From the mm scale → we can measure upto 1 mm accuracy (least count = 1mm). From this, we will get measurements like Δl = 34 mm

But if from any other instrument, we get l= 34.5 mm then max permissible error (Δl) = 0.1 mm, and if from a more accurate instrument, we get l= 34.527 mm then max permissible error (Δl) = 0.001 mm = place value of last number.

Max. Permissible Error In Result Due To Error In Each Measurable Quantity:

Let Result f(x, y) contain two measurable quantities x and y

Let error in x = ± Δx i.e. x Δ (x – Δx, x + Δx) error in y = ± Δy i.e. y Δ (y – Δy, y + Δy)

Case: (1) If f(x, y) = x + y df = dx + dy error in f = Δf = ± Δx ± Δy max possible error in f = (Δf)max = max of (± Δx ± Δy) (Δf)max = Δx + Δy

Case: (2) If f = x – y df = dx – dy (Δf) = ± Δx + Δy

max possible error in f = (Δf)max = max of (± Δx± Δy)

(Δf)max = Δx + Δy

For getting a maximum permissible error, the sign should be adjusted, so that errors get added up to give maximum effect

i.e. f = 2x – 3y – z

(Δf)max = 2Δx + 3Δy + Δz

Solved Examples

Example 11. In resonance tube exp. we find l1 = 25.0 cm and l2 = 75.0 cm. The least count of the scale used to measure l is 0.1 cm. If there is no error in frequency What will be max permissible error in speed of sound (take f0 = 325 Hz.)
Solution: V = 2f0 (l2– l1)

(dV) = 2f0 (dl2 – dl1)

(ΔV)max = max of [2f0(± Δl2 + Δl2] = 2f0 (Δl2 + Δl1)

Δl1 = least count of the scale = 0.1 cm

Δl2 = least count of the scale = 0.1 cm

So max permissible error in speed of sound (ΔV)max = 2(325Hz) (0.1 cm + 0.1 cm) = 1.3 m/s Value of V = 2f

0 (l2 – l1) = 2(325Hz) (75.0 cm – 25.0 cm) = 325 m/s so V = ( 325 ± 1.3 ) m/s

Case (3) If f(x, y, z) = (constant) maybe to scatter all the terms, Let’s take log on both sides ln f = ln (constant) + a ln x + b ln y + c ln z

↓ Differentiating both sides

⇒ \(\begin{aligned}
& \frac{d f}{f}=0+a \frac{d x}{x}+b \frac{d y}{y}+c \frac{d z}{z} \\
& \frac{\Delta f}{f}= \pm a \frac{\Delta x}{x} \pm b \frac{\Delta y}{y} \pm c \frac{d z}{z}
\end{aligned}\)

⇒\(\begin{aligned}
& \left(\frac{\Delta f}{f}\right)_{\max }=\max \text { of }\left( \pm \mathrm{a} \frac{\Delta x}{x} \pm \mathrm{b} \frac{\Delta y}{y} \pm c \frac{\Delta z}{z}\right) \\
& \text { i.e. } \quad f=15 x^2 y^{-3 / 2} z^{-5}
\end{aligned}\)

⇒ \(\begin{aligned}
& \frac{d f}{f}=0+2 \frac{d x}{x}-\frac{3}{2} \frac{d y}{y}-5 \frac{d z}{z} \\
& \frac{\Delta f}{f}= \pm 2 \frac{\Delta x}{x} \mp \frac{3}{2} \frac{\Delta y}{y} \mp 5 \frac{d z}{z}
\end{aligned}\)

⇒ \(\left(\frac{\Delta f}{f}\right)_{\max }=\max \text { of }\left( \pm 2 \frac{\Delta x}{x} \mp \frac{3}{2} \frac{\Delta y}{y} \mp 5 \frac{\Delta z}{z}\right)\)

⇒ \(\left(\frac{\Delta f}{f}\right)_{\max }=2 \frac{\Delta x}{x}+\frac{3}{2} \frac{\Delta y}{y}+5 \frac{\Delta z}{z}\)

Solved Examples

Example 12. If the measured value of resistance R = 1.05Ω, wire diameter d = 0.60 mm, and length l= 75.3 cm. If the maximum error in resistance measurement is 0.01Ω   and the least count of diameter and length measuring device are 0.01 mm and 0.1 cm respectively, then find max. permissible error.

⇒ \(\text { in resistivity } \quad \rho=\frac{R\left(\frac{\pi d^2}{4}\right)}{\ell}\)

Solution: \(\left(\frac{\Delta \rho}{\rho}\right)_{\max }=\frac{\Delta R}{R}+2 \frac{\Delta d}{d}+\frac{\Delta \ell}{\ell}\)

ΔR = 0.01
Δd = 0.01 mm (least count)
Δl = 0.1 cm (least count)

⇒ \(\left(\frac{\Delta \rho}{\rho}\right)_{\max }=\left(\frac{0.01 \Omega}{1.05 \Omega}+2 \frac{0.01 \mathrm{~mm}}{0.60 \mathrm{~mm}}+\frac{0.1 \mathrm{~cm}}{75.3 \mathrm{~cm}}\right) \times 100=4.3 \% .\)

Example 13. In Ohm’s law experiment, the potential drop across a resistance was measured as v = 5.0 volt and the current was measured as i = 2.0 amp. If the least count of the voltmeter and ammeter are 0.1 V and 0.01A respectively then find the maximum permissible error in resistance.
solution: \(R=\frac{v}{i}=v \times i^{-1}\)

⇒ \(\left(\frac{\Delta R}{R}\right)_{\max }=\frac{\Delta v}{v}+\frac{\Delta i}{i}\)

Δv = 0.1 volt (least count)
Δi = 0.01 amp (least count)

⇒ \(\%\left(\frac{\Delta R}{R}\right)_{\max }=\left(\frac{0.1}{5.0}+\frac{0.01}{2.00}\right) \times 100 \%=2.5 \%\)

Example 14. In Searle’s exp to find Young’s modulus, the diameter of wire is measured as D = 0.050 cm, the length of wire is L = 125 cm, and when a weight, m = 20.0 kg is put, extension in the length of the wire was found to be 0.100 cm. Find the maximum permissible error in Young’s modulus (Y).
Solution: \(\frac{\mathrm{mg}}{\pi \mathrm{d}^2 / 4}=Y\left(\frac{\mathrm{x}}{\ell}\right) \quad \Rightarrow \quad Y=\frac{\mathrm{mg} \ell}{(\pi / 4) \mathrm{d}^2 x}\)

⇒ \(\left(\frac{\Delta Y}{Y}\right)_{\max }=\frac{\Delta m}{m}+\frac{\Delta \ell}{\ell}+2 \frac{\Delta d}{d}+\frac{\Delta x}{x}\)

Here no information on least count is given so the maximum permissible error is  = place value of the last number.

m = 20.0 kg m = 0.1 kg (place value of the last number)

l= 125 cm = 1 cm (place value of last number)

d = 0.050 cm d = 0.001 cm (place value of the last number)

x = 0.100 cm x = 0.001 cm (place value of the last number)

⇒ \(\left(\frac{\Delta Y}{Y}\right)_{\max }=\left(\frac{0.1 \mathrm{~kg}}{20.0 \mathrm{~kg}}+\frac{1 \mathrm{~cm}}{125 \mathrm{~cm}}+\frac{0.001 \mathrm{~cm}}{0.05 \mathrm{~cm}} \times 2+\frac{0.001 \mathrm{~cm}}{0.100 \mathrm{~cm}}\right) \times 100 \%=6.3 \%\)

Example 15. To find the value of ‘g’ using a simple pendulum. T = 2.00 sec; l = 1.00 m was measured. Estimate maximum permissible error in ‘g’. Also, find the value of ‘g’. ( use pi2 = 10 )
Solution:

⇒ \(\mathrm{T}=2 \pi \sqrt{\frac{\ell}{\mathrm{g}}} \quad \Rightarrow \quad \mathrm{g}=\frac{4 \pi^2 \ell}{\mathrm{T}^2}\)

⇒ \(\left(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{g}}{\mathrm{g}}\right)_{\max }=\frac{\Delta \ell}{\ell}+2 \frac{\Delta \mathrm{T}}{\mathrm{T}} \quad=\left(\frac{0.01}{1.00}+2 \frac{0.01}{2.00}\right) \times 100 \% . \quad=2 \%\)

⇒ \(\text { value of } \mathrm{g}=\frac{4 \pi^2 \ell}{\mathrm{T}^2}=\frac{4 \times 10 \times 1.00}{(2.00)^2}=10.0 \mathrm{~m} / \mathrm{s}^2\)

⇒ \(\left(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{g}}{\mathrm{g}}\right)_{\max }=2 / 100 \text { so } \frac{\Delta \mathrm{g}_{\max }}{10.0}=\frac{2}{100} \text { so } \quad(\Delta \mathrm{g})_{\max }=0.2=\text { max error in ‘ } \mathrm{g} \text { ‘ }\)

So g = (10.0+0.2) m/s2

Other Types Of Errors:

1. Error due to external Causes:

These are the errors that arise due to reasons beyond the control of the experimentalist, e.g., change in room temperature, atmospheric pressure, humidity, variation of the accretion due to gravity, etc.

A suitable correction can, however, be applied for these errors if the factors affecting the result are also recorded.

2. Instrumental errors:

Every instrument, however cautiously manufactured, possesses imperfection to some extent. As a result of this imperfection, the measurements with the instrument cannot be free from errors.

Errors, however small, do occur owing to the inherent manufacturing defects in the measuring instruments and are called instrumental errors.

These errors are of constant magnitude and suitable corrections can be applied for these errors. e.i.. Zero errors in vernier calipers, and screw gauge, backlash errors in screw gauge, etc.

Personal or chance error:

Two observers using the same experiment setup, do not obtain the same result. Even the observations of a single experimentalist differ when it is repeated several times by him or her.

Such errors always occur inspire of the best and honest efforts on the part of the experimentalist and are known as personal errors. These errors are also called chance errors as they depend upon chance.

The effect of the chance error on the result can be considerably reduced by taking a large number of observations and then taking their mean. How to take the mean, is described in the next point.

Measurement Errors and Experiments Notes for NEET Physics

4. Errors in Averaging :

Suppose to measure some quantity, we take several observations, a1, a2, a3…. an. To find the absolute error in each measurement and percentage error, we have to follow these steps (a)

First of all mean of all the observations is calculated: a mean = (a1+ a2 +a3 +…+ an) / n. The mean of these values is taken as the best possible value of the quantity under the given conditions of measurements.

Absolute Error:

The magnitude of the difference between the best possible or mean value of the quantity and the individual measurement value is called the absolute error of the measurement. The absolute error in an individual measured value is:

⇒ \(\Delta a_n=\left|a_{\text {mean }}-a_n\right|\)

The arithmetic mean of all the absolute errors is taken as the final or mean absolute error.

⇒ \(\Delta \mathrm{a}_{\text {mean }}=\left(\left|\Delta \mathrm{a}_1\right|+\left|\Delta \mathrm{a}_2\right|+\left|\Delta \mathrm{a}_3\right|+\ldots \ldots \ldots . .+\left|\Delta \mathrm{a}_n\right|\right) / \mathrm{n}\)

⇒ \(\Delta a_{\text {mean }}=\left(\sum_{i=1}^n\left|\Delta a_i\right|\right) / n\)

⇒ \(\text { we can say } \mathrm{a}_{\text {mean }}-\Delta \mathrm{a}_{\text {mean }} \leq \mathrm{a} \leq \mathrm{a}_{\text {mean }}+\Delta \mathrm{a}_{\text {mean }}\)

Relative and Percentage Error

Relative error is the ratio of the mean absolute error and arithmetic mean

⇒ \(\text { Relative error }=\frac{\Delta \mathrm{a}_{\text {mean }}}{\mathrm{a}_{\text {mean }}}\)

When the relative error is expressed in percent, it is called the percentage error. Thus,

⇒ \(\text { Percentage error }=\frac{\Delta \mathrm{a}_{\text {mean }}}{\mathrm{a}_{\text {mean }}} \times 100 \%\)

Solved Examples

Example 16. In some observations, values of ‘g’ are coming as 9.81, 9.80, 9.82, 9.79, 9.78, 9.84, 9.79, 9.78, 9.79, and 9.80 m/s2. Calculate absolute errors and percentage errors in g.

Solution:

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Calculate absolute errors and percentage error in g.

Percentage error \(=\frac{\Delta g_{\text {mean }}}{g_{\text {mean }}} \times 100=\frac{0.014}{9.80} \times 100 \%=0.14 \%\)

so ‘g’ = ( 9.80 ± 0.014 ) m/s2

Experiment – 1

Screw gauge (Micrometer)

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Two measure diameter of a wire, a screw gauge is used

Screw gauge is used to measure closely upto \(\left(\frac{1 \mathrm{~mm}}{100}\right)\) How can it divide 1 mm in 100 parts! To divide 1 mm into 100 parts, a screw is used. In one rotation, the screw (spindle) moves forward by 1 mm. (Called the pitch of the screw ) The rotation of the screw (spindle) is divided into 100 parts (called circular scale), hence 1 mm is divided into 100 parts

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Two measure diameter of a wire, a screw gauge is used

1 rotation= 1 mm

100 circular parts= 1 mm

so 1 circular part= \(\frac{1 \mathrm{~mm}}{100}=\text { Least count of screw gauge }\)

So let’s generalize it

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments So lets generalize it

How to find the thickness of an object by screw gauge

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments How to find thickness of an object by screw gauge

Description of screw gauge:

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Description of screw gauge

The object to be measured is put between the jaws. The sleeve is a hollow part, fixed with the frame and the main scale is printed on it. The spindle and thimble are welded and move together utilizing a screw.

The circular scale is printed on the thimble as shown. It generally consists of 100 divisions (sometimes 50 divisions also). The main scale has mm marks (Sometimes it also has 1/2 mm marks below mm marks.)

(Usually, if the pitch of the screw gauge is 1mm then there are 1mm marks on the main scale and if the pitch is 1/2 mm then there are 1/2 mm marks also)

This instrument can read upto 0.01 mm (10 um) with accuracy which is why it is called a micrometer

Solved Examples

Example 17. Read the normal screw gauge

  1. The main scale has only mm marks.
  2. In a complete rotation, the screw advances by 1 mm.
  3. The circular scale has 100 divisions

Solution:

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments The normal screw gauge

Example 18. Read the screw gauge

  1. Main scale has \(\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{~mm}\) marks
  2. In complete rotation, the screw advances by \(\frac{1}{2}\) mm.
  3. The circular scale has 50 divisions.

Solution:

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Circular scale has 50 division

Example 19. Read the screw gauge shown below:

  1. Main scale has \(\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{~mm}\) marks
  2. In complete rotation, the screw advances by \(\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{~mm} \text {. }\)
  3. The circular scale has 50 divisions.

Example 20. A wire of resistance R = 100.0Ω and length l = 50.0 cm is put between the jaws of the screw gauge. Its reading is shown in the figure. The pitch of the screw gauge is 0.5 mm and there are 50 divisions on a circular scale. Find its resistivity in correct significant figures and maximum permissible error in p (resistivity).
Solution:

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments A wire of resistance

⇒ \(R=\frac{\rho \ell}{\pi d^2 / 4}\)

⇒ \(\rho=\frac{R \pi d^2}{4 \ell}=\frac{(100.0)(3.14)\left(8.42 \times 10^{-3}\right)}{4\left(50.0 \times 10^{-2}\right)}=1.32 \Omega / \mathrm{m}\)

⇒ \(\frac{d \rho}{\rho}=\frac{d R}{R}+\frac{2 d(D)}{D}+\frac{d \ell}{\ell}=\frac{0.1}{100.0}+2 \times \frac{0.01}{8.42}+\frac{0.1}{50}=0.00537(\approx 0.52 \%)\)

Answer:

Example 21. In a complete rotation, the spindle of a screw gauge advances by \(\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{~mm} \text {. }\) There are 50 divisions on a circular scale. The main scale has \(\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{~mm}\) mm marks → (is graduated to \(\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{mm}\) or has least count \(=\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{~mm}\) If a wire is put between the jaws, 3 main scale divisions are visible, and 20 divisions of circular scale co-inside with the reference line. Find the diameter of the wire in the correct S.F

Solution: Diameter of wire \(\left(3 \times \frac{1}{2} \mathrm{~mm}\right)+(20)\left(\frac{1 / 2 \mathrm{~mm}}{50}\right)=1.5+0.20=1.70 \mathrm{~mm}\) (The answer should be upto two decimal places because this screw gauges can measure upto 0.01 mm accuracy).

Example 22. In the previous question if the mass of the wire is measured as 0.53 kg and the length of the wire is measured by an mm scale and is found to be 50.0 cm, find the density of the wire in correct significant figures.
Solution: \(\rho=\frac{\mathrm{m}}{\left(\frac{\pi \mathrm{d}^2}{4}\right) \ell}=\frac{\left(0.53 \times 10^3\right) \times 4}{(3.14)\left(1.70 \times 10^{-3}\right)^2\left(50 \times 10^{-2}\right)} \mathrm{g} / \mathrm{m}^3=4.7 \times 10^8 \text { (2 S.F.) }\)

Example 23. Two measure diameter of a wire, a screw gauge is used. The main scale division is 1 mm. In a complete rotation, the screw advances by 1 mm and the circular scale has 100 divisions. The reading of the screw gauge is shown in the figure.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Two measure diameter of a wire, a screw gauge is used

If there is no error in mass measurement, but an error in length measurement is 1%, then find
max. Possible error in density.

Solution: \(\rho=\frac{\mathrm{m}}{\left(\frac{\pi \mathrm{d}^2}{4}\right) \ell} \quad \Rightarrow \quad\left(\frac{\Delta \rho}{\rho}\right)=2 \frac{\Delta \mathrm{d}}{\mathrm{d}}+\frac{\Delta \ell}{\ell}\)

Δd = least count of \(\frac{1 \mathrm{~mm}}{100}=0.01 \mathrm{~mm}\) and d = 3.07 mm from the figure so \(\left(\frac{\Delta \rho}{\rho}\right)_{\max }=\left(2 \times \frac{0.01}{3.07}+\frac{1}{100}\right) \times 100 \% \quad \Rightarrow \quad\left(\frac{\Delta \rho}{\rho}\right)_{\max }=1.65 \% \text {. }\)

Zero Error:

If there is no object between the jaws (i.e. jaws are in contact), the screw gauge should give zero reading. But due to extra material on jaws, even if there is no object, it gives some excess reading. This excess. Reading is called zero error:

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Zero Error

Solved Examples

Example 24. Find the thickness of the wire. The main scale division is 1 mm. In a complete rotation, the screw advances by 1 mm and the circular scale has 100 divisions.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments the thickness of the wire

Solution: Excess reading (Zero error) = 0.03 mm It is giving 7.67 mm in which there is 0.03 mm excess reading, which has to be removed ( subtracted) so actual reading = 7.67 – 0.03 = 7.64 mm

Example 25. Find the thickness of the wire. The main scale division is 1 mm. In a complete rotation, the screw advances by 1 mm and the circular scale has 100 divisions. The zero error of the screw gase is –0.07 mm

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments The main scale division is of 1 mm

Solution: Excess reading (Zero error) = – 0.07mm It is giving 7.95 mm in which there is -0.07 mm excess reading, which has to be removed ( subtracted) so actual reading = 7.95 -(- 0.07) = 8.02 mm.

Zero Correction:

  • Zero correction is an invert of zero error:
  • zero correction = – (zero error)

Actual reading = observed reading – zero error = observed reading + Zero correction

Experiment 2

Vernier calipers

It is used to measure accurately upto 0.1 mm.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Vernier callipers

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments On the upper plate, main scale is printed which is simply an mm scale

  • On the upper plate, the main scale is printed which is simply an mm scale.
  • On the lower plate, the vernier scale is printed, which is a bit compressed scale. Its one part is 0.9 mm. (10 vernier scale divisions = 9 mm ⇒ 1 vernier scale division = 0.9 mm)
  • The object which is to be measured is fitted between the jaws as shown.

NEET Physics Class 12 Measurement Errors Notes

How to read vernier calipers:

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments How to read Vernier Callipers

Now let’s see How the slight difference between 1 MSD and 1 VSD reflects as least count

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments In the vernier caliperse, 9 main scale divisions matches with 10 vernier scale divisions

Required length = 13 mm + x =?

at point ‘A’, the main scale and vernier scale are matching

so length OA along main Scale = length OA along Vernier Scale

13 mm +3 (Main scale division) = ( 13 mm + x ) + 3 (vernier Scale division )

Get 13 mm + x = 13 mm + 3 (Main scale division – vernier Scale division)

= 13 mm + 3 ( 1 mm – 0.9 mm )

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments (Main scale division - vernier Scale division)

Hence the slight difference between 1 MSD (1 mm ) and 1 VSD (0.9 mm ) reflects as least count (0.1 mm)

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Hence the slight difference between 1 MSD (1 mm )

Example 26. Read the vernier. 10 divisions of the vernier scale match with 9 divisions of the main scale

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments the special type of vernier

Solution: 10 vernier scale divisions = 9 mm

1 vernier scale division = 0.9 mm

least count = (Main scale division – vernier Scale division)

= 1 mm – 0.9 mm (from figure)

= 0.1 mm

Thickness of the object = (main scale reading) + (vernier scale Reading) (least count )

So thickness of the object = 15 mm + (6) (0.1mm ) = 15.6 mm

Example 27. Read the special type of vernier. 20 divisions of the vernier scale match with 19 divisions of main scale.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments the special type of vernier

Solution: 20 vernier scale divisions = 19 mm

1 vernier scale division \(=\frac{19}{20} \mathrm{~mm}\)

where least count = (Main scale division – vernier Scale division)

= 1 mm – 19/20 mm

= 0.05 mm

Thickness of the object = (main scale reading) + (vernier scale Reading) (least count )

So thickness of the object = 13 mm + (12) (0.05mm )

= 13.60 mm

Zero Error:

If there is no object between the jaws (ie. jaws are in contact ), the vernier should give zero reading. But due to some extra material on the jaws, even if there is no object between the jaws, it gives some excess Reading. This excess reading is called a zero error

Example 28. In the vernier calipers, 9 main scale divisions match with 10 vernier scale divisions. The thickness of the object using the defective vernier calipers will be :

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments In the vernier caliperse, 9 main scale divisions matches with 10 vernier scale divisions..

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments In the vernier caliperse, 9 main scale divisions matches with 10 vernier scale divisions.

Example 29. In the vernier calipers, 9 main scale divisions match with 10 vernier scale divisions.

The thickness of the object using the defective vernier calipers will be :

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments The thickness of the object using the defected vernier calliperse

Solution: From the first figure, Excess reading (zero error ) = 0.6 mm If an object is placed, vernier gives 14.6 mm in which there is 0.6 mm excess reading, which has to be subtracted. So actual thickness = 14.6 – 0.6 = 14.0 mm we can also do it using the formula

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Main scale reading is –1 mm when there is no object between the jasws

Example 30. The main scale reading is –1 mm when there is no object between the jaws. In the vernier calipers, 9 main scale divisions match with 10 vernier scale divisions. The thickness of the object using the defective vernier calipers will be:

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Main scale reading is –1 mm when there is no object between the jasws

Solution: Zero error = main scale reading + ( vernier scale reading ) ( least count ) = –1 mm + 6 (0.1 mm) = –0.4 mm observed reading = 11.8 mm So actual thickness = 11.8 – (-0.4) = 12.2 mm.

Zero Correction:

  • Zero correction is an invert of zero error.
  • Zero correction = – ( zero error )
  • In example 28, zero error was 0.6 mm, so zero correction will be – 0.6 mm
  • In example 29, zero error was -0.4 mm, so zero correction will be + 0.4 mm

Example 31. The main scale of the vernier calipers reads 10 mm in 10 divisions. 10 divisions of the Vernier scale coincide with 9 divisions of the main scale. When the two jaws of the calipers touch each other, the fifth division of the vernier coincides with 9 main scale divisions and the zero of the vernier is to the right of zero of the main scale.

When a cylinder is tightly placed between the two jaws, the zero of the vernier scale lies slightly behind 3.2 cm and the fourth vernier division coincides with a main scale division. The diameter of the cylinder is.

Solution: Zero error = 0.5 mm = 0.05 cm. Observed reading of cylinder diameter = 3.1 cm + (4) (0.01 cm). = 3.14 cm Actual thickness of cylinder = (3.14) – (0.05). = 3.09 cm

Example 32. In the previous question if the length of the cylinder is measured as 25 mm, and the mass of the cylinder is measured as 50.0 gm, find the density of the cylinder (gm/cm 3) in proper significant figures
Solution:

⇒ \(\rho=\frac{m}{\pi\left(d^2 / 4\right) h}\)

⇒ \(\rho=\frac{(50.0) \mathrm{gm}}{3.14 \times(3.09 / 2)^2 \times\left(25 \times 10^{-1}\right) \mathrm{cm}^3}=2.7 \mathrm{gm} / \mathrm{cm}^3 \text { (in two S.F.) }\)

Experiment 3

Determining the value of ‘g’ using a simple pendulum

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments the value of ‘g’ using a simple pendulum

In this exp., a small spherical bob is hung with a cotton thread. This arrangement is called a sample pendulum. The bob is displaced slightly and allowed to oscillate. To find the period, the time taken for 50 oscillations is noted using a stopwatch

⇒ \(\text { Theoretically } T=2 \pi \sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{L}}{\mathrm{g}}} \quad \Rightarrow \quad \mathrm{g}=4 \pi^2 \frac{\mathrm{L}}{\mathrm{T}^2}\)

where L = Equivalent length of pendulum = length of thread (l) + radius (r) of bob,

T = time period of the simple pendulum \(=\frac{\text { Time taken for } 50 \text { oscillations }}{50}\)

so ‘g’ can be easily determined by equation …(1).

Graphical method to find ‘g’:

⇒ \(\mathrm{T}^2=\left(\frac{4 \pi^2}{g}\right) \mathrm{L}\) \(\text { so, } \mathrm{T}^2 \propto \mathrm{L}\)

Find T for different values of L.

Plot T2 v/s L curve. From equation (2), it should be a straight line, with slope \(=\left(\frac{4 \pi^2}{g}\right)\)

Find slope of T2 v/s L graph and equate it to \(\left(\frac{4 \pi^2}{g}\right)\) and get ‘g’.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments For different values of L, we get different values of ‘T’

Example 33. In certain observation, we got l= 23.2 cm, r = 1.32 cm, and the time taken for 10 oscillations was 10.0 sec. Estimate the value of ‘g’ in a proper significant figure. (take π² = 10)
Solution : Equivalent length of pendulum L = 23.2 cm + 1.32 cm

= 24.5 cm (according to the addition rule of S.F.)

And time period \(T=\frac{10.0}{10}=1.00\)

⇒ \(\text { get } \mathrm{g}=4 \pi^2 \frac{\mathrm{L}}{\mathrm{T}^2}=4 \times 10 \frac{24.5 \mathrm{~cm}}{(1.00)^2} \text { (in 3 S.F.) }\)

⇒ \(=4 \times 10 \times \frac{24.5 \times 10^{-2} \mathrm{~m}}{(1.00)^2 \mathrm{sec}^2}=9.80 \mathrm{~m} / \mathrm{sec}^2\)

Example 34. For different values of L, we get different values of ‘T’. The curve between L v/s T² is shown. Estimate ‘g’ from this curve. (take π² = 10)

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments For different values of L, we get different values of ‘T’

Solution: \(\mathrm{L}=\left(\frac{\mathrm{g}}{4 \pi^2}\right) \mathrm{T}^2\) \(\mathrm{L} v / s \mathrm{~T}^2=\left(\frac{\mathrm{g}}{4 \pi^2}\right)\) slope \(=\frac{0.49}{2}=\frac{\mathrm{g}}{4 \pi^2} \quad \Rightarrow \quad \mathrm{g}=9.8 \mathrm{~m} / \mathrm{sec}^2\)

Maximum permissible error in ‘g’ due to error in measurement of l, r, and T.

⇒ \(\mathrm{g}=4 \pi^2 \frac{(\ell+r)}{(\mathrm{t} / 50)^2}=4 \pi^2(2500) \frac{\ell+r}{\mathrm{t}^2}\)

⇒ \(\ln \mathrm{g}=\ln 4 \pi^2(2500)+\ln (\ell+\mathrm{r})-2 \ln (\mathrm{t}) \quad\left(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{g}}{\mathrm{g}}\right)_{\max }=\frac{\Delta \ell+\Delta \mathrm{r}}{\ell+\mathrm{r}}+2 \frac{\Delta \mathrm{t}}{\mathrm{t}}\).

Solved Examples

Example 35. In certain observations we got  = 23.2 cm, r = 1.32 cm, and the time taken for 10 oscillations was 10.0 sec. Find the maximum permissible error in (g)
solution:

⇒ \(\begin{array}{lll}
\ell=23.2 & \rightarrow & \Delta \ell=0.1 \mathrm{~cm} \\
\mathrm{r}=1.32 \mathrm{~cm} & \rightarrow & \Delta \mathrm{r}=0.01 \mathrm{~cm} \\
\mathrm{t}=10.0 \mathrm{sec} & \rightarrow & \Delta \mathrm{t}=0.1 \mathrm{sec}
\end{array}\)

⇒ \(\left(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{g}}{\mathrm{g}}\right)_{\max }=\left(\frac{0.1 \mathrm{~cm}+0.01 \mathrm{~cm}}{23.2 \mathrm{~cm}+1.32 \mathrm{~cm}}+2 \frac{0.1 \mathrm{sec}}{10.0 \mathrm{sec}}\right) \times 100 \%=2.44 \%\)

Example 36. Time is measured using a stopwatch of the least count of 0.1 seconds. In 10 oscillations, the time taken is 20.0 seconds. Find the maximum permissible error in the period.
Solution: \(\begin{aligned}
& \mathrm{T}=\frac{\text { Total time }}{\text { Total oscillation }}=\frac{\mathrm{t}}{10} \quad \Rightarrow \quad \Delta \mathrm{T}=\frac{\Delta \mathrm{t}}{10}=\frac{0.1}{10} \\
& \Delta \mathrm{T}=0.01 \text { second. }
\end{aligned}\)

Example 37. A student experiments determination of \(\mathrm{g}\left(=\frac{4 \pi^2 \ell}{\mathrm{T}^2}\right), \quad ” \ell ” \approx 1 \mathrm{~m}\) and he commits an error of “Δl”. For T he takes the time of n oscillations with the stopwatch of least count Δt. For which of the following data, the measurement of g will be most accurate?
Solutions:

⇒ \(\begin{gathered}
\text { Here } \mathrm{T}=\frac{\text { total time }}{\text { total oscillation }}=\frac{\mathrm{t}}{\mathrm{n}} \text { so } \mathrm{dT}=\frac{\mathrm{dt}}{\mathrm{n}} \\
\frac{\Delta \mathrm{g}}{\mathrm{g}}=\frac{\Delta \mathrm{L}}{\mathrm{L}}+2 \frac{\Delta \mathrm{T}}{\mathrm{T}}
\end{gathered}\)

⇒ \(\frac{\Delta g}{g}=\frac{0.5}{1}+2 \frac{0.1 / 20}{T}\)

⇒ \(\frac{\Delta g}{g}=\frac{0.5}{1}+2 \frac{0.1 / 50}{T}\)

⇒ \(\frac{\Delta g}{g}=\frac{0.5}{1}+2 \frac{0.02 / 20}{T}\)

⇒ \(\frac{\Delta g}{g}=\frac{0.1}{1}+2 \frac{0.05 / 50}{T}\)

So % error in g will be minimum in option (D)

Experiment 4

Determining Young’s Modulus of a given wire by “Searle’s Method“: An elementary method: To determine Young’s Modulus, we can perform an ordinary experiment. Let’s hang a weight ‘m’ from a wire

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments An elementary method

from Hook’s law: \(\frac{\mathrm{mg}}{\mathrm{A}}=\mathrm{Y}\left(\frac{\mathrm{x}}{\ell_0}\right) \quad \mathrm{x}=\left(\frac{\ell_0}{\pi \mathrm{r}^2 \mathrm{Y}}\right) \mathrm{mg}\)

If we change the weight, the elongation of the wire will increase proportionally.

If we plot elongation v/s mg, we will get a straight line.

By measuring its slope and equating it to \(\left(\frac{\ell_0}{\pi r^2 Y}\right)\) we can estimate Y.

Limitations in this ordinary method

1. For small loads, there may be some bends or kinks in the wire.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments For different values of L, we get different values of ‘T’

So we had better start with some initial weight (say 2 kg). So that the wire becomes straight.

2. There is a slight difference in the behavior of wire underloading and unloading load

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments There is slight difference in behavior of wire under loading and unloading

  • So we had better take the average during loading and unloading.
  • The average load will be more and more linear or accurate.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments The average load will be more and more linear or accurate

Modification in “Searle’s Method”.

To keep the experimental wire straight and kink-free, we start with some dead weight (2 kg)

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Modification in “Searle’s Method”

Now we gradually add more and more weight. The extra elongation (Δx) will be proportional to extra weight (Δw).

⇒ \(x=\frac{\ell_0}{\pi r^2 Y} w \quad \Rightarrow \quad \Delta x=\frac{\ell_0}{\pi r^2 Y}(\Delta w)\)

so let’s plot Δx v/s Δw, the slope of which will be \(=\left(\frac{\ell_0}{\pi r^2 Y}\right)\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Measurement of Young’s modulus.

Measurement of Young’s modulus.

To measure extra elongation, compared to the initial loaded position, we use a reference wire, also carrying a 2 kg load (dead weight). This method of measuring elongation by comparison also cancels the side effect of tamp and yielding of support.

Observations:

  1. Initial Reading = x0 = 0.540 mm. (Micrometer Reading without extra load)
  2. Radius of wire = 0.200 mm. (using screw gauge)

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Radius of wire

Measurement of extra extension due to extra load.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Measurement of extra extension due to extra load.

Method 1
Plot Δx v/s Δw (=Δm g)

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Extra elongation extra load

⇒ \(\text { slope }=\frac{B P}{A P}=\ldots \ldots . .=\frac{\ell}{Y\left(\pi r^2\right)} \Rightarrow Y=\)

Method: 2
→ Between observation (1) (6)
→ and (2) (7)
→ and (3) (8) 2.5 kg extra weight is added
→ and (4) (9)
→ and (5) (10)

→→ → → So elongation from observation (1) (6), (2) (7), (3) (8), (4) (9), and → (5) (10) will be due to extra 2.5 kg wt. So we can find elongation due to 2.5 kg wt from x6 – x1, x5 – x2, x8 – x3, or x10 – x5, and then we can find average elongation due to 2.5 kg wt.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments So elongation from observation

⇒ \(\Delta x=(\Delta w)\left(\frac{\ell_0}{\pi r^2 Y}\right)\) where Δw = Δm g = 25 N and (Δx) average = 0.5 cm Putting the values find Y = ………….

Solved Examples

Example 38. The adjacent graph shows the extra extension (x) of a wire of length 1m suspended from the top of a roof at one end with an extra load w connected to the other end. If the cross-sectional area of the wire is 10–6 m2, calculate the Young’s modulus of the material of the wire.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments The adjacent graph shows the extra extension

  1. 2 × 1011 N/m2
  2. 2 × 10–11 N/m2
  3. 3 × 1013 N/m3
  4. 2 × 1016 N/m2

Answer:

Question 39. In the experiment, the curve between Δx and Δw is shown as a dotted line (1). If we use another wire of the same material, but with double length and double radius. Which of the curves is expected?

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Double length and double radius

  1. 1
  2. 2
  3. 3
  4. 4

Solution: Initially slope \(=\frac{\Delta x}{\Delta w}=\frac{\ell_0}{\left(\pi r^2\right)(Y)}\)

in second case (slope)1 \(=\frac{\left(2 \ell_0\right)}{\pi(2 r)^2 Y}=\frac{1}{2} \frac{\ell_0}{\left(\pi r^2\right) Y}\)

So the slope will be halved.

Answer: 3. 3

NEET Physics Chapter 2 Measurement and Errors Notes

Example 40. Assertion: In Searle’s experiment to find Young’s modulus, a reference wire is also used along with the experiment wire. Reason: Reference wire neutralizes the effect of temperature, yielding of support, and other external factors

  1. If both Assertion and Reason are true and the Reason is a correct explanation of Assertion
  2. If both Assertion and Reason and true Reason is not a correct explanation of Assertion.
  3. If Assertion is true but Reason is false.
  4. If both Assertion and Reason are false.

Answer: 1. If both Assertion and Reason are true and the Reason is a correct explanation of Assertion

Question 41. If we use very thin and long wire

  • Sensitivity \(\left(\frac{\text { output }}{\text { input }}=\frac{\Delta x}{\Delta w}\right)\) of experiment will increase.
  • Young’s modulus will remain unchanged
  • The wire may break or yield during loading.
  • All of the above.

Answer: 4. All of the above.

Maximum permissible error in ‘Y’ due to error in measuring m, l0, r, x: \(Y=\frac{\ell_0}{\pi r^2 x} \mathrm{mg}\)

If there is no tolerance in mass ; max permissible error in Y is \(\left(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{y}}{\mathrm{Y}}\right)_{\max }=\frac{\Delta \ell_0}{\ell_0}+2 \frac{\Delta r}{r}+\frac{\Delta x}{x}\)

Solved Example

Example 42. In Searle’s experiment to find Young’s modulus the diameter of wire is measured as d = 0.050 cm, the length of wire is l = 125 cm and when a weight, m = 20.0 kg is put, extension in the length of wire was found to be 0.100cm. Find the maximum permissible error in Young’s modulus (Y).Use: \(Y=\frac{\mathrm{mg} \ell}{(\pi / 4) \mathrm{d}^2 x} .\)
Solution: \(\frac{\mathrm{mg}}{\pi \mathrm{d}^2 / 4}=Y\left(\frac{\mathrm{x}}{\ell}\right) \Rightarrow \quad \mathrm{Y}=\frac{\mathrm{mg} \ell}{(\pi / 4) \mathrm{d}^2 \mathrm{x}}\)

⇒ \(\left(\frac{d Y}{Y}\right)_{\max }=\frac{\Delta \mathrm{m}}{\mathrm{m}}+\frac{\Delta \ell}{\ell}+2 \frac{\Delta \mathrm{d}}{\mathrm{d}}+\frac{\Delta \mathrm{x}}{\mathrm{x}}\)

m = 20.0 kg Δm = 0.1 kg

Δ= 125 m Δl = 1 cm

d = 0.050 cm Δd = 0.001 cm

x = 0.100 cm Δx = 0.001 cm

⇒ \(\left(\frac{\mathrm{dY}}{\mathrm{Y}}\right)_{\max }=\left(\frac{0.1 \mathrm{~kg}}{20.0 \mathrm{~kg}}+\frac{1 \mathrm{~cm}}{125 \mathrm{~cm}}+\frac{2 \times 0.001 \mathrm{~cm}}{0.05 \mathrm{~cm}}+\frac{0.001 \mathrm{~cm}}{0.100 \mathrm{~cm}}\right) \times 100 \%=6.3 \%\)

Detailed Apparatus and method of Searl’s experiment

Searle’s Apparatus (Static Method)

The figure shows Searle’s apparatus. It consists of two metal frames F1 and F2 hinged together so that they can have only vertical relative motion. A spirit level L is supported at one end on a rigid cross-bar frame whose other end rests on the tip of a micrometer screw S, which moves vertically through the rigid crossbar

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Searle’s Apparatus (Static Method)

If there is any relative motion between the two frames, the spirit level no longer remains horizontal and the bubble is displaced. To bring the bubble back to its original position, the screw has to be moved up and down.

The distance through which the screw has to be moved gives the relative motion between the two frames. The frames are suspended by two identical long wires of steel from the same rigid horizontal support.

The wire B is an experimental wire and the wire A acts as a reference wire. The two frames are provided with two hooks H1 and H2 at their lower ends. The hook H1 carries a constant weight W to keep the wire taut. To the hook H2, a hanger is attached over which slotted weights can be put to apply the stretching force.

Procedure:

  1. Measure the length of the experimental wire from the point where it leaves the fixed support to the point where it is fixed in the frame.
  2. The diameter of the experimental wire is measured with the help of a screw gauge at about five different places and each place in two mutually perpendicular directions.
  3. Find the pitch and the least count of the micrometer and adjust it such that the bubble in the spirit level is exactly in the center. The initial reading of the micrometer is noted.
  4. The load on the hanger H2 is gradually increased in steps of 0.5 kg. Observe the reading on the micrometer at each stage after leveling the instrument with the help of the spirit level. To avoid the backlash error, all the final adjustments should be made by moving the screw in the upward direction only. If at any time the screw is raised too much, lower it below the central position and then raise it slowly to the proper position.
  5. Unload the wire by removing the weights in the same order and taking the reading on the micrometer screw each time. The reading taken for a particular load while loading the wire or unloading the wire should agree closely.

Experiment 5

Determining the specific heat capacity of an unknown liquid using a calorimeter:
The figure shows Regnault’s apparatus to determine the specific heat capacity of an unknown liquid. A solid sphere of known specific heat capacity s1 having mass m1 and initial temperature θ1 is mixed with the unknown liquid filled in a calorimeter.

Let masses of liquid and calorimeter are m2 and m3 respectively, specific heat capacities are s2 and s3 and initially, they were at room temperature θ2.

When the hot sphere is dropped in it, the sphere loses heat and the liquid calorimeter system takes heat. This process continues till the temperature of all the elements becomes the same (sayθ ). Heat lost by hot sphere = m1s1 (θ1 – θ) Heat taken by liquid & calorimeter = m2s2 (θ – θ2) + m3s3 (θ – θ2) If there were no external heat loss Heat given by sphere = Heat taken by liquid-Calorimeter system

⇒ \(\begin{aligned}
& m_1 s_1\left(\theta_1-\theta\right)=m_2 s_2\left(\theta-\theta_2\right)+m_3 s_3\left(\theta-\theta_2\right) \\
\text { Get } \quad & s_2=\frac{m_1 s_1\left(\theta_1-\theta\right)}{m_2\left(\theta-\theta_2\right)}-\frac{m_3 s_3}{m_2}
\end{aligned}\)

By measuring the final (steady state) temperature of the mixture, we can estimate s2: specific heat capacity of the unknown liquid.

To give the initial temperature (θ1) to the sphere, we keep it in the steam chamber (“O”), hanged by thread. Within some time (say 15 min) it achieves a constant temperature θ1.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Now the calorimeter, filled with water (part C)

Now the calorimeter, filled with water (part C) is taken below the steam chamber, the wooden removable disc D is removed, and the thread is cut. The sphere drops into the water-calorimeter system and the mixing starts.

If the sp. heat capacity of liquid (s2) were known and that of the solid ball (s1) is unknown then we can find

⇒ \(s_1=\frac{\left(m_2 s_2+m_3 s_3\right)\left(\theta-\theta_2\right)}{m_1\left(\theta_1-\theta\right)}\)

Solved Examples

Example 43. The mass, specific heat capacity and initial temperature of the sphere were 1000 gm, 1/2 cal/gm°C, and 80°C respectively. The mass of the liquid and the calorimeter are 900 gm and 200 gm, and initially, both were at room temperature 20°C. Both the calorimeter and the sphere are made of the same material. If the steady-state temperature after mixing is found to be 40°C, then the specific heat capacity of the unknown liquid is

  1. 0.25 cal/gºC
  2. 0.5 cal/gºC
  3. 1 cal/gºC
  4. 1.5 cal/gºC

Answer: 3. 1 cal/gºC

⇒ \(\mathrm{S}_2=\frac{(1000)(1 / 2)\left(80^{\circ}-40^{\circ}\right)}{900\left(40^{\circ}-20^{\circ}\right)}-\frac{(200)(1 / 2)}{900}=1 \mathrm{cal} / \mathrm{gm}^{\circ} \mathrm{C}\)

Example 44. If accidentally the calorimeter remained open to the atmosphere for some time during the experiment, due to which the steady-state temperature comes out to be 30ºC, then total heat loss to surroundings during the experiment, is (Use the specific heat capacity of the liquid from the previous question).

  1. 20 kcal
  2. 15 kcal
  3. 10 kcal
  4. 8 kcal

Solution: (2) Heat given by the sphere = (1000) (1/2) (80 – 30) = 25,000 cal

Heat absorbed by the water calorimeter system = (900) (1) (40 – 30) + (200) (1/2) (40 – 30) = 10,000 cal.

So heat loss to surrounding = 15,000 cal

Example 45. If the loss in gravitational potential energy due to falling the sphere by h height and heat loss to H surrounding at a constant rate is also taken into account, the energy equation will be modified to

  1. \(m_1 s_1\left(\theta_1-\theta\right)+\frac{m_1 g h}{J}=m_2 s_2\left(\theta-\theta_2\right)+m_3 s_3\left(\theta-\theta_2\right)-\dot{H} t\)
  2. \(m_1 s_1\left(\theta_1-\theta\right)-\frac{m_1 g h}{J}=m_2 s_2\left(\theta-\theta_2\right)+m_3 s_3\left(\theta-\theta_2\right)+\dot{H} t\)
  3. \(m_1 s_1\left(\theta_1-\theta\right)+\frac{m_1 g h}{J}=m_2 s_2\left(\theta-\theta_2\right)+m_3 s_3\left(\theta-\theta_2\right)+\dot{H} t\)
  4. \(m_1 s_1\left(\theta_1-\theta\right)-\frac{m_1 g h}{J}=m_2 s_2\left(\theta-\theta_2\right)+m_3 s_3\left(\theta-\theta_2\right)-\dot{H} t\)

Solution: 3. \(m_1 s_1\left(\theta_1-\theta\right)+\frac{m_1 g h}{J}=m_2 s_2\left(\theta-\theta_2\right)+m_3 s_3\left(\theta-\theta_2\right)+\dot{H} t\)

Heat generated = \(m_1 s_1\left(\theta_1-\theta\right)+\frac{m_1 g h}{J}\)

Maximum Permissible error in S 1 due to error in measuring θ1, θ2, and θ: To determine the specific heat capacity of an unknown solid,

we uses \(s_{\text {sold }}=\frac{m_1 s_1+m_2 s_2}{m_1}\left(\frac{\theta_{\mathrm{ss}}-\theta_2}{\theta_1-\theta_{\mathrm{ss}}}\right)\)

⇒ \(\mathrm{s}=\frac{\mathrm{m}_1 \mathrm{~s}_1+\mathrm{m}_2 \mathrm{~s}_2}{m_1}\left(\frac{\theta_{\mathrm{ss}}-\theta_2}{\theta_1-\theta_{\mathrm{ss}}}\right) \Rightarrow \frac{\mathrm{ds}}{\mathrm{s}}=\frac{\mathrm{d}\left(\theta_{\mathrm{ss}}-\theta_2\right)}{\left(\theta_{\mathrm{ss}}-\theta_2\right)}-\frac{d\left(\theta_1-\theta_{\mathrm{ss}}\right)}{\theta_1-\theta_{\mathrm{ss}}}\)

⇒ \(\left(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{s}}{\mathrm{s}}\right)=\frac{ \pm \Delta \theta \mp \Delta \theta}{\theta_{\mathrm{ss}}-\theta_2}+\frac{\mp \Delta \theta \pm \Delta \theta}{\theta_1-\theta_{\mathrm{ss}}}\)

⇒ \(\Rightarrow \quad\left(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{s}}{\mathrm{s}}\right)_{\max }=2 \Delta \theta\left(\frac{1}{\theta_{\mathrm{ss}}-\theta_2}+\frac{1}{\theta_1-\theta_{\mathrm{ss}}}\right)=2 \Delta \theta\left(\frac{\theta_1-\theta_2}{\left(\theta_{\mathrm{ss}}-\theta_2\right)\left(\theta_{\mathrm{ss}}-\theta_1\right)}\right)\)

If the mass and sp. heat capacities of water and calorimeter are precisely known, and the least count of temperature is the same for all measurements. then \(\Delta \theta=\Delta \theta_1=\Delta \theta_2\) \(\left(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{S}}{\mathrm{S}}\right)_{\max }\) will be least when \(\left(\theta_{\mathrm{ss}}-\theta_2\right)\left(\theta_{\mathrm{ss}}-\theta_1\right) \text { is max i.e. } \theta_{\mathrm{ss}}=\frac{\theta_1+\theta_2}{2}\)

If m1, s1, m2, s2 are precisely known, the maximum permissible % error in solid will be least when steady state temperature

⇒ \(\boldsymbol{\theta}_{\mathrm{ss}}=\frac{\theta_1+\theta_2}{2}\)

Solved Examples

Example 46. In the exp. of finding the sp. heat capacity of an unknown sphere (S2), the mass of the sphere and calorimeter are 1000 gm and 200 gm respectively and the sp. heat capacity of the calorimeter is equal to 1 to 2 cal/gm/ºC.

The mass of liquid (water) used is 900 gm. Initially, both the water and the calorimeter were at room temp 20.0ºC while the sphere was at temp 80.0ºC initially. If the steady state temp was found to be 40.0ºC, estimate the sp. heat capacity of the unknown sphere (S2). (use Swater = 1 cal/g/ºC ). Also, find the maximum permissible error in sp. heat capacity of the unknown sphere (S2 mass and specific heats of sphere and calorimeter are correctly known.)
Solution: To determine the specific heat capacity of an unknown solid,

⇒ \(\text { We use } s_{\text {sald }}=\frac{m_1 s_1+m_2 s_2}{m_1}\left(\frac{\theta_{s s}-\theta_2}{\theta_1-\theta_{\mathrm{ss}}}\right) \text { and get } s_{\text {solid }}=1 / 2 \mathrm{cal} / \mathrm{g} /{ }^{\circ} \mathrm{C}\)

⇒ \(\left(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{s}}{\mathrm{s}}\right)_{\max }=2 \Delta \theta\left(\frac{1}{\theta_{\mathrm{ss}}-\theta_2}+\frac{1}{\theta_1-\theta_{\mathrm{ss}}}\right)=2\left(0.1^{\circ} \mathrm{C}\right)\left(\frac{1}{40.0-20.0}+\frac{1}{80.0-40.0}\right)=1.5 \%\)

Electrical calorimeter 

The figure shows an electrical calorimeter to determine the specific heat capacity of an unknown liquid. First of all, the mass of the empty calorimeter (a copper container) is measured and suppose it is 1′.

Then the unknown liquid is poured into it. Now the combined mass of the calorimeter + liquid system is measured and let be 2′. So the mass of liquid is (m 2 – m1). Initially, both were at room temperature. Now a heater is immersed in it for time interval ‘t’.

The voltage drop across the heater is ‘V’ and the current passing through it is ‘t’. Due to the heat supplied, the temperature of both the liquid and calorimeter will rise simultaneously. After t sec; the heater was switched off, and the final temperature. If there is no heat loss to surroundings Heat supplied by the heater = Heat absorbed by the liquid + heat absorbed by the calorimeter

⇒ \((V I) t=\left(m_2-m_1\right) S_1\left(\theta_1-\theta_0\right)+m_1 S_c\left(\theta_1-\theta_0\right)\)

The specific heat of the liquid \(\mathrm{S}_{\ell}=\frac{\frac{(\mathrm{VI}) \mathrm{t}}{\theta_{\mathrm{f}}-\theta_0}-\mathrm{m}_1 \mathrm{~S}_{\mathrm{C}}}{\left(\mathrm{m}_2-\mathrm{m}_1\right)}\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Electrical calorimeter

Radiation correction: There can be heat loss to the environment. To compensate for this loss, a correction is introduced. Let the heater be on for t sec, and then it is switched off.

Now the temperature of the mixture falls due to heat loss to the environment. The temperature of the mixture is measured t/2 sec. after switching off. Let the fall in temperature during this time is

Now the corrected final temperature is taken as \(\theta_f^{\prime}=\theta_f+\varepsilon\)

Solved Examples

Example 47. In this experiment voltage across the heater is 100.0 V and current is 10.0A, and the heater was switched on for t = 700.0 sec. Initially, all elements were at room temperature θ0 = 10.0°C and the final temperature was measured = 73.0°C. The mass of the empty calorimeter was 1.0 kg and the combined mass of the calorimeter + liquid is 3.0 kg.

The specific heat capacity of the calorimeter S c = 3.0 × 103 J/kg°C. The fall in temperature 350 seconds after switching off the heater was 7.0°C. Find the specific heat capacity of the unknown liquid in proper significant figures.

  1. 3.5 × 103 J/kg°C
  2. 3.50 × 103 J/kg°C
  3. 4.0 × 103 J/kg°C
  4. 3.500 × 103 J/kg°C

Solution: Corrected final temperature = 0f = 73.0° + 7.0° = 80.0°

⇒ \(\mathrm{S}_{\ell}=\frac{\frac{(100.0)(10.0)(700.0)}{80.0-10.0}-(1.0)\left(3.0 \times 10^3\right)}{3.0-1.0}\)

= 3.5 × 103 J/kg°C (According to the addition and multiplication rule of S.F.)

Example 48. If the mass and specific heat capacity of the calorimeter are negligible, what would be the maximum permissible error in St. Use the data mentioned below. m1 → 0, Sc → 0, m2 = 1.00 kg, V = 10.0 V, I = 10.0 A, t = 1.00 × 102 sec., 0 0 = 15°C, Corrected θf = 65°C

  1. 4%
  2. 5%
  3. 8%
  4. 12%

Answer:

⇒ \(\begin{aligned}
& \text { If } \mathrm{m}_1 \rightarrow 0, \mathrm{~S}_{\mathrm{o}} \rightarrow 0 \\
& \mathrm{~S}_{\ell}=\frac{\text { VIt }}{\mathrm{m}_2\left(\theta_{\mathrm{f}}-\theta_0\right)}
\end{aligned}\)

⇒ \(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{S}_{\ell}}{\mathrm{S}_{\ell}}=\frac{\Delta \mathrm{V}}{\mathrm{V}}+\frac{\Delta \mathrm{I}}{\mathrm{I}}+\frac{\Delta \mathrm{t}}{\mathrm{t}}+\frac{\Delta \mathrm{m}_2}{\mathrm{~m}_2}+\frac{\Delta \theta_{\mathrm{f}}+\Delta \theta_0}{\theta_{\mathrm{f}}-\theta_0}=\frac{0.1}{10.0}+\frac{0.1}{10.0}+\frac{0.01 \times 10^2}{1.00 \times 10^2}+\frac{0.01}{1.00}+\frac{1+1}{50}=8 \%\)

Question 49. If the system were losing heat according to Newton’s cooling law, the temperature of the mixture would change with time (while the heater was on)

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments If the system were loosing heat according to Newton's cooling law

Solution: As the temperature increases, heat loss to surroundings increases. After some time the rate at which heat is lost becomes equal to the rate at which heat is supplied and an equilibrium or steady state is achieved. Hence temperature becomes constant after some time.

therefore C is correct.

Experiment 6

Determining the speed of sound using the resonance tube method

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Determining speed of sound using resonance tube method

Figure shows the experiment to find the velocity of sound in air using the Resonance tube method.

Principle: A resonance tube is a kind of closed organ pipe. So its natural freq. will be

⇒ \(\frac{V}{4 \ell_{e q}}, \frac{3 V}{4 \ell_{e q}}, \frac{5 V}{4 \ell_{e q}} \cdots \ldots . . \text { or } \quad \text { generally } \mathrm{f}_{\mathrm{n}}=(2 \mathrm{n}-1) \frac{V}{4 \ell_{e q}}\)

If it is forced with a tuning fork of frequency f0; for resonance, Natural freq = forcing freq.

⇒ \((2 \mathrm{n}-1) \frac{V}{4 \ell_{e q}}=\mathrm{f}_0 \quad \Rightarrow \quad \ell_{\text {eq }}=(2 n-1) \frac{V}{4 \mathrm{f}_0}\)

For the first Resonance \(\ell_{\infty q}=\frac{V}{4 \mathrm{f}_0}\) (corresponding to 1 st mode.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments first Resonance

For the sexond resonance \(\ell_{e q}=\frac{3 V}{4 f_0}\) (corresponding to 2nd mode)

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments second Resonance

Working: The resonance tube is a 100 cm tube. Initially, it is filled with water. To increase the length of the air column in the tube, the water level is lowered. The air column is forced with a tuning fork of frequency f0. Let at length 1, we get a first resonance (loud voice) then

⇒ \(\ell_{\text {eq1 }}=\frac{V}{4 \mathrm{f}_0} \quad \Rightarrow \quad \ell_1+\varepsilon=\frac{V}{4 \mathrm{f}_0}\)

If we further lower the water level, the noise becomes moderate. But at  2. We, again get a loud noise (second resonance) then

⇒ \(\ell_{\text {equ }}=\frac{3 \mathrm{~V}}{4 \mathrm{f}_0} \quad \Rightarrow \quad \ell_2+\varepsilon=\frac{3 \mathrm{~V}}{4 \mathrm{f}_0}\)

For 1and 2

⇒ \(V=2 f_0\left(\ell_2-\ell_1\right)\)

Observation table:

Room temp. in beginning = 26°C, Room temp. at end = 28ºC

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Determining speed of sound using resonance tube method.

  • l3=2l2-l2
  • end correction \((e)=\frac{\ell_2-3 \ell_1}{2}\)
  • e = 0.3d (d = diameter of tube)

Solved Examples

Example 50. The speed of sound calculated is roughly

  1. 340 m/sec
  2. 380 m/sec
  3. 430 m/sec
  4. None of these

Solution: l1

  • l2= 24.0 cm
  • l2 = 74.0 cm
  • v = 2f0 (l2 – l1) = 2(340) (0.740 – 0.240)
  • = (2) (340) (0.500) = 340 m/sec.

Example 51. In the previous question, the speed of sound at 0ºC is roughly

  1. 324 m/sec
  2. 380 m/sec
  3. 430 m/sec
  4. None of these

Answer: \(v \propto \sqrt{T} \Rightarrow \frac{V_{27^{\circ}}}{V_{0^{\circ}}}=\sqrt{\frac{300}{273}} V_0^*=V_{27} \cdot \sqrt{\frac{273}{300}}=340 \sqrt{\frac{273}{300}}=324 \mathrm{~m} / \mathrm{sec} \text {. }\)

Question 52. What should be the minimum length of the tube, so that the third resonance can also be heard?

  1. l2=421
  2. l2214
  3. l3=124
  4. None of these

Answer: \(v \alpha \sqrt{\mathrm{T}} \Rightarrow \frac{\mathrm{V}_{27^{\circ}}}{\mathrm{V}_{0^{\circ}}}=\sqrt{\frac{300}{273}} \mathrm{~V}_0^{\circ}=\mathrm{V}_{27} \cdot \sqrt{\frac{273}{300}}=340 \sqrt{\frac{273}{300}}=324 \mathrm{~m} / \mathrm{sec} \text {. }\)

Example 53. From the equation and end, correction can be calculated. Estimate the diameter of the tube using the formula (e = 0.3d)

  1. 2.5 cm
  2. 3.3 cm
  3. 5.2 cm
  4. None of these

Answer: \(\varepsilon=1 \mathrm{~cm}=0.3 \mathrm{~d}=\frac{1 \mathrm{~cm}}{0.3}=3.3 \mathrm{~cm}\)

Example 54. For the third resonance, which option shows the correct mode for displacement variation and pressure variation,

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Displacement Variation And Presuree Variation

Answer: 2.

Question 55. The equation of the standing wave for the second resonance can be

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Studying Wave

  1. Pex = 2A sin 2π (y + 1cm) cos 2π (340) t
  2. Pex = 2A sin 2π (y – 1cm) cos 2π (340) t
  3. Pex = 2A cos 2π (y + 1cm) cos 2π (340) t
  4. Pex = 2A cos 2π (y – 1cm) cos 2π (340) t

Answer: 1. \(k=\frac{2 \pi}{\lambda}=\frac{2 \pi}{1}=2 \pi \quad \omega=2 \pi \mathrm{f}=(2 \pi)(340)\)

Question 56. Taking the open end of the tube as y = 0, the position of the pressure nodes will be

  1. y = –1 cm, y = 49 cm
  2. y = 0 cm, y = 50 cm
  3. y = 1 cm, y = 51 cm
  4. None of these

Answer:  1. y = –1 cm, y = 49 cm

Max Permissible Error in the speed of sound due to error in f0, l1, l2:

For the Resonance tube experiment

V = 2f0 (l2 –l1)

ln V = ln 2 + ln f0 + ln (l2 – l1) max. permissible error in the speed of sound=

⇒ \(=\left(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{V}}{\mathrm{V}}\right)_{\max }=\frac{\Delta \mathrm{f}_0}{\mathrm{f}_0}+\frac{\Delta \ell_2+\Delta \ell_1}{\left(\ell_2+\ell_2\right)}\)

Solved Examples

Example 57. If a tuning fork of (340 Hz ± 1%) is used in the resonance tube method, and the first and second resonance lengths are 24.0 cm and 74.0 cm respectively. Find max—permissible error in speed of sound.

Solution: l1 = 20.0 cm → Δl1 = 0.1 cm

l2 = 74.0 cm → Δl2 = 0.1 cm

⇒ \(\mathrm{f}_0=(340 H z \pm 1 \%) \quad \frac{\Delta f_0}{f_0}=1 \%=\frac{1}{100}\)

⇒ \(\left(\frac{\Delta V}{V}\right)_{\max }=\frac{\Delta f_0}{f_0}+\frac{\Delta \ell_2+\Delta \ell_1}{\ell_2-\ell_1}=\frac{1}{100}+\frac{0.1+0.1}{74.0-24.0}=\frac{1}{100}+\frac{0.2}{50.0}=0.014\)

Experiment 7

Verification of Ohm’s law using voltmeter and ammeter Ohm’s law states that the electric current I flowing through a conductor is directly proportional to the potential difference (V) across its ends provided that the physical conditions of the conductor (such as temperature, dimensions, etc.) are kept constant. Mathematically.

V α I or V = IR

Here R is a constant known as resistance of the conductor and depends on the nature and dimensions of the conductor.

Circuit Diagram: The circuit diagram is as shown below:

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Circuit Diagram

Procedure: By shifting the rheostat contact, readings of the ammeter and voltmeter are noted down. At least six sets of observations are taken.

Then a graph is plotted between the potential difference (V) across R and the current (I) through R. The graph comes to be a straight line as shown in the figure.

Result: It is found from the graph that the ratio V/I is constant. Hence, the current voltage relationship is established, i.e., VI.

It means Ohm’s law is established as \(I=\left(\frac{1}{R}\right)\) v, find the slope of the i-v curve and equates it to \(\frac{1}{R} \text {. }\) slope \(=\frac{B P}{A P}=\frac{1}{R}\) Get R=…………..

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments A graph Is plotted

Solved Examples

Example 58. If the emf of the battery is 100 v, then what was the resistance of Rheostat adjusted at the 2nd reading (I = 2A, V = 20V)?

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments The resistance Of rheostat

  1. 10
  2. 20
  3. 30
  4. 40

Answer: From the curve slope \(=\frac{I}{V}=\frac{1}{R}=\frac{1}{10} \quad R=10 \Omega\) for reading \(I=\frac{E m f}{R+R_{t m}} \quad 2=\frac{100}{10+R_{t h}} \quad \Rightarrow \quad R_m=40 \Omega\)

Measurement and Errors NEET Physics Notes

Example 59. If three wires of the same material but different dimensions were used in place of unknown resistance, we get these I-V curves.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments If three wires of same material

Match the column according to the correct curve:

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Match The Columns

  1. (p)-(2); (q)-(3); (r)-(1)
  2. (p)-(3); (q)-(2); (r)-(1)
  3. (p)-(1); (q)-(2); (r)-(3)

One of these

Solution: \(R=\frac{\rho \ell}{A}=\frac{\rho \ell}{\pi r^2} \text { for case(p) } R \propto \frac{(1)}{(1)^2} \text { for case (q) } R \propto \frac{(1)}{(2)^2}\)

Example 60. I v/s V curve for a non-ohmic resistance is shown. The dynamic resistance is maximum at point

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments The dynamic resistance is maximum at point

  1. a1
  2. b
  3. c
  4. same for all

Solution: Dynamic resistance \(R=\frac{d v}{d I}=\frac{1}{d I / d v}=\frac{1}{\text { slope }}\)

At pt. a slope is min, so R is max

Example 61. If by mistake, the Ammeter is connected parallel to the resistance then the I-V curve expected is (Here I = reading of ammeter, V = reading of voltmeter)

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Voltmeter is connected in series with the resistance

Solution: 3. As the ammeter has very low resistance most of the current will pass through the ammeter so the reading of the ammeter (I) will be very large. The voltmeter has very high resistance so the reading of the voltmeter will be very low.

Example 62. If by mistake, the voltmeter is connected in series with the resistance then the I-V curve expected is (Here I = reading of ammeter, V = reading of voltmeter )

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Ammeter is connected parallel to the resistance

Solution: 4. Due to the voltmeter’s high resistance, the ammeter’s reading will be very low.

⇒ \(\begin{aligned}
& \rho=\frac{R A}{L}=\frac{\pi D^2}{4 L} \frac{V}{I} \\
& \ln \rho=\ln \frac{\pi}{4}+2 \ln D-\ln L+\ln V-\ln I \\
& \frac{d \rho}{\rho}=2 \frac{d D}{D}-\frac{d L}{L}+\frac{d V}{V}-\frac{d I}{I}
\end{aligned}\)

⇒ \(\begin{aligned}
& \frac{\Delta \rho}{\rho}= \pm 2 \frac{\Delta \mathrm{D}}{\mathrm{D}} \mp \frac{\Delta \mathrm{L}}{\mathrm{L}} \pm \frac{\Delta \mathrm{V}}{\mathrm{V}} \mp \frac{\Delta \mathrm{I}}{\mathrm{I}} \\
& \left(\frac{\Delta \rho}{\rho}\right)_{\max }=\max \text { of }\left( \pm 2 \frac{\Delta \mathrm{D}}{\mathrm{D}} \mp \frac{\Delta \mathrm{L}}{\mathrm{L}} \pm \frac{\Delta \mathrm{V}}{\mathrm{V}} \mp \frac{\Delta \mathrm{I}}{\mathrm{I}}\right)
\end{aligned}\)

⇒ \(\left(\frac{\Delta \rho}{\rho}\right)_{\max }=+2 \frac{\Delta \mathrm{D}}{\mathrm{D}}+\frac{\Delta \mathrm{L}}{\mathrm{L}}+\frac{\Delta \mathrm{V}}{\mathrm{V}}+\frac{\Delta \mathrm{I}}{\mathrm{I}}=\text { max. permissible error in } \rho \text {. }\)

Solved Examples

Example 63. In Ohm’s experiment, when a potential difference of 10.0 V is applied, the current measured is 1.00 A. If the length of the wire is found to be 10.0 cm, and the diameter of the wire is 2.50 mm, then the maximum permissible error in resistivity will be

  1. 1.8%
  2. 10.2%
  3. 3.8%
  4. 5.75%

Answer: \(\left(\frac{\Delta \rho}{\rho}\right)_{\max }=2\left(\frac{0.01}{2.50}\right)+\left(\frac{0.1}{10.0}\right)+\left(\frac{0.1}{10.0}\right)+\left(\frac{0.01}{1.00}\right)=3.8 \%\)

Question 64. If the % error in length, diameter, current, and voltage are the same then which of the following effects % error in measurement of resistivity, the most:

  1. Length Measurement
  2. Voltage Measurement
  3. Current Measurement
  4. Diameter Measurement

Answer: \(\left(\frac{\Delta \rho}{\rho}\right)_{\max }\)

Question 65. From some instruments, the current measured is I = 10.0 Amp., the potential difference measured is V = 100.0 V, the length of the wire is 31.4 cm, and the diameter of the wire is 2.00 mm (all in the correct significant figure). The resistivity of wire(in correct significant figure) will be – (use π = 3.14 )Ω

  1. 1.00×10-4 Ω-m
  2. 1.00×10-4 Ω-m
  3. 1.00×10-4 Ω-m
  4. 1.00×10-4 Ω-m

Answer: \(\rho=\frac{\pi D^2}{4 L} \frac{V}{I}=\frac{(3.14)\left(2.00 \times 10^{-3}\right)^2}{4(0.314)}\left(\frac{100.0}{10.0}\right)\)

Question 66. In the previous question, the maximum permissible error in resistivity and resistance measurement will be (respectively

  1. 2.14%
  2. 1.5%
  3. 1.5%,2.5%
  4. 2.41%,1.1%
  5. None Of These

Solution: \(\left(\frac{\Delta R}{R}\right)_{\max }=\frac{\Delta i}{i}+\frac{\Delta v}{v}=\frac{0.1}{10.0}+\frac{0.1}{100.0}=1.1 \%\)

⇒ \(\left(\frac{d \rho}{\rho}\right)_{\max }=2.42 \%\)

Experiment 8

Meter Bridge

The meter bridge is a simple case of Wheatstone-Bridge and is used to find the unknown Resistance. The unknown resistance is placed in place of R, and in place of S, a known resistance is used, u (Resistance Box).

There is a 1m long resistance wire between A and C. The jockey is moved along the wire. When R(100 – l) = S(l) then the Bridge will be balanced, and the galvanometer will give zero deflection. “l” can be measured by the meter scale.

The unknown resistance is \(R=S \frac{\ell}{100-\ell}\)

If the length of the unknown wire is L and the diameter of the wire is d, then the specific resistance of the wire

⇒ \(\rho=\frac{R\left(\frac{\pi d^2}{4}\right)}{L} \quad \text { from eq.(1) } \quad \rho=\frac{\pi d^2}{4 L}\left(\frac{(\ell)}{100-\ell}\right) S\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Meter bridge

Solved Examples

Example 67. If resistance S in RB = 300Ω, then the balanced length is found to be 25.0 cm from end A. The diameter of the unknown wire is 1mm and the length of the unknown wire is 31.4 cm. The specific resistivity of the wire should be

  1. 2.5 × 10–4 Ω-m
  2. 3.5 × 10–4 Ω-m
  3. 4.5 × 10–4 Ω-m
  4. None Of These

Solution: 1. 2.5 × 10–4 Ω-m

⇒ \(\frac{R}{300}=\frac{25}{75} \Rightarrow R=100 \Rightarrow \rho=\frac{R \pi d^2}{4 L}=2.5 \times 10^{-4} \Omega-m\)

Example 68. In the previous question. If R and S are interchanged, the balanced point is shifted by

  1. 30 cm
  2. 40 cm
  3. 50 cm
  4. None of these

Solution : If R and S wave interchanged , l= 75 , 100 – l = 25 Balance point will be shifted by 75 – 25 = 50 cm

Question 69. In a meter bridge, the null point is at l = 33.7 cm, when the resistance S is shunted by 12Ω resistance the null point is found to be shifted by a distance of 18.2 cm. The value of unknown resistance R should be

  1. 13.5 Ω
  2. 68.8Ω
  3. 3.42Ω
  4. None Of these

Solution: 2. 68.8Ω

⇒ \(\frac{R}{S}=\frac{33.7}{100-33.7} \Rightarrow \frac{R}{\left(\frac{12 \times S}{12+S}\right)}=\frac{(33.7+18.2)}{100-(33.7+18.2)}\) solving get R = 6.86Ω

End Corrections

In the meter Bridge circuit, some extra length comes (is found under metallic strips) at endpoints A and C. So some additional length (α and β) should be included at the ends for accurate results.

Hence in place of we use α + β and in place of 100 – l, we use 100 – l + α (where α and β are called end correction). To estimate α and β, we use known resistance R1 and R2 at the place of R and S in the meter Bridge.

Suppose we get a null point at l1 distance then

⇒ \(\frac{R_1}{R_2}=\frac{\ell_1+\alpha}{100-\ell_1+\beta}\)

Now we interchange the position of R1 and R2 and get a null point at l2 distance then

⇒ \(\frac{R_2}{R_1}=\frac{\ell_2+\alpha}{100-\ell_2+\beta}\)

Solving equation (1) and (2) get

⇒ \(\alpha=\frac{R_2 \ell_1-R_1 \ell_2}{R_1-R_2} \text { and } \beta=\frac{R_1 \ell_1-R_2 \ell_2}{R_1-R_2}-100\)

These end corrections (α and β) are used to modify the observations

Solved Examples

Example 70. If we used 100Ω and 200Ω resistance in place of R and S, we get null deflection at l1 = 33.0cm. If we interchange the Resistance, the null deflection was found to be at l2 = 67.0 cm. The end correction α and β should be:

  1. α = 1cm, β = 1cm
  2. α = 2cm, β = 1cm
  3. α = 1cm, β = 2cm
  4. None of these

Answer: \(\alpha=\frac{R_2 \ell_1-R_1 \ell_2}{R_1-R_2}=\frac{(200)(33)-(100)(67)}{100-200}=1 \mathrm{~cm}\)

Question 71. Now we start taking observations. At the position of R, unknown resistance is used, and at the position of S, 300Ω resistance is used. If the balanced length was found to be l = 26cm, estimate the unknown resistance.

  1. 108Ω
  2. 105.4Ω
  3. 100Ω
  4. 110Ω

Answer: \(\frac{\ell_{\text {eq }}}{(100-\ell)_{\text {e- }}}=\frac{R}{300}\)

⇒ \(\begin{aligned}
& \frac{R}{(300)}=\frac{26+1}{(100-26)+1}=\frac{27}{75} \\
& R=\frac{300 \times 27}{75}=108 \Omega .
\end{aligned}\)

Question 72. If the unknown Resistance calculated without using the end correction, is R1 and with using the end corrections is R 2 then (assume same end correction) (1) R1 > R2 when the balanced point is in the first half (2*) R1 < R2 when the balanced point is in first half (3*) R1 > R2 when the balanced point is in the second half(4) R1 > R2 always
Solution:

⇒ \(\mathrm{R}_1=\mathrm{S}\left(\frac{\ell}{100-\ell}\right), \quad \mathrm{R}_2=\mathrm{S}\left(\frac{\ell+\alpha}{100-\ell+\beta}\right)\)

If Balnce points in the first half says i= 40

⇒ \(R_1=S\left(\frac{40}{60}\right) \quad R_2=S\left(\frac{41}{61}\right) \quad \text { so } R_2>R_1\)

if the balance point is in the second half say I = 70

Solution: \(\mathrm{R}_1=\mathrm{S}\left(\frac{\ell}{100-\ell}\right), \quad \mathrm{R}_2=\mathrm{S}\left(\frac{\ell+\alpha}{100-\ell+\beta}\right)\)

if the balance point is in the first half say I= 40

⇒ \(R_1=S\left(\frac{40}{60}\right) \quad R_2=S\left(\frac{41}{61}\right) \quad \text { so } R_2>R_1\)

⇒ \(R_1=S\left(\frac{40}{60}\right) \quad R_2=S\left(\frac{41}{61}\right) \quad \text { so } R_2>R_1\)

If the Balance point is in the second half say i= 70

⇒ \(R_1=S\left(\frac{70}{30}\right) \quad R_2=S\left(\frac{71}{31}\right) \quad \text { so } R_2<R_1\)

Maximum Permissible Error in p:

The specific resistivity of wire, from meter bridge is \(\rho=\frac{\pi \mathrm{D}^{-S}}{4 \mathrm{~L}} \frac{\ell}{100-\ell}\)

Assume that known resistance in RB(S), and the total length of wire is precisely known, then let’s find the maximum permissible error due to an error in measurement of  (balance length) and D (diameter of wire).

⇒\(\ln \rho=\ln \left(\frac{\pi S}{4 L}\right)+2 \ln \mathrm{D}+\ln \ell-\ln (100-\ell) \quad \text { (assume there is no error in } \mathrm{S} \text { and } \mathrm{L} \text { ) }\)

⇒ \(\frac{\mathrm{d} \rho}{\rho}=2 \frac{\mathrm{dD}}{\mathrm{D}}+\frac{\mathrm{d} \ell}{\ell}-\frac{\mathrm{d}(100-\ell)}{(100-\ell)}=2 \frac{\mathrm{dD}}{\mathrm{D}}+\frac{\mathrm{d} \ell}{\ell}+\frac{\mathrm{d} \ell}{100-\ell}\)

⇒ \(\left(\frac{\Delta \rho}{\rho}\right)_{\max }=2 \frac{\Delta \mathrm{D}}{\mathrm{D}}+\frac{\Delta \ell}{\ell}+\frac{\Delta \ell}{100-\ell}\)

⇒ \(\left(\frac{\Delta \rho}{\rho}\right)_{\max } \text { due to error in } \ell \text { only is }=\frac{\Delta \ell}{\ell}+\frac{\Delta \ell}{100-\ell}=\frac{\Delta \ell(100)}{\ell(100-\ell)}\)

⇒ \(\left(\frac{\Delta \rho}{\rho}\right)_{\max } \text { will be least when } \ell(100-\ell) \text { is maximum, i.e. } \ell=50 \mathrm{~cm}\)

So % error in resistance (resistivity) will be minimal if the balance point is at the midpoint of the meter bridge wire.

Experiment 9

Post Office Box

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Post Office Box

In a wheat stone’s Bridge circuit \(\text { If } \frac{P}{Q}=\frac{R}{X}\) then the bridge is balanced. So unknown resistance \(X=\frac{Q}{P} R=\frac{R}{(P / Q)}\) To realize the wheat stone’s Bridge circuit, a pox office Box is described. Resistance P and Q are set in arms AB and BC where we can have 10Ω, 100 Ω, or 1000 Ω resistance to set any ratio \(\frac{P}{Q}.\)

These arms are called ratio arms. Initially, we take Q = 10Ω and P = 10Ω to set \(\frac{P}{Q}=1\) The unknown resistance (X) is connected between C and D, and the battery is connected across A and C (Just like wheat stone’s Bridge).

Now put Resistance in parts A to D such that the Bridge gets balanced. For this keep on increasing the resistance with 1Ω intervals, and check the deflection in the Galvanometer by first pressing key K1 key then the Galvanometer key K2.

Suppose at R = 4Ω, we get deflection toward left and at R = 5Ω, we get deflection toward right. So we can say that for bridge balance. R should be between 4 to 5.

Now x \(X=\frac{R}{(P / Q)}=\frac{R}{(10 / 10)}\) = R=4 to 5

So we can estimate that X should be between 4Ω and 5Ω.

To get closer to X, in the second observation, let’s choose \(\frac{P}{Q}=10 \text { e.i. }\left(\frac{P=100}{Q=10}\right) \text {. }\)

Suppose Now at R = 42. We are getting deflection toward the left, and at R = 43, deflection is toward the right. So Re (42,43).

Now, \(X=\frac{R}{(P / Q)}=\frac{R}{(100 / 10)}=\frac{1}{10} R \text { where } R \in(42,43)\)

So we can estimate that X e (4.2, 4.3). Now to get further closer, choose \(\frac{P}{Q}=100\) As we increase the \(\frac{P}{Q}\) ratio, R will be divided by a greater number, so the answer will be upto more decimal places so answer will be more accurate.

The Observation Table is shown below.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Resistance In The Ratio Arms

Solved Examples

Examples 73. If the length of the wire is (100.0 cm), and the radius of the wire, as measured from the screw gauge is (1.00 mm) then the specific resistance of the wire material is

  1. 13.35×10-6 Ω-m
  2. 13.4 × 10–6 Ω-m
  3. 13.352 × 10–6 Ω-m
  4. 16.5 × 10–6Ω-m

Solution: 2. 13.4 × 10–6 Ω-m

From observation table R = 4.25Ω

⇒ \(\rho=\frac{(R) \pi r^2}{\ell} \quad=\frac{4.25 \times 3.14 \times(1.00)^2 \times 10^{-6}}{\left(100.0 \times 10^{-2}\right)}\)

= 13.3×10-5Ω-m

Examples 74. Assertion: To locate null deflection, the battery key (K1) is pressed first and then the galvanometer key (K2). Reason: If first K 2 is pressed, and then as soon as K1 is pressed, the current suddenly tries to increase. so due to self-induction, a large stopping emf is generated in the galvanometer, which may damage the galvanometer.

  1. If both Assertion and Reason are true and the Reason is a correct explanation of Assertion.
  2. If both Assertion and Reason and true but Reason is not a correct explanation of
    Assertion.
  3. If Assertion is true but Reason is false.
  4. If both Assertion and Reason are false.

Answer: 1. If both Assertion and Reason are true and the Reason is a correct explanation of Assertion.

Example 75. What is the maximum and minimum possible resistance, which can be determined using the PO Box shown above figure-2

  1. 1111 kΩ, 0.1 Ω
  2. 1111 kΩ, 0.01Ω
  3. 1111 kΩ, 0.001Ω
  4. None of these

Answer: 2. 1111 kΩ , 0.01Ω

Solution: \(X=\frac{Q}{P} R \quad \Rightarrow \quad(X)_{\max }=\frac{(Q)_{\max }}{(P)_{\min }}(R)_{\max }=\frac{1000}{10}(11110)=1111 \mathrm{k} \Omega\)

\((X)_{\min }=\frac{(Q)_{\min }}{(P)_{\max }}(R)_{\min }=\frac{10}{1000} \frac{10}{1000}(1)=0.01 \Omega\)

Example 76. In a certain experiment, if \(\frac{Q}{P}=\frac{1}{10}\) if 192Ωif used we are getting deflection toward right, at 193 Ω, again toward right but at 194 Ω, deflection is toward left. the unknown resistance should lie between

  1. 19.2 to 19.3 Ω
  2. 139. to 19.4 Ω
  3. 19 to 20Ω
  4. 19.4 to 19.5Ω

Answer: 2. 139. to 19.4 Ω

Solution: \(X=\frac{Q}{P}(R) \frac{1}{10}=(193 \leftrightarrow 194)=19.3 \leftrightarrow 19.4\)

⇒ \(X=\frac{Q}{P}(R) \frac{1}{10}=(193 \leftrightarrow 194)=19.3 \leftrightarrow 19.4\)

Example 77. If By mistake, Battery is connected between B and C Galvanometer is connected across A and C then

  1. We cannot get a balanced point.
  2. The experiment will be less accurate
  3. Experiments can be done similarly.
  4. The experiment can be done similarly but now, K2 should be pressed first, then K1.

Answer: 4. Experiment can be done similarly but now, K2 should be pressed first, then K1.

Experiment 10

To Find the Focal Length Of A Concave Mirror Using the U-V Method

Principle: For different u, we measure different v, and find f using mirror’s formula \(\frac{1}{f}=\frac{1}{v}+\frac{1}{u}\)

In this experiment, a concave mirror is fixed at position MM’ and a knitting needle is used as an object, mounted in front of the concave mirror. This needle is called an object needle (O in Fig)

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments To Find the focal length of a concave mirror using U-V Method

First of all, we make a rough estimation of f. For estimating f roughly, make a sharp image of a faraway object (like the sun) on filter paper. The image distance of the far object will be an approximate estimation of focal length).

Now, the object needle is kept beyond f, so that its real and inverted image can be formed. You can see this inverted image in the mirror by closing one eye and keeping the other eye along the pole of the mirror.

To locate the position of the image, use a second needle, and shift this needle such that its peak coincides with the image. The second needle gives the distance of image (v), so it is called the “image needle”.

Note the object distance ‘u’ and image distance ‘v’ from the mm scale on the optical bench and find the focus distance from that Similarly take 4-5 more observations.

Determining ‘f’ from u – v observation:

Using Mirror Formula

Use mirror formula \(\frac{1}{f}=\frac{1}{v}+\frac{1}{u}\) to find the focal length from each u – v observation. Finally, take an average of all.

From \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{v}} \mathrm{v} / \mathrm{s} \frac{1}{\mathrm{u}}\)

⇒ \(\frac{1}{v}+\frac{1}{u}=\frac{1}{f} \Rightarrow \frac{1 / u}{1 / f}+\frac{1 / v}{1 / f}=1 \leftrightarrow \frac{x}{a}+\frac{y}{b}=1\)

So curve between \(\frac{1}{v} \mathrm{v} / \mathrm{s} \frac{1}{\mathrm{u}}\)
should be a straight line having x and y intercepts \(=\frac{1}{f} \text { and } \frac{1}{f}\) from the observations of u and v, plot \(\frac{1}{v} \text { v/s } \frac{1}{u}\) curve as a straight line, find the x and y intercepts and equate them to \(\frac{1}{f} \text { and } \frac{1}{f} \text {. }\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Determining F From U-V Observation

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Determining F From U-V Observation.,

From u – v curve:

The relation between u and v is

⇒ \(\frac{1}{v}+\frac{1}{u}=\frac{1}{f}\)

So curve between v v/s u is a rectangular hyperbola as shown in the figure. If we draw a line bisecting both the axis, i.e. line

u=v… 2

Graph of v vs. u for a Concave Mirror

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Graph of v vs. u for a Concave Mirror

Then their intersection points should be v = 2f, u = 2f (By solving equation (1) and equation (2)) from u – v data, plot v v/s u curve, and draw a line bisecting the axis. Find the intersection points and equate them to (2f, 2f).

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Graph of v vs. u for a Concave Mirror.

From the intersection of lines joining u n and vn:

Indicate u1, u2, u3 ……. un on x-axis, and v1, v2, v3 …….. vn on y-axis. If we join u 1 with v1, u2, u3 with v3 and …………… so on. All line intersects at a common point (f, f).

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Graph of v vs. u for a Concave Mirror.,

Explanation

Line joining u1 and v1 is

⇒ \(\begin{aligned}
& \frac{x}{u_1}+\frac{y}{v_1}=1 \\
& \frac{1}{u_1}+\frac{1}{v_1}=\frac{1}{f} \text { or } \frac{f}{u_1}+\frac{f}{v_1}=1
\end{aligned}\) ………(1)

Line joining u2 and v2 is

Where \(\begin{aligned}
& \frac{x}{u_2}+\frac{y}{v_2}=1 \\
& \frac{f}{u_2}+\frac{f}{v_2}=1
\end{aligned}\)

Similarly, line joining un and vn is

⇒ \(\begin{aligned}
& \frac{\mathrm{x}}{\mathrm{v}_{\mathrm{n}}}+\frac{\mathrm{y}}{\mathrm{u}_{\mathrm{n}}}=1 \\
& \frac{f}{u_n}+\frac{f}{v_n}=1
\end{aligned}\)

From equation (1’), (2’), (3’), we can say that x = f and y = f will satisfy all equations (1), (2), (3). So point (f, f) will be the common intersection point of all the lines.

From u – v data draw u 1, u2 …… un on the x-axis and v1, v1, …….. vn data on the y-axis. Join u 1 with v1, u2 with v2 …….. un with vn. Find a common intersection point and equate it to (f, f).

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Intersection Point And Equate It

Index Error

In the u – v method, we require the distance between the object or image from the pole (vertex) of the mirror (actual distance).

But practically we measure the distance between the indices A and B. (Observed distance), which need not exactly coincide with the object and pole, there can be a slight mismatch called index error, which will be constant for every observation.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Determanation Of Index Correction

Index error = Observed distance – Actual distance (Just like zero error in screw gauge, it is the excess reading).

To determine index error, the mirror and object needle are placed at arbitrary positions. For measuring actual distance, a knitting needle is just fitted between the pole of the mirror and object needle “O”.

The length of the knitting needle will give the actual object distance while the separation between indices A and B at that instant is the observed distance.

So index error is e = Observed distance – Actual distance = Separation between indices A and B – Length of knitting needle once we get e, in every observation, we get Actual distance = Observed distance (separation between the indices) – Excess reading (e) There is another term, Index correction which is inverse of index error. Index correction = – index error.

Class 12 NEET Physics Measurement Errors and Experiments Summary

Example 78. To find index error for u, when a knitting needle of length 20.0 cm is adjusted between pole and object needle, the separation between the indices of object needle and mirror was observed to be 20.2 cm. Index correction for u is –

  1. –0.2 cm
  2. 0.2 cm
  3. –0.1 cm
  4. 0.1 cm

Solution: (2) Index error (Excess reading) = Observed reading – Actual reading = 20.2 – 20.0 = 0.2 cm

Example 79. To find the index error for v, when the same knitting needle is adjusted between the pole and the image needle, the separation between the indices of the image needle and mirror was found to be 19.9 cm. The index error for v is

  1. 0.1 cm
  2. –0.1 cm
  3. 0.2 cm
  4. –0.2 cm

Solution : (2) e = 19.9 cm – 20.0 cm = –0.1 cm

Example 80. In some observations, the observed object distance (Separation between indices of object needle and mirror) is 30.2 cm, and the observed image distance is 19.9 cm. Using index correction from the previous two questions, estimate the focal length of the concave mirror!

Solution: u = 30.2 – 0.2 (excess reading)

= 30.0 cm.

v = 19.9 – (–0.1) (excess reading)

= 20.0 cm.

⇒ \(\frac{1}{f}=\frac{1}{v}+\frac{1}{u} \Rightarrow f=12.0 \mathrm{~cm} .\)

Maximum permissible error in f due to imperfect measurement of u & v:

In this experiment, from a set (u, v), focus distance f can be calculated from the equation.

⇒ \(\begin{aligned}
& \frac{1}{f}=\frac{1}{u}+\frac{1}{v} \Rightarrow \frac{d f}{f^2}=\frac{d u}{u^2}+\frac{d v}{v^2} \\
& \left(\frac{\Delta f}{f^2}\right)= \pm \frac{\Delta u}{u^2} \pm \frac{\Delta v}{v^2} \Rightarrow\left(\frac{\Delta f}{f^2}\right)_{\max }=+\frac{\Delta u}{u^2}+\frac{\Delta v}{v^2} \Rightarrow(\Delta f)_{\max }=\left(\frac{\Delta u}{u^2}+\frac{\Delta v}{v^2}\right) \times f^2
\end{aligned}\)

Solved Examples

Example 81. In the u – v method to find the focal length of a concave mirror, if the object distance was found to be 10.0 cm and the image distance was also found to be 10.0 cm then find a maximum permissible error in f, due to error in u and v measurement.
Solution: \(\frac{1}{u}+\frac{1}{v}=\frac{1}{f} \Rightarrow \quad \frac{1}{(-10)}+\frac{1}{(-10)}=\frac{1}{f} \Rightarrow|f|=5 \mathrm{~cm}\)

⇒ \((\Delta f)_{\max }=\left(\frac{\Delta u}{u^2}+\frac{\Delta v}{v^2}\right) \times f^2\) \((\Delta \mathrm{f})_{\max }=\left(\frac{0.1}{10^2}+\frac{0.1}{10^2}\right) \times 5^2=0.05 \mathrm{~cm}\)

So, f = (5 ± 0.05) cm

Experiment 11

To find the focal length of a convex lens using the u-v method.

Principle: For different u, we measure different v, and find f using lens’s formula \(\frac{1}{f}=\frac{1}{v}-\frac{1}{u}\)

Procedure: In this experiment, a convex lens is fixed at position L and a knitting needle is used as an object, mounted in front of the concave mirror. This needle is called object needle.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments To find focal length of a convex lens using u-v method.

First of all, we make a rough estimation of f. For estimating f roughly, make a sharp image of a faraway object (like the sun) on filter paper. The image distance of the far object will be an approximate estimation of focal length. Now, the object needle is kept beyond f, so that its real and inverted image (I in Fig) can be formed.

To locate the position of the image, use a second needle, and shift this needle such that its peak coincides with the image. The second needle gives the distance of image (v), so it is called the “image needle” (CD in figure). Note the object distance ‘u’ and image distance ‘v’ from the mm scale on an optical bench.

Similarly take 4-5 more observations.

Determining ‘f’ from u – v observation:

Using lens Formula:

Use lens formula \(\frac{1}{f}=\frac{1}{v}-\frac{1}{u}\) to find the focal length from each u – v observation. Finally, take an average of all.

For \(\frac{1}{v} v / s \frac{1}{u}\) curve:

⇒ \(\frac{1}{v}-\frac{1}{u}=\frac{1}{f} \Rightarrow \frac{1 / u}{-1 / f}+\frac{1 / v}{1 / f}=1 \leftrightarrow{ }^{\frac{x}{a}}+\frac{y}{b}=1\)

So curve between \(\frac{1}{v} \mathrm{v} / \mathrm{s} \frac{1}{u}\) should be a straight line having x and y intercepts \(=\frac{1}{f}-\frac{1}{f}\) and

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments To find focal length of a convex lens using u-v method..

Graph of \(\frac{1}{v} \text { vs. } \frac{1}{u}\) for a convex lens from the observations of u and v, plot \(\frac{1}{v} v / s \frac{1}{u}\) curve as a straight line, find the x and y intercepts and equate them to \(-\frac{1}{f} \text { and } \frac{1}{f} \text {. }\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments To find focal length of a convex lens using u-v method 3

From u – v curve:

Relation between u and v is \(\frac{1}{v}-\frac{1}{u}=\frac{1}{f}\)……(1)

Then their intersection points should be V = 2f, u = – 2f (By solving equation (1) and equation (2)) from u – v data, plot v v/s u curve, and draw a line y = -x. Find the intersection points and equate them to (-2f, 2f).

Graph of v vs. u for a Convex lens

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Graph of v vs. u for a Convex lens

From the intersection of lines joining u n and vn:

Indicate u1, u2, u3 ……. un on x-axis, and v1, v2, v3 …….. vn on y-axis. If we join u 1 with v1, u2 with v2, u3 with v3 and …………… so on. All line intersects at a common point (-f, f).

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments From intersection of lines joining u n and vn

From u – v data draw u1, u2 …… un on the x-axis and v1, v2, …….. vn data on the y-axis. Join u1 and v1, u2 with v2 …….. un and vn. Find a common intersection point and equate it to (-f, f)

Index error and max permissible error are similar to the concave mirror.

Experiment 12

Object: To study the dissipation of energy of a simple pendulum by plotting a graph between the square of amplitude and time.

Apparatus: Ticker timer, paper tape, meter scale, thread, clamp, metallic brick as bob, clamps, split cork, and a spring balance.

Principle: The energy of a simple harmonic oscillator is directly proportional to its amplitude. When the bob of a simple pendulum is set into vibrations, its amplitude goes on decreasing with time due to friction of air and friction at the point of support.

Such vibrations whose amplitude decreases with time due to some dissipative force are called damped vibrations. The vibrations of a simple pendulum are also damped. At any time t the energy Et = E. e–λt, where λ is the decay constant and energy E is given by E =1/2 KA2 where A is the amplitude and K is force constant.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments The energy of a simple harmonic oscillator

Method

  1. Find the mass of the metallic brick by the spring balance.
  2. Fix the clamp stand on the edge of the table with the help of clamps.
  3. One end of the thread with the metallic brick and pass the other end of the thread through the split cork hold the cork in the clamp stand.
  4. Fix the ticker timer at the same height above the ground on the brick is attach the paper tape at the center of the brick with the help of the cello tape.
  5. Full the brick towards the ticker timer and take the paper tape. Start the ticker timer and release the brick.
  6. As the brick reaches the outer extreme switch off the ticker timer.
  7. Remove the paper tape. The pattern of dots obtained on the tape will be as shown below.
  8. Mark the central dot A and the extreme dots B and C corresponding to the extreme positions of the metallic brick.
  9. Measure the distance of the dots from the central dot A

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments The pattern of dots obtained on the tape

Observations:

  1. Least count of spring balance = …………. kg
  2. Corrected mass of the metallic block = m = …………. kg
  3. Period of ticker-timer (one tick) = ………….. sec
  4. Length of simple pendulum, = L = …………… m

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Side from dot

Graph

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Graph

From the graph, it is clear that Energy (Amp)2 and the energy of the pendulum decrease with time.

Precaution

  1. An inextensible string thread should be used for making the pendulum.
  2. The lower faces of the split cork should lie in the same horizontal plane.
  3. The amplitude of oscillation should be kept small.
  4. The experiment should be performed at a place which is free from any air disturbance.
  5. The metallic brick should be suspended close to the ground.
  6. The metallic brick should move along the reference line without any jerky motion.

Result

The sum of the kinetic energy and potential energy of the bob (metallic block) of the simple pendulum is constant within the limits of the experimental error. This shows that the energy is being transferred from kinetic to potential and vice versa. From the above graph, it is proved that there is dissipation of energy during SHM of a simple pendulum.

Precaution

  1. Pendulum support should be rigid
  2. The amplitude should remain small.
  3. The pendulum should be sufficiently long (about 2 meters).
  4. Pulling string should be used to avoid spinning the metallic block
  5. Paper tape should be attached to the center of the bottom of the block.

Source of Error

  1. The support may not be fully rigid.
  2. Movement of metallic block may not be proper

Experiment 13

Object: To determine the mass of a given body using a meter scale by the principle of moments

Apparatus: A meter scale, a broad heavy wedge with a sharp edge, a weight box, a body of unknown mass

Principle

Meter scale as a beam balance: –

Introduction: Like a physical balance, a meter scale can be used as a beam balance making use of the same principle of moments. Besides it has an adjustable power arm and weight arm about the fulcrum whose length can be adjusted.

Diagram:

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Metre-scale balance

Construction (Arrangement): The meter scale is balanced by putting its 50 cm mark over the sharp edge of a heavy broad wedge works as a fulcrum. In this position, the weight of the meter scale and the reaction of the wedge, balance each other.

Working: The body is tied to a strong and light thread loop and suspended on the left of the wedge on some fixed mark. (Say 20 cm in diagram)

A light paper pan is suspended by a strong and light thread on the right. Weights are put on the pan. The position of the loop of the pan and weight in it are so adjusted that the meter scale becomes horizontal again. The position of the thread of the loops and the amount of weights in the pan are noted.

The mass of the body is calculated using the following theory.

Theory: If m and M are the mass of the body and mass of the weight used and a1 and a2 are the distance of their loops from the wedge. Then, power (mass) arm = a1, weight arm = a2 or \(m=\frac{M a_2}{a_1}\)

Two different methods:

Arm lengths are fixed and equal and weight is adjustable.

The thread loops are suspended at position forming both arms of equal length. Weight in the paper pan is adjusted till the meter scale becomes horizontal. (figure (a)) In this case a1 = a2 = a Hence, mga1 = Mga2 or m=M

A physical balance makes use of this method.

Masses and power arm fixed and weight arm adjustable.

Mass is suspended at a fixed distance a1.

The length of the power arm is adjusted by moving the weight loop thread in and out till the meter scale becomes horizontal

In this case a

1 = a1, a2 =A

Hence mga1 = Mga2, becomes mg a= MgA Or \mathrm{m}=\mathrm{M} \frac{\mathrm{A}}{\mathrm{a}}\(\)

Procedure

First method

  1. Arrange the meter scale horizontally by supporting it at the sharp edge of the broad heavy wedge at the 50 cm mark.
  2. Suspend the body of unknown mass by a loop thread at a fixed mark on the left of the wedge.
  3. Suspended paper pan at the same distance on the right of the wedge with some weights in it.
  4. Adjust the weights in a paper pan till the meter scale becomes horizontal.
  5. Note the mass of the weights in the pan.
  6. Repeat steps 2 to 5, three times by increasing the length of the arms in equal steps keeping the lengths equal.
  7. Record the observations as given below in a table.

Observation And Calculations

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Length of weight (or power) arm a cm

Note: Observations are as sample

Mean mass, \(\mathrm{m}=\frac{\mathrm{m}_1+\mathrm{m}_2+\mathrm{m}_3}{3} \mathrm{~g}=\ldots . . \mathrm{g}\)

It will be found that M1 = M2 = M3 = m in all cases.

Result

The unknown mass of the body, m = 20 g

Second method

  1. 1,2. Steps 1 and 2 of the first method.
  2. Suspend the paper pan on the right of the wedge with some known weight in it.
  3. Adjust the distance of the paper pan till the meter scale becomes horizontal.
  4. Note the position of the paper pan and thus length of the weight arm.
  5. Repeat steps 2 to 5, three times by increasing the mass of the weights by an equal amount.
  6. Record the observations as given below in the table.

Observation And Calculations

Fixed length of power arm = a= 25 cm

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Mass of weight in the paper pan

(Note: Observations are as sample)

Mean mass, \(\mathrm{m}=\frac{\mathrm{m}_1+\mathrm{m}_2+\mathrm{m}_3}{3} \mathrm{~g}=\ldots . \mathrm{g}\)

It will be found that \(\mathrm{m}_1=\mathrm{m}_2=\mathrm{m}_3=\mathrm{m} \text { in all cases. }\)

Result

The unknown mass of the body, m = 24 g

Precautions:

  1. The wedge should be broad and heavy with a sharp edge.
  2. The meter scale should have uniform mass distribution.
  3. Threads used for loops should be thin, light, and strong.

Sources Of Error

  1. The wedge may not be sharp.
  2. The meter scale may have faulty calibration.
  3. The threads used for loops may be thick and heavy.

NEET Physics Chapter 2 Notes: Measurement Errors and Experiments

Experiment 14

Aim

To determine the surface tension of water by capillary rise method.

Apparatus

Three capillary tubes of different radii and a tipped pointer clamped in a metallic plate with a handle, traveling microscope, clamp and stand, a fine motion adjustable height stand, a flat bottom open dish, clean water in a beaker, and thermometer.

Theory

Rise of liquid level in a capillary tube (Ascent formula):

Let a capillary tube be dipped in a liquid which makes a concave meniscus in the tube. Due to surface tension, the tube molecules exert a force T on the liquid molecules in the unit length of the circle of contact of the liquid surface with the tube. This force acts at an angleθ (angle of contact) with the wall of the vessel.

Components T sinθ perpendicular to the wall of the tube cancel for the whole circle. Component T cosθ along the wall of the tube on all molecules becomes 2πrT cosθ. It is this upward force that pulls the liquid upward in the capillary tube.

The liquid rises in the capillary tube upto a height till the weight of the liquid rises equals this force. Let the liquid rise upto a height of h (as measured for the lower meniscus B) and let the meniscus ABC have a hemispherical shape.

The volume of liquid in the meniscus above B. Then, the volume of the liquid rises upto the lower meniscus = πr²h. The volume of a cylinder of radius and height r – Volume of hemisphere of radius r.

⇒ \(=\pi r^2 \cdot r-\frac{2}{3} \pi r^3=\frac{1}{3} \pi r^3\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Volume of cylinder of radius and height

Total volume of the liquid risen \(=\pi r^2 h+\frac{1}{3} \pi r^3=\pi r^2\left[h+\frac{r}{3}\right]\)

If liquid has a density p, then mass of liquid risen \(=\pi r^2=\left[h+\frac{r}{3}\right] \rho\) and weight of the liquid risen \(=\pi r^2\left[h+\frac{r}{3}\right] \rho g\) and weight of the liquid risen \(=\pi r^2\left[h+\frac{r}{3}\right] \rho g\) and weight of the liquid risen \(=\pi r^2\left[h+\frac{r}{3}\right] \rho g\) For Equilibrium ‘

⇒ \(\pi r^2\left[h+\frac{r}{3}\right] \rho g=2 \pi r T \cos \theta \quad \text { or } \quad h=\frac{2 T \cos \theta}{r \rho g}-\frac{r}{3}\)

[From above we find that \(h \propto \frac{1}{r},\) liquid rises more in a capillary tube of small radius] Also, \(\mathrm{T}=\frac{(\mathrm{h}+\mathrm{r} / 3) \mathrm{r} \rho \mathrm{g}}{2 \cos \theta}\) Measuring height h of liquid risen in capillary tube and knowing other quantities, surface tension of
liquid (T), can be calculated.

[In practice, r/3 is neglected as compared to h, then \(\mathrm{T}=\frac{\mathrm{hr} \rho \mathrm{g}}{2 \cos \theta}\) ]

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Travelling microscope
A traveling microscope is a device that is used for the accurate measurement of very small distances. It is a compound microscope fixed on a strong metallic horizontal platform that can be balanced with the help of leveling screws L and L’.

The compound microscope can slide or travel both along horizontal and vertical levels. Due to the horizontal or vertical traveling of the microscope, we have named it as a traveling microscope.

The compound microscope consists of two convex lenses called objective O which is placed close to the object and eye-piece E placed near the eye of an observer. Objective O is a simple convex lens small aperture and a small focal length.

These two lenses are placed in two distinct tubes placed coaxially. To focus object the tubes can be moved by using a rack and pinion arrangement R. The microscope has a crosswire in front of the eye-piece which serves as a reference mark. The object to be seen is placed in front of the objective and the image is viewed through the eyepiece. The image formed is virtual, magnified, and inverted.

The distance through which the microscope moves can be read with the help of a vernier scale (V) moves with the microscope along with the scale engraved on the framework. The horizontal movement of the microscope is done with the help of screw P. and the vertical movement of the microscope is done with the help of screw Q whereas the horizontal and vertical shifting for the fine adjustment microscope can be done with the help of fine screws P’ and Q’.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Measurement of surface tension by capillary rise method

Setting the apparatus

  1. Place the adjustable height stand on the table and make its base horizontal by leveling screws.
  2. Take dirt and grease-free water in an open dish with a flat bottom and put it on the top of the stand.
  3. Take three capillary tubes of different radii (ranging from 0.05 mm to 0.15 mm)
  4. Clean and dry them, and clamp the capillary tubes in a metallic plate in order of increasing radius.
  5. Also, clamp a pointer after the third capillary tube.
  6. Clamp the horizontal handle of the metallic plate in a vertical stand, so the capillary tubes and the pointer become vertical.
  7. Adjust the height of the metallic plate so that the capillary tubes dip in water in an open dish.
  8. Adjust the position of the pointer, such that its tip just touches the water surface.

Measurement of capillary rise

  1. Find the least count of the traveling microscope for the horizontal and the vertical scale.
  2. Record the same in the notebook.
  3. Raise the microscope to a suitable height, keeping its axis horizontal and pointing towards the capillary tubes.
  4. Bring the microscope in front of the first capillary tube (which has maximum rise).
  5. Make the horizontal cross wire just touch the central part of the concave meniscus (seen convex through a microscope.
  6. Note the reading of the position of the microscope on the vertical scale.
  7. Now move the microscope horizontally and bring it in front of the second capillary tube.
  8. Lower the microscope and repeat steps 11 and 12.
  9. Repeat steps 13 and 14 for the third capillary tube.
  10. Lower the stand so that the pointer tip becomes visible.
  11. Move the microscope horizontally and bring it in front of the pointer.
  12. Lower the microscope and make the horizontal cross-wire touch the tip of the pointer. Repeat step 12.
  13. Measurement of the internal diameter of the capillary tube.
  14. Place the first capillary tube horizontally on the adjustable stand.
  15. Focus the microscope on the end dipped in water. A white circle (inner bore) surrounded by a green circular strip (glass cross-section) will be seen.
  16. Make horizontal cross-wire touch the inner circle at A. Note microscope reading on vertical
    scale.
  17. Raise the microscope to make the horizontal cross-wire touch the circle at B. Note the reading (the difference gives the vertical internal diameter AB of the capillary tube).
  18. Move the microscope on a horizontal scale and make the vertical cross wire touch the inner circle at C. Note the microscope reading on the horizontal scale.
  19. Move the microscope to the right to make the vertical cross-wire touch the circle at D. Note the reading (the difference gives the horizontal diameter CD of the capillary tube).
  20. Repeat steps 19 to 24 for the other two capillary tubes.
  21. Note the temperature of the water in the dish.
  22. Record your observations as given below.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Measurement of the internal diameter of the capillary tube.

 

Table for the height of liquid rise

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Table for height of liquid rise

Table for internal diameter of the capillary tube

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Table for internal diameter of the capillary tube

  • The temperature of the water, (t) = …….. ºC
  • Density of water at observed temperature, p = …….. (g cm–3)
  • The angle of contact of water in a glass, θ = 8º
  • i.e., cos θ = 0.99027 taken as 1.

Calculations

From formula, \(\mathrm{T}=\frac{\mathrm{r}(\mathrm{h}+\mathrm{r} / 3) \rho g}{2 \cos \theta}\).

Put values of h (column 4-first table) and r (column 4-second table) for each capillary tube separately and find the value of T (in dynes cm –1).

Find Mean VAlue, \(T=\frac{T_1+T_2+T_3}{3}=\ldots . . . \text { dynes } \mathrm{cm}^{-1}\)

Result

The surface tension of water at tºc = …….dynes cm –1.

Precautions

  1. The capillary tube and water should be free from grease.
  2. The capillary tube should be set vertically.
  3. The microscope should be moved in a lower direction only to avoid backlash errors.
  4. The internal diameter of the capillary tube should be measured in two mutually perpendicular directions.
  5. The temperature of the water should be noted.

Sources Of Error:

Water and capillary tubes may not be free from grease.

Experiment 14

Aim: To study the effect of the detergent on surface tension by observing capillary rise.

Apparatus

Three capillary tubes of different radii and a tipped pointer clamped in a metallic plate with a handle, traveling microscope, clamp and stand, a fine motion adjustable height stand, a flat bottom open dish, clean water in a beaker, and thermometer.

Theory

A detergent when added to distilled water reduces the surface tension of water. If we use the same capillary tube to study the rise of pure distilled water and then the rise of detergent mixed water (solution), we shall find that the rise will be lesser in case of solution. If the quantity of detergent (solution concentration) is increased, the rise will be still lesser.

Procedure

  1. Set the apparatus as in the previous Experiment.
  2. Find the rise of pure distilled (grease-free) water through the capillary tube following all the steps of the previous Experiment.
  3. Take a known volume of distilled water from the same sample.
  4. Dissolve a small known mass of a detergent in the water to make a dilute solution.
  5. Find the rise of the solution in the same capillary tube. The rise will be less than that for pure water.
  6. Add double the mass of detergent in the same volume of water to have a solution with double concentration.
  7. Find the rise of this concentrated solution in the same capillary tube. The rise will be still lesser.
  8. Repeat with the solution of the same detergent having increased concentration. The rise will decrease as concentration increases.

[Note: Do not make the solution too concentrated to affect density] Observation The rise in capillary tube decreases with the addition of detergent in pure water with more addition of detergent, the rise becomes lesser and lesser.

Result

  1. The detergent reduces the surface tension of water.
  2. The capillary tube and water should be free from grease.
  3. Capillary tube should be set vertically.
  4. The microscope should be moved in a lower direction only to avoid backlash errors.
  5. The internal diameter of the capillary tube should be measured in two mutually perpendicular directions.
  6. The temperature of the water should be noted.

Sources of Error

Water and capillary tubes may not be free from grease.

Experiment 15

AIM: To determine the coefficient of viscosity of a given viscous liquid by measuring the terminal velocity of a given spherical body.

Apparatus: A half-meter high, 5 cm broad glass cylindrical jar with millimeter graduations along its height, transparent viscous liquid, one steel ball, screw gauge, stop clock/watch, thermometer, and clamp withstand.

Theory:

Terminal velocity :

Definition: The maximum velocity acquired by the body, falling freely in a viscous medium, is called terminal velocity.

Expression: Considering a small sphere of radius r of density p falling freely in a viscous medium (liquid) of density p. The forces acting on it are :

The weight of the sphere acting downward \(=\frac{4}{3} \pi r^3 \rho g\)

The effective downward force, \(\mathrm{mg}=\frac{4}{3} \pi r^3 \rho \mathrm{g}-\frac{4}{3} \pi \mathrm{r}^3 \sigma \mathrm{g}=\frac{4}{3} \pi r^3(\rho-\sigma) \mathrm{g}\)

The upward force of viscosity, F = 6pipinrv

When the downward force is balanced by the upward force of viscosity, the body falls with a constant velocity, called terminal velocity. Hence, with terminal velocity,

⇒ \(6 \pi \eta r v=\frac{4}{3} \pi r^3(\rho-\sigma) g\) or terminal velocity

This is the required expression.

Terminal velocity \(=\frac{2}{9} \frac{r^2(\rho-\sigma) g}{\eta} \quad \text { or } \quad \eta=\frac{2}{9} \frac{r^2(\rho-\sigma) g}{v}\)

knowing r, p, and e, and measuring v, n can be calculated.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Terminal velocity

Procedure:

  1. Clean the glass jar and fill it with the viscous liquid, which must be transparent.
  2. Check that the vertical scale along the height of the jar is visible. Note it’s the least count.
  3. Test the stop clock/watch for its tight spring. Find its least count and zero error (if any)
  4. Find and note the least count and zero error of the screw gauge.
  1. Determine the mean radius of the ball.
  2. Drop the ball gently in the liquid. It falls into the liquid with accelerated velocity for about one-third of the height. Then it falls with uniform terminal velocity.
  3. Start the stop clock/watch when the ball reaches some convenient division (20 cm, 25 cm,…..).
  4. Stop the stop clock/watch just when the ball reaches the lowest convenient division (45 cm).
  5. Find and note the distance fallen and the time taken by the ball.
  6. Repeat steps 6 to 9 two times more.
  7. Note and record the temperature of the liquid.
  8. Record your observations as given ahead.

Observations:

Least count of vertical scale =…….mm.

Least count of stop clock/watch =…….s.

Zero error of stop clock/watch =…….s.

Pitch of the screw (p) = 1 mm.

Number of divisions on the circular scale = 100

Least count of screw gauge (L.C.) \(=\frac{1}{100}=0.01 \mathrm{~mm}\)

Zero error of screw gauge (e) =……mm.

Zero correction of screw gauge (C) (– e) =…….mm

Diameter of spherical ball

  1. Along one direction, D1 = ……..mm
  2. In the perpendicular direction, D2 = ……..mm

Terminal velocity of spherical ball

  1. Distance fallen S = …..mm
  2. Time taken, t1 = …..s
  3. t2 = …..s
  4. t3 = …..s

Calculations

Mean Diameter \(D=\frac{D_1+D_2}{2} \mathrm{~mm}\)

Mean radius \(\mathrm{r}=\frac{\mathrm{D}}{2} \mathrm{~mm} \quad=\ldots \ldots \ldots \mathrm{cm}\)

Mean Time \(\mathrm{t}=\frac{\mathrm{t}_1+\mathrm{t}_2+\mathrm{t}_3}{3}=\ldots . . \mathrm{s}\)

Mean Terminal Velocity \(v=\frac{S}{t} \quad=\mathrm{cm} \mathrm{s}^{-1}\)

From formula, \(\eta=\frac{2 r^2(\rho-\sigma) g}{9 v} \text { C.G.S. units. }\)

Result

The coefficient of viscosity of the liquid at temperature (θºC) = …..C.G.S. units

Precautions

  1. Liquid should be transparent to watch the motion of the ball.
  2. Balls should be perfectly spherical.
  3. Velocity should be noted only when it becomes constant.

Sources Of Error

  1. The liquid may have a uniform density.
  2. The balls may not be perfectly spherical.
  3. The noted velocity may not be constant

Experiment 16

AIM: To study the relationship between the temperature of a hot body and time by plotting a cooling curve.

Apparatus

Newton’s law of cooling apparatus (a thin-walled copper calorimeter suspended in a double-walled enclosure) two thermometers, clamp and stand, stop clock/watch.

Theory:

Newton was the first person to investigate the heat lost by a body in the air. He found that the rate of loss of heat is proportional to the excess temperature over the surroundings. This result, called Newton’s law of cooling, is approximately true in still air only for a temperature excess of 20 K or 30 K. Consider a hot body at a temperature T placed in surroundings at temperature T0.

Rate of loss loss of heat \(=-\frac{\mathrm{dQ}}{\mathrm{dt}}\)

Using Newton’s law of cooling \(-\frac{\mathrm{dQ}}{\mathrm{dt}} \propto\left(\mathrm{T}-\mathrm{T}_0\right)\) or \(\frac{d Q}{d t}=-k\left(T-T_0\right)\) where k is constant of proportionality whose value depends upon the area and nature of surface of the body. If the temperature of the body falls by a small amount of dT in time dt, then DQ= mcdT

where m is the mass of the body and c is the specific heat of the material of the body.

Now, \(\mathrm{mc} \frac{\mathrm{dT}}{\mathrm{dt}}=-\mathrm{k}\left(\mathrm{T}-\mathrm{T}_0\right)\)

Or, \(\frac{\mathrm{dT}}{\mathrm{dt}}=-\frac{\mathrm{k}}{\mathrm{mc}}\left(\mathrm{T}-\mathrm{T}_0\right)\) [ he re \(\mathrm{K}=\frac{\mathrm{k}}{\mathrm{mc}}\) =constant]

Again \(\frac{d T}{T-T_0}=-K d t\)

Integrating \(\int \frac{1}{\mathrm{~T}-\mathrm{T}_0} \mathrm{dT}=-\mathrm{K} \int \mathrm{dt}\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments The Relationship Between The Temperature Of A Hot Body

This is the equation of a straight line having a negative slope (– K) and intercept C on the Y-axis, The Figure shows the graph of loge (T – T0) versus time t. While t has been treated as the x-variable, loge (T – T0) has been treated as the y-variable.

If Tm is the maximum temperature of a hot body, then at t = 0 from equation

⇒ \(\begin{aligned}
& \log \left(T_m-T_0\right)=C \\
& \log \left(T-T_0\right)-\log \left(T_m-T_0\right)=-k t \\
& \log \left(\frac{T-T_0}{T_m-T_0}\right)=-k t \quad \Rightarrow \quad \frac{T-T_0}{T_m-T_0}=e^{-k t}
\end{aligned}\)

So, \(\left(T-T_0\right)=\left(T_m-T_0\right) e^{-k t}\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments The Relationship Between The Temperature Of A Hot Body.

Procedure

  1. Fill the space between the double wall of the enclosure with water and put the enclosure on a laboratory table.
  2. Fill the calorimeter two-thirds with water heated to about 80ºC.
  3. Suspend the calorimeter inside the enclosure along with a stirrer in it. Cover it with a wooden lid having a hole in its middle.
  4. Suspend from clamp and stand, one thermometer in enclosure water and the other in calorimeter water.
  5. Note the least count of the thermometers.
  6. Set the stop clock/watch at zero and note its least count.
  7. Note the temperature (T0) of water in the enclosure.
  8. Start stirring the water in the calorimeter to make it cool uniformly.
  9. Just when the calorimeter water has some convenient temperature reading (say 70ºC), note it and start the stop clock/watch.
  10. Continue stirring and note the temperature after every 5 minutes. The temperature falls quickly in the beginning.
  11. Note enclosure water temperature after every five minutes.
  12. When the fall of temperature becomes slow note the temperature at intervals of two minutes for 10 minutes and then at intervals of 5 minutes.
  13. Stop when the fall of temperature becomes very slow.
  14. Record your observations as given ahead

Observations

  • Least count of enclosure water thermometer = …………ºC
  • Least count of calorimeter water thermometer = …………ºC
  • Least count of stop clock/watch = …………s.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Table for time and temperature

Calculations

  1. The temperature of water in the enclosure will be found to remain the same. If not then take its mean as T0.
  2. Find the temperature difference (T – T0) and record it in column 5 of the table.
  3. Plot a graph between time t (column 2) and temperature T (column 3), taking t along the X-axis and T along the Y-axis. The graph is shown in the given figure. It is called the cooling curve’ of the liquid.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 2 Study Material: Errors and Experiments

The graph between time and temperature (Cooling curve)

Scale:

  • X-axis: 1 cm = 5 minutes of t
  • Y – axis: 1 cm = 5º C of T

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Cooling Curve

Result

The temperature falls quickly in the beginning and then slowly as the difference in temperature goes on decreasing. This is in agreement with Newton’s law of cooling.

Precautions

The double-walled enclosure should be used to maintain the surroundings at a constant temperature.

Stirring should remain continuous for uniform cooling

  1. Sources Of Errors Surrounding temperature may change.
  2. The stirring of hot liquid may not be continuous.

Experiment 17

AIM: To determine the specific heat of a given solid (lead shots) by method of mixtures.

Apparatus

Solid (lead shots), copper calorimeter with a copper stirrer and lid, calorimeter jacket (a wooden box with a coating of insulating material inside), hypsometer, heating arrangement tripod, burner, and wire gauze or a hot plate, two Celsius thermometers graduated in 0.2ºC. Water and a physical balance, weight box, and milligram fractional weights.

Theory

The law of mixtures states that when two substances at different temperatures are mixed, i.e., brought in thermal contact with each other, then the heat is exchanged between them, the substance at a higher temperature loses heat, and that at a lower temperature gains heat. The exchange of heat energy continues till both substances attain a common temperature called equilibrium temperature.

The amount of heat energy lost by the hotter body is equal to the amount of heat energy gained by the colder body, provided

No heat is lost to the surroundings and The substances mixed do not react chemically to produce or absorb heat.

In brief, the law mixtures is written as: On mixing of two substances at different temperatures, if no heat is lost to surroundings; at the equilibrium temperature, Heat gained = Heat lost For a body of mass m, and specific heats, when its temperature falls by Δ, the amount of heat lost by it is given as ΔQ = m.s Δ The same formula is used for the amount of heat gained by colder body where Δ0, would be the temperature rise.

Specific Heat

Specific heat of a substance is the amount of heat required to raise the temperature of the unit mass of the substance through one degree Celsius. S.I. unit of specific heat is J kg –1 K–1. A convenient measure of mass in the lab is gram and temperature is ºC. so we express specific heat as J g –1 ºC–1.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Specific heat of a substance is the amount of heat

Procedure

  1. To ensure that two thermometers read the temperature of a body the same, one is compared with the other one which is taken as the standard thermometer. Mark the thermometer used for measuring the temperature of water in the calorimeter at room temperature as TA and the other used in the hypsometer as TB.
  2. Suspend them side by side from a clamp stand and note their readings. The error in the temperature measured by thermometer B is e = TB = TA The correction is (– e).
  3. The correction (– e) is algebraically added to readings of temperature recorded by thermometer T B used hypsometer.
  4. Take about 100 grams of lead shots in the tube of the hypsometer and add a sufficient quantity of water to the hypsometer.
  5. Insert the thermometer marked T
  6. B in the tube such that its bulb is surrounded by lead shots and fix the tube inside the mouth of the hypsometer.
  7. Place the hypsometer on the wire gauze placed on the tripod and start heating it using the burner.

Note: Alternatively, the hot plate may be used in place of the tripod and burner arrangement.

Measuring Masses:

  1. Ensure that the physical balance is in proper working condition and on turning the knob, the pointer moves equal divisions on the left and right sides of the zero mark of the scale provided at the back of the pointer.
  2. Check that the calorimeter is clean and dry. Use a piece of cloth to rub it and shine its surface. Weigh the calorimeter along with the stirrer, note the reading as m c.
  3. Weigh the calorimeter with a stirrer and lid. Record it as m 1.
  4. Place a few pieces of ice in a beaker containing water such that its temperature becomes 5 to 7ºC below the room temperature. Fill 2/3 of the calorimeter with cold water from the beaker and ensure that no moisture from air should condense on the surface of the calorimeter, clean the surface if at all the drops appear.
  5. Weigh the calorimeter with a stirrer, lid, and water in it.
  6. Place the calorimeter in the jacket. Insert the thermometer labeled as A through the lid cover of a calorimeter and hold it in a clamp provided on the jacket such that the bulb of the thermometer is well immersed in water but does not touch the bottom of the calorimeter.
  7. Note and record the temperature of water in the calorimeter.
  8. Observe the temperature of the solid in a hypsometer at intervals of two minutes till the temperature becomes steady. After the temperature becomes steady for about 5 minutes, record it
  9. Apply the correction (–e) to it and write the corrected temperature of the solid.
  10. Note the temperature of cold water in the calorimeter once again. This is to be taken as the reading for calculations. Immediately after this, remove the cork along with the thermometer from the copper tube of the hypsometer. Take out the tube, raise the lid of a calorimeter, and transfer the hot solid quickly to water in the calorimeter without any splash of water.
  11. Stir the water in the calorimeter till the temperature of the mixture becomes steady. Note the equilibrium temperature reached by the hot solid and the cold water in the calorimeter.
  12. Gently take the thermometer out of the water in the calorimeter. Take care that no water drops come out of the calorimeter along with the thermometer.
  13. Take out the calorimeter from the jacket and weigh the calorimeter with stirrer, lid water, and solid in it. Record it as m3.

Observations:

  • Room temperature reading by thermometer A, TA = ……………ºC
  • Room temperature reading by thermometer B, TB = ……………ºC
  • Correction required for thermometer B, e = TA – TB
  • Mass of calorimeter + stirrer, m = ……………g
  • Specific heat of the material of calorimeter, copper from tables, sc = 0.4 J/g/ºC,
    Specific heat of water sw = 4.2 J/g/ºC
  • Water equivalent of calorimeter, W = m1 (sC/sW) when s
  • W for water is taken as 1 cal/g/ºC
  • W = m × s 0.4 1 otherwise write W as W = m \(\left(\frac{0.4}{4.2}\right) \mathrm{g}\)
  • Mass of calorimeter + stirrer + lid = m1 = ………g
  • Mass of calorimeter + lid + cold water = m2 = ………g
  • The temperature of cold water in the calorimeter, θ1 = ………ºC
  • Steady temperature of solid in hypsometer by thermometer B, θ2= ………ºC
  • Corrected temperature of solid, θ2, θ2 = θ2+ (– e) ………ºC
  • Final, i.e., equilibrium temperature of the mixture θe= ………ºC
  • Mass of calorimeter + stirrer + lid + water + solid m3=……………g

Calculation:

  1. Let the specific heat of the solid be S J/g/ºC
    • Mass of clod water in calorimeter, m w = m 2 – m1 = ……….g
    • Water equivalent of calorimeter + stirrer, \(\mathrm{W}=\mathrm{m} \times \frac{\mathrm{s}_{\mathrm{c}}}{\mathrm{s}_{\mathrm{w}}}\)
    • Rise in temperature of cold water and calorimeter and stirrer, θe – θ1 = ……….ºC Amount of heat gained by cold water and calorimeter = (m w+ W) × sw × (θe – θ1) = ……J ..(1)
    • where specific heat of water = sw=4.2j/g/C
  2. Mass of solid added to cold water, ms = m3 – m2 = ………..g
    • Rise in temperature of solid, θ2 – θe = ………ºC
    • Assumed value of specific heat of solid, s = ………….J/g/ºC
    • Heat lost by hot solid = mass × sp. heat × fall of temperature = (m3 – m2) s (θ2 – θe) ..(2)
    • Applying the law of mixtures, keeping in view the conditions,
    • Heat lost = Heat gained

Equating (2) and (1)

(m3 – m2) s (θ2 – θe) = (mw + W) sw (θe –θ1)

Therefore \(s=\frac{\left(m_w+W\right)}{\left(m_3-m_2\right)} \frac{\left(\theta_e-\theta_1\right) \cdot s_w}{\left(\theta_2-\theta_e\right)}=\ldots \ldots \ldots \ldots . . . \mathrm{J} / \mathrm{g} /{ }^{\circ} \mathrm{C}\)

s may be written in S.I. unit as J/kg/ºC, by multiplying the calculated value above by 1000.

Result

Specific heat of given (solid), s = …………J/kg/ºC
Value from tables s t = …………J/kg/ºC

Percentage Error in the value of \(\mathrm{S}=\frac{\mathrm{s}-\mathrm{s}_{\mathrm{t}}}{\mathrm{s}_{\mathrm{t}}} \times 100=\ldots \ldots \ldots \ldots\)

Precautions

  1. Physical balance should be in proper working condition
  2. A sufficient quantity of water should be taken in the boiler of the hypsometer
  3. The calorimeter should be wiped clean and its surface should be shining to minimize any loss of heat due to radiation.
  4. The thermometers used should be of the same range and their least counts be compared before starting the experiment. Cold water in the calorimeter should not be so cold that it forms dew droplets on the outer surface of the calorimeter. Solid used should not be chemically reactive with water.
  5. The hypsometer, burner, and heating system should be at sufficient distance from the calorimeter so that the calorimeter absorbs no heat from them.
  6. The solid should be heated such that its temperature is steady for about 5 to 7 minutes.
  7. The solid should be transferred quickly so that its temperature when dropped in water is the same as recorded.
  8. Water should not be allowed to splash while dropping the solid in water in the calorimeter.
  9. After measuring the equilibrium temperature, the thermometer when removed should not have any water droplets sticking to it.
  10. Cold water taken in the beaker should be as much below temperature as the equilibrium temperature after adding solid is expected to go above it. This is to take care of heat absorbed from surroundings by cold water or that lost by warm water during the course of the experiment. It would be of interest to know that this correction had been thought of by Count Rumford in the 19th century.

Sources Of Error

  1. Radiation losses can be minimized but cannot be eliminated.
  2. During the transfer of hot solid into the calorimeter, the heat loss cannot be accounted for
  3. Though mercury in the thermometer bulbs has low thermal capacity, it absorbs some heat and lowers the temperature to be measured.

Experiment 18

Aim: To compare electro-motive-force (E.M.Fs) of two primary cells using a potentiometer.

Apparatus: A potentiometer with sliding key (or jockey), a leclanche cell, a Daniel cell, an ammeter, a low resistance Rheostat, a one-way-key, a galvanometer, a resistance box, a battery of 2 to 3 accumulators (or E.M.F. higher than the E.M.F. of individual cell to be compared), a voltmeter, connecting wires: a two-way key and a piece of sandpaper.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments If the fall in potential between A and J

Theory: 

  1. A potentiometer is an instrument designed for an accurate comparison of potential differences and for measuring small potential differences. In an ordinary form it consists of a long, uniform resistance wire of manganin or constantan stretched over a wooden board usually in 4 turns (or 10 turns) each of 100 cm in length.
  2. The wire is fixed at its ends to two binding screws. A metre-scale is fitted parallel to the wire and a sliding key or jockey is provided for contact.
  3. The working of a potentiometer can be understood by considering a simple diagram Let a wire AB be connected to a source of constant potential difference ‘E’ known as ‘ Auxiliary battery’.
  4. This source will maintain a current in the wire flowing from A to B and there will be a constant fall of potential from the end of A to B. This source thus establishes in the wire a potential difference per unit length known as the ‘potential Gradient’.
  5. If L is the length of the wire, this potential gradient will be E/L volts. Let one of the cells, whose E.M.F. ‘E 1’ is to be compared with the E.M.F. ‘E2’ of the other cell, be connected with its + ve electrode at A and the other electrode through a galvanometer to a movable contact i.e., jockey J.
  6. If the fall in potential between A and J due to the current flowing in the wire is equal to the E.M.F. ‘E 1’ of the cell, the galvanometer will show no deflection when the jockey is pressed at J indicating no current in the galvanometer. This position on the wire AB is possible only when E is greater Than E 1.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments A potentiometer with sliding key

If the point J is at a distance l1 cm from A, the fall in potential between A and J will be E1= pl1 and therefore E1 1= pl at the null deflection.

If this cell is now replaced by the second cell of E.M.F. ‘E 2’ and another balance is obtained at a distance l 2 cm from A, then E2= p/l

therefore \(\frac{\mathrm{E}_1}{\mathrm{E}_2}=\frac{\rho l_1}{\rho l_2}=\frac{l_1}{l_2} \quad \text { or } \quad \frac{\mathrm{E}_1}{\mathrm{E}_2}=\frac{l_1}{l_2}\)

Since the galvanometer shows no deflection at the null point no current is drawn from the experimental cell and it is thus the actual E.M.F of the cell that is compared in this experiment.

Procedure:-

  1. Draw a diagram showing the scheme of connections
  2. Remove the insulation from the end of the connecting copper wires and clean the ends with sandpaper
  3. Connect the positive pole of the auxiliary battery (a battery of constant e.m.f) to the zero end (A) of the potentiometer and the negative pole through a one-way-key, an ammeter, and a low resistance rheostat to the other end of the potentiometer.
  4. Connect the positive pole of the cells E1 and E2 to the terminal at the zero and (A) and the negative poles to terminals a and b of the two-way key connect the common terminal c of the two-way key through a galvanometer (G) and a resistance box (R.B) to the jockey.
  5. To test the connections: – Introduce the plug-in position in the one-way-key (K) in the auxiliary circuit and also in between the terminals a and c of the two-way-key. Take out a 2,000 ohms plug from the resistance box (R.B). Press the jockey at the zero end and note the direction of deflection in the galvanometer.
  6. Press the jockey at the other end of the potentiometer wire; if the direction of deflection is opposite to that in the first case, the connections are correct. If the direction of deflection is in the same direction then increase the current in the auxiliary circuit with a rheostat till the deflection obtained in the galvanometer is in the opposite direction when the jockey is pressed at the other end.
  7. Move the jockey along the wire from the zero end A towards the other end B to find point J 1 where the galvanometer shows no defection. Put in the 2000 ohms plug in the resistance box and find the null point accurately. Note the length ‘l1’ of the wire and also the current in the ammeter.
  8. Disconnect the cell E: 1 and put the cell E2 in the circuit. Again remove the 2000 ohms plug from the resistance box and find the corresponding length (l2) accurately for no deflection of the galvanometer keeping the ammeter reading the same.
  9. Repeat the observation alternately for each cell again for the same value of current.
  10. Increase the current by adjusting the rheostat and obtain similarly, four sets of observations.
  11. (The rheostat used in the circuit should have a low resistance as compared to the resistance of the potentiometer wire.)

Observation and Calculations:

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Measure the E.M.F of the two cells

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 2 Measurement Errors and Experiments Notes

Mean \(\frac{E_1}{E_2}=\)

E.M.F of leclanche cell (E1) = ………….. volts

(By voltmeter)

E.M.F. of Daniel cell (E2) = ………. volts

(By voltmeter)

\(\frac{E_1}{E_2}=\)

Precaution: –

  1. The e.m.f. of the auxiliary battery should be constant and always greater than the e.m.f of either of the two cells, whose e.m.f are to be compared.
  2. The positive pole of the auxiliary battery and the positive poles of the cell must be connected to the terminal on the zero side of the potentiometer wire otherwise it would be impossible to obtain a balance point.
  3. The rheostat should be of low resistance and whenever the deflection shown is to the same side when a jockey is pressed at all points of the wire, the current must be increased to obtain the balance point at a desired length.
  4. The current should remain constant for each set of observations with the two cells.
  5. The current should be passed only for the duration it is necessary, otherwise the balance point will keep on changing.
  6. The balance points should be obtained at large distances from the zero end.
  7. The length should always be measured from the end of the wire where positive poles are connected.
  8. The balance point should be found alternately with the two cells.
  9. A high resistance should be used in series with the galvanometer. This does not affect the position of the balance point in any way. Near the position of the exact balance point, however, this resistance should be removed. (Note that the same purpose can be served by putting a shunt across the galvanometer)
  10. A resistance box should never be used in the auxiliary circuit.
  11. To avoid any change in the e.m.f. of a cell due to polarization, the reading should be taken after sufficient intervals of time.

Sources of Error :

  1. The potentiometer wire may not be uniform.
  2. The resistance of the wire may change due to the temperature rise.
  3. Contact potentials may not be negligible.

Experiment 18

Aim: To determine the internal resistance of a primary cell using a potentiometer.

Apparatus: A potentiometer, a Leclanche cell, a battery of three cells, an ammeter, a low resistance rhostat, two one-way keys a sensitive galvanometer two resistance boxes, a jockey connecting wires, and a piece of sane paper.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Internal Resistance Of A cell

Theory

In the potentiometer circuit of Fig. let ‘l1’ be the length of the potentiometer wire upto the point X, when the balance is obtained with the cell (E) in an open circuit i.e. when key K2 is not closed, and ‘l2’ the length upto Y when the balance is obtained with the cell shunted through a resistance S. Then if E is the e.m.f. of the cell and ‘V’ the P.D. between its terminals when shunted, we have according to the principle of the potentiometer, and E1 and V2

⇒ \(\frac{\mathrm{E}}{\mathrm{V}}=\frac{l_1}{l_2}\)

If ‘r’ is the internal resistance of the cell and I the current through it when shunted by S, then by Ohm’s Law

⇒ \(\begin{array}{lll}
E=I(S+r) & \text { and } & V=I S \\
\frac{E}{V}=\frac{S+r}{S} & \ldots . \text { (2) }
\end{array}\)

From 1 and 2

⇒ \(1+\frac{\mathrm{r}}{\mathrm{S}}=\frac{l_1}{l_2}\)

Hence \(\mathrm{r}=\frac{\left(l_1-l_1\right) \mathrm{S}}{l_2}\)

Procedure

  1. Draw a diagram as shown in the scheme of connections in Fig.
  2. Remove the insulation from the ends of the copper wires and clean the ends with sandpaper. Connect the positive pole of the auxiliary battery to the zero end (A) of the potentiometer and the negative pole through a one-way key (K1), an ammeter, and a low resistance rheostat to the other end (B) of the potentiometer wire.
  3. Connect the positive pole of the cell (E) to the terminal at the zero end (A) and the negative pole the jockey through the galvanometer (G) and resistance box (R.B.)
  4. Connect a resistance box S across the cell (E) through a one-way key (K2)
  5. Insert the plug-in key K1 and adjust a constant current in the potentiometer circuit with the help of rheostat.
  6. Move the jockey along the wire to find a point where the galvanometer shows no deflection. Insert the 2000 ohms lug and find the null point accurately as at X. Note the length l1 of the wire and the current in the ammeter. Put in the key K2 take out 2 ohm plug from the resistance box S and make all other plugs tight by giving them a slight twist. Find the balance point again as at Y and note the corresponding length l2 Repeat twice for the same value of the current in the auxiliary circuit and same shunt resistance in a similar manner.
  7. Remove the plugs from the keys K1 and K2. Wait for some time, insert the plug in the key K1, and find l 1 similarly keeping the current same. Put in the key K2, take out a resistance of 3 or 4 ohms, and find the length l1repeat similarly for S equal to 5
  8. Change the value of current in the external circuit by a slight amount and repeat observations as in Step 6.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Remove the insulation from the ends of the copper wires

Result

The internal resistance of Leclanche cell (r) = ….. ohms

Precautions

  1. The e.m.f. of the auxiliary battery should be constant and always greater than the e.m.f. of either of the two cells, whose e.m.fs. are to be compared.
  2. The positive pole of the auxiliary battery and the positive poles of the cells must be connected to the terminal on the zero side of the potentiometer wire otherwise it would be impossible to obtain the balance point
  3. The rheostat should be of a low resistance and whenever the deflection shown is to the same side when a jockey is pressed at all points of the wire, the current must be increased to obtain the balance point at a desired length.
  4. The current should remain constant for each set of observations with two cells.
  5. The current should be passed only for the duration it is necessary, otherwise, the balance point will keep on changing
  6. The balance points should be obtained at large distances from the zero end.
  7. The internal resistance of a Leclanche cell is not constant but varies with the current drawn from the cell. Hence to get constant readings the resistance from the resistance box S must be varied by a small amount (say 3 to 8 ohms).
  • [Note, To prevent a large current from being passed through the galvanometer either shunt it with a wire or put a large resistance of about 2000 ohms in series with it. But when the balance point is located, to find it more precisely the shunt should be removed or all the plugs of the series resistance box should be inserted].

Exercise

Question 1. A student is required to measure the emf of a cell, he should use –

  1. Potentiometer
  2. Voltmeter
  3. Ammeter
  4. Either 1 or 2

Answer: 1. Potentiometer

Question 2. A potentiometer is an ideal device for measuring potential differences, because-

  1. It uses a sensitive galvanometer
  2. It does not disturb the potential difference it measures
  3. It is an elaborate arrangement
  4. It has a long wire hence heat developed is quickly radiated

Answer: 2. It does not disturb the potential difference it measures

Question 3. Which of the following statements is correct during the measurement of emf of the cell by a potentiometer?

  1. No current flows through the potentiometer wire upto position of a null point
  2. At the null point in any potentiometer experiment, no current flows through the whole of the potentiometer wire.
  3. No current is drawn from the cell when the null point is obtained
  4. No current is drawn from the battery when the null point is obtained

Answer: 3. No current is drawn from the cell when the null point is obtained

Question 4. Which of the following statements is not wrong?

  1. To increase the sensitivity of a potentiometer increase current through potentiometer wire.
  2. To increase sensitivity increase external resistance in the battery circuit connected to the potentiometer.
  3. To increase sensitivity increase battery voltage
  4. To increase sensitivity increase the emf of battery.

Answer: 4. To increase sensitivity increase the emf of battery.

Experiment 9

Aim:

To find the resistance of a galvanometer by half deflection method and find its figure of merit.

Apparatus:

A Weston type moving coil galvanometer, a cell, two resistance boxes, two one-way keys, a voltmeter, connecting wires, and sandpaper.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Half deflection method

Theory –

The connections for finding the resistance of a galvanometer by the half deflection method are shown in Fig. When the key, K1 is closed, keeping the key K2 open, the current Ig through the galvanometer is given by

⇒ \(I_g=\frac{E}{R+G}\) where E = E.M.F. of the cell.

R = Resistance from the resistance box R.B.

G = Galvanometer resistance.

If j is the deflection produced, then \(\frac{E}{R+G}=k \theta\)

If now the key K2 is closed and the value of the shunt resistance S is adjusted so that the deflection is reduced to half of the first value, then the current flowing through the galvanometer I’g is given by \(I_g^{\prime}=\frac{E}{R+\frac{G S}{(G+S)}}\left(\frac{S}{G+S}\right)=\frac{k \theta}{2}\) or, \(I_g^{\prime}=\frac{E S}{R(G+S)+G S}=\frac{k \theta}{2}\) Comparing (1) and (2), we get R + G) 2S = R(G + S) + GS or (R – S) G = RS or \(G=\frac{R S}{R-S}\) If the value of R is very large as compared to S, then \(\frac{R S}{R-S}\) is nearly equal to unity. Hence g=S

The figure of Merit:-

The figure of merit of a galvanometer is that much current is sent through the galvanometer to produce a deflection of one division on the scale. If k is the figure of merit of the galvanometer, and ‘k’ is the number of divisions on the scale, then (Ig) through the galvanometer is given by ig=Kθ

Procedure:-

  1. Draw a diagram showing the scheme of connections as in fig. and make the connections accordingly.
  2. Check the connections and show the same to the teacher before passing the current.
  3. Introduce a high resistance R from the resistance box (R. B), close the key K1, and adjust the value of R till the deflection is within scale and maximum. Note the deflection and the value of the resistance R.
  4. Close the key K2 and adjust the value of the shunt resistance S so that the deflection is reduced exactly to half the first value. Note this deflection and the value of the resistance S.
  5. Repeat the experiment three times taking different deflections of the galvanometer.

To find the figure of merit: –

Find the e.m.f. of the cell by a voltmeter. See the positive of the cell connected to the positive marked terminal of the voltmeter.

Connect the cell E, the galvanometer G, the resistance box R.B., and the key K1 in series take out a 5,000 ohms plug from the resistance box, and make all other plugs tight. put in the key K1 and adjust the value of the resistance R from the resistance box so that a deflection θ near about 30 divisions is indicated in the galvanometer. Note the deflection θ in the galvanometer and also the value of the resistance R from the resistance box.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments the e.m.f. of the cell by a voltmeter

Adjust the value of R from the resistance box to get a deflection of about 20 divisions and again note the deflection and the resistance.

Increase the number of cells to two. Find the e.m.f and the value of the resistance R to get a deflection of about 30 and again about 20 divisions as in the previous step.

Resistance of Galvanometer:

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Resistance of Galvanometer

Mean Value of G = …………. ohms

Figure of merit: –

  1. Galvanometer resistance (G) = ……….Ω
  2. Number of division on the galvanometer scale = …………..

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Galvanometer resistance

Precautions: –

  1. The value of ‘R’ should be large
  2. To decrease the deflection, the shunt resistance should be decreased and vice-versa.
  3. In this method, it is assumed that the deflection is proportional to the current. This is possible only in a weston type moving coil galvanometer.
  4. The connections must be tight and the ends of connecting wires should be cleaned.

Experiment 20

Aim: To find the focal length of a convex mirror using a convex lens.

Apparatus: An optical bench with four uprights, a convex mirror, a convex lens, a knitting needle, and a half-meter scale.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments the focal length of a convex mirror using a convex lens.

Suppose a convex lens L is interposed between a convex mirror M and an object needle O as. When the relative position of M, L, and O are adjusted in such a way that there is no parallax between the object needle O and its image I, then in that position, the rays will fall normally on the convex mirror M.

The rays which fall on the mirror normally should meet at the centre of curvature C of the mirror when produced. The distance MC gives the radius of curvature R. Half of the radius of curvature gives the focal length F of the mirror.

Now without disturbing the positions of the object O and the lens L, the convex mirror is removed and another needle is placed in the position of the image I of the object O, formed by the lens L by using the parallax method.

Measure MI’ Now \(f,=\frac{R}{2}=\frac{M I}{2}\)

Procedure

  1. Mount the convex mirror M, a convex lens L, and the object needle O on an optical bench. Look for the inverted image of O through the system of the lens L and the mirror M by adjusting the position of O or L for that of the mirror. When the inverted image is not obtained, a convex lens of a larger focal length should be used.
  2. Remove the parallax between the object needle O and its inverted image and note the position of O, L, and M on the bench scale.
  3. Remove the mirror M and do not disturb the lens L and O at all. Take another needle I’ and place it on the other side of the lens.
  4. Take five sets of observations for different positions of O and L.
  5. Determine the index correction between the mirror M and the image needle I’.

Observation and Calculations:

  1. Index correction
  2. Length of the knitting needle, y = ……… cm
  3. Observed distance with the needle between M and I’ x = ……… cm
  4. Index correction between M and I = (y – x) = ……… cm

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Table Determination of Focal Length

  1. Mean, MI’ = …….. cm
  2. Corrected distance, MI’ = …….. cm
  3. therefore \(\mathrm{f}=\frac{\text { CorrectedMI’ }}{2}=\ldots \ldots . . . \mathrm{cm}\)

Result:

The focal length of the given convex mirror =…….. cm

Precautions:

  1. The line joining the pole of the mirror, the centre of the lens L, and the tip of the needle, should be parallel to the length of the optical bench.
  2. The auxiliary lens L must have a sufficiently large focal length.
  3. The parallax should be removed tip to tip while removing the parallax, the eye should be kept at the least distance of distinct vision i.e., 25 cm away from the needle.
  4. In the second part of the experiment i.e., after removing the mirror M, the position of L and O should not be disturbed at all.

Experiment 20 (2)

Aim: To find the focal length of a convex lens by plotting graphs between u and v and between 1/u and 1/v.

Apparatus: A convex lens of short focal length (say 15 to 20 cm.), two needles, three uprights, one clamp, an optical bench a half-meter rod, and a knitting needle.

Theory: The position of the image formed by a convex lens depends upon the position of the object the lens below shows the different positions of the images formed by a convex lens for different object positions. The relation between u, v, and f for a convex lens is \(\frac{1}{f}=\frac{1}{v}-\frac{1}{u}\)

Procedure

Find the rough focal length of the given convex lens by focusing a sharp, clear, and inverted image of a distant object on a white paper and measuring this distance between the lens and the white paper with a meter scale.

If the optical bench is provided with leveling screw, then level it using a spirit level.

Mount the convex lens (held in its holder) on the central upright of the optical bench. Also, add the two needles on the remaining two uprights. Arrange the tips of the needles at the same vertical height as the centre of the lens.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments The rough focal length of the given convex lens

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Two pin method for determining the focal length f of a convex lens.

Mark one needle as AB object needle and the other one CD as an image needle and distinguish between them by rubbing the tip of one of the needles with a piece of chalk or putting a paper flag on it.

Find the index corrections for u and v using a knitting needle.

Shift the position of the object needle AB to a distance greater than 2f from the lens. Look from the other side of the lens along its principal axis near the end of the bench. If the setting is correct, an inverted, real image A’B’ is seen. Now adjust the position of the second needle CD such that the parallax between the image of the object needle and the image needle is removed. The position of the second needle is so adjusted that the parallax is removed from tip to tip.

Note the positions of the lenses, the object needle, and the image needle on the bench scale and thus find the observed values of u and v. Apply index corrections to get the corrected values for u and v.

Repeat the above steps for 5 different positions of the object by placing it beyond 2F and between F and 2F. Record your observations as detailed below.

Observations:

  1. Approximate focal length of length of the lens f = …….. cm
  2. For index correction
  3. The actual length of the knitting needle x = …….. cm

For u

  1. Observed distance between the object needle and the lens
  2. When a knitting needle is inserted between them, y = …….. cm
  3. Index error for u, e
  4. 1 = (y – x) = …….. cm

3. Index correction for u, –e 1 = (x – y) = …….. cm

For v

  1. Observed distance between the image needle and the lens
  2. When the knitting needle is inserted between them, z = …….. cm
  3. Index error for v, e
  4. 1 = (z – x) = …….. cm
  5. Index correction for v –e 2 = (x – z) = …….. cm

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Approximate focal length of length of the lens

Plotting Graphs and Calculations of f

u – v Graph 

Choose a suitable but the same scale to represent u along the x-axis and v along the y-axis Remember that u is negative and v is positive for a convex lens, according to the coordinate sign convention used these days.

Plot the points for various sets of values of u and v from the observation table. The graph will be a rectangular hyperbola.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Graph og u vs v for a convex lens

Find f from this graph: Draw a line OC bisecting the angle X’ OY and cutting the graph at point C. The coordinates of this point are (–2f, 2f). Note the distances of the foot of the perpendiculars OA and OB respectively on the X and Y axis. Half of these distances are given the focal length of the convex lens. Thus \(\mathrm{f}=\frac{\mathrm{OA}}{2}=\ldots \ldots . . \mathrm{cm}\)

Take the mean of these two values of f.

Calculation of f from graph between 1/u and 1/v: Choose a suitable but the same scale to
represent \(\frac{1}{u}\) along x-axis and ,\(\frac{1}{v}\)
along y-axis, taking O as the origin (0,0).

Plot the graph between \(\frac{1}{u}\) and \(\frac{1}{v}\) The graph would be a straight line as shown in the figure below making equal intercepts (OA and OB) on them measure AO and OB. Then \(f=\frac{1}{O A}=\frac{1}{O B}\)……………………..cm

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Graph of 1u vs 1v for a convex lens

Result:

The focal length of the given convex lens as determined from the graph of (u, v) from fig. above =………… cm.

\(\left(\frac{1}{u}, \frac{1}{v}\right)\) above= cm

Precaution

  1. The tips of the needles should be as high as the optical centre of the lens.
  2. The uprights carrying the lens and the needles should not be shaky.
  3. Parallax should be removed tip to tip.
  4. The eye should be placed at such a position that the distance between the image needle and the eye is more than 25 cm.
  5. The image and object needles should not be interchanged for different sets of observations.
  6. A piece of chalk may be rubbed on the tip of the object needle or a paper flag put on it, to distinguish it from the image needle.

Exercise

Question 1. By plotting \(\frac{1}{v}\) versus \(\frac{1}{u}\) focal length of a convex mirror can be found-

  1. No, as it forms a virtual image
  2. Yes, only if the scale is large
  3. Yes, only if the scale is small
  4. Yes, only if the aperture is small

Answer: 1. No, as it forms a virtual image

Question 2. The focal length of which of the following can not be obtained directly-

  1. Convex Mirror And Convex Lens
  2. Convex Mirror & Concave Lens
  3. Convex Lens And Concave Mirror
  4. Concave Lens And Concave Mirror

Answer: 2. Convex Mirror & Concave Lens

Question 3. Which of the following statements is false –

  1. The bench correction is always equal to the negative of the bench error
  2. The larger the distance between the two objects larger the magnitude of parallax
  3. Parallax disappears if the positions of two objects coincide
  4. Parallax can occur between any two objects

Answer: 2. The Larger the distance between the two objects larger the magnitude of parallax

Question 4. The focal length of a convex mirror is obtained by using a convex lens. The following observations are recorded during the experiment

  1. Object Position = 5 Cm
  2. Lens = 35.4 Cm
  3. Image = 93.8 Cm
  4. Mirror = 63.3 Cm
  5. Bench Error = –0.1 Cm

Then The Focal Length Of the Mirror Will Be

  1. 7.5 cm
  2. 8.4 cm
  3. 15.3 cm
  4. None Of These

Answer: 3. 15.3 cm

Question 5. For spherical mirrors, graph plotted between \(-\frac{1}{V} \text { and }-\frac{1}{u} \text { is – }\)

  1. A straight line with slope 1
  2. Straight line with slope – 1
  3. Parabola
  4. None

Answer: 2. Straight line with slope – 1

Experiment 21

Aim: To determine the angle of minimum deviation for a given glass prism by plotting a graph between the angle of incidence and angle of deviation and hence find the refractive index of the material of the prism.

Apparatus

A drawing board, a sheet of paper, a glass triangular prism, pins, a half-meter scale, a graph paper, and a protractor.

Theory:

Refraction Through a prism (angle of minimum deviation)

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Refraction of light through a prism

Minimum Deviation – In (Fig 1), ABC represents the principal section of a glass prism. Let EF be a ray of light that is incident on the refracting face AB of the prism. The straight path FG represents the refracted ray through the prism and GH represents the emergent ray. FN 1 and GN 2 are drawn normal to the refracting faces AB and AC at points F and G respectively.

Incident ray EF is Produced to PT, and as a result of refraction through the prism, ABC emerges along GH. The incident ray shown as EF (extruded as dotted line FPT) deviates and follows the path PGH. The angle is the angle between the incident ray EFPT (produced) shown dotted and the emergent ray GH (produced backward) to meet EFT at point P.

This angle is known as the angle of deviation. the angle BAC of the prism (i.e., the angle between its two refracting faces) is called the angle of the prism and it is denoted by the letter ‘A’ It can be proved from simple geometrical considerations that \(\angle \mathrm{A}+\angle \delta=\angle \mathrm{i}+\angle \mathrm{e}\)

and A = r1 + r2 …….2

where i = angle of incidence

  1. e = angle of emergence
  2. r1 = angle of refraction at face AB
  3. r2 = angle of refraction at face AC.

The relation (1) clearly shows that the angle of deviation s varies with the angle of incidence i.

The variation of angle s with angle i is represented graphically

The angle i0 decreases with the increase in the value of i initially, till a particular value (i) of the angle of incidence is reached. For this value of angle of incidence, the corresponding value of the angle of deviation is minimum and it is denoted by the letter m.

This angle of deviation is called the angle of minimum deviation. When a prism is so placed concerning the incident ray that the angle of deviation produced by it is minimum, then the prism is said to be in the position of minimum deviation. In this position, the following relation holds between the angles.

⇒ \(\text { i.e., } \angle \mathrm{i}=\angle \mathrm{e} \text { and } \angle \mathrm{r}_1=\angle \mathrm{r}_2\)

In this position, the incident ray and the emergent ray are symmetrical concerning the prism and the ray passes through the prism is parallel to its base. The refractive index of the material of the prism is given as

\(\mu=\frac{\sin \left(\frac{A+\delta_m}{2}\right)}{\sin \frac{A}{2}}\)

Where sm is the angle of minimum deviation and A is the angle of the prism. Variation of the angle of deviation with the angle of incidence for refraction through a prism

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Variation of angle of deviation with angle of incidence for refration on through a prism

Procedure:

Fix the sheet of white paper on the drawing board with cello tape or drawing pins.

Draw a straight line XY nearly at the centre of the sheet parallel to its length. Mark points marked as O at suitable spacing on this line XY and draw normal to the line XY at points O as Draw straight line PQ corresponding to the incident rays that are drawn at angle of incidence ranging from 30º to 60º, i.e., for angles of 30º, 40º, 50º and 60º using a protractor.

Place the prism with one of its refracting surfaces on the line XY and trace its boundary
ABC.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Place the prism with one of its refracting surfaces on the line

Fix two pins P and Q about 8 cm apart on the incident ray line and view its image with your one eye closed from the face BC of the prism. Fix two pins R and S on the paper such that the tips of these pins and the tips of the images of the incident ray pins P and Q all lie on the same straight line.

Remove the pins R and S and encircle their pinpricks on the paper. Remove the pins P
and Q and also encircle their pinpricks.

Join the points (i.e., pinpricks) S and R and produce it backward to meet the incident
ray PQ produced (shown by dotted lines). Thus RS is the emergent ray corresponding to
the incident ray PQ. Draw arrowheads to show the direction of the rays.

Measure the angle of deviation with a protractor.

Repeat the steps (3 to 7) for different values of angle of incidence and measure the corresponding angles of deviation. Take at least seven values of angle i ranging from 30º – 60º.

Measurement of refracting angle ‘A’ of the prism.

Draw a line XY on the drawing sheet as depicted

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Measurement of the refracting angle A of the prism.

Mark points O in the middle of XY and E and F on either side of O equidistant from E such that OE = OF (say 1 cm each).

Draw three vertical lines EG, OI, and FH through E, O, and F respectively, such that these are parallel to each other.

Place the prism with its refracting edge A on the line Ol such that BC is along XY. The
points E and F would be symmetric for edges B and C.

Draw the boundary ABC of the face of the prism touching the board.

Fix pins P1 and P2 vertically, 4 cm apart, observe their reflection in the face AB, and fix pin P3 such that the images of P1, P2, and P3 are in a straight line. Fix another pin P4 such that prick of P4 is also in the same straight line. Join the pricks of P3 and P4 by line LK and produce it backward. KL is a reflected ray of incident ray GK.

Similarly, locate NM by joining P’ 3 P’4 as the reflected ray of incident ray HM. Draw NM
backward to meet the line LK product backward at point P. The point P should lie on the
line OI if observations are correctly taken.

The angle LPN is equal to 2<A(it can be proved geometrically from the figure). Measure
the angle LPN and determine <A, the angle of the prism.

Observations:

Table for angles i and δ

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments The graph will be a curve

Plotting the graph between <i and <δ Plot a graph between angles I and δ for various sets of values recorded in the observation table. The graph will be a curve

For angle ‘A’ of prism

LPN = ………..°= 2A or Angle A =…………°

Calculations: Determine the angle of minimum deviation m from the graph.

Result: The angle of deviation δ first decreases with the increase in the angle of incidence, attains a minimum value and then increases with further increase in the angle of incidence as indicated in the (δ—i) graph

Percautions:

  1. A sharp pencil should be used for drawing the boundary of the prism.
  2. The separation between the pins should not be less than 8 cm.
  3. The angle of incidence should lie between 30° to 60°.
  4. The same angle of prism should be used for all the observations. So an ink mark should be placed on it to distinguish it as the refracting angle A of the prism.
  5. The pins should have sharp tips and be fixed vertically and the pinpricks should be encircled immediately after they are removed.
  6. Proper arrows should be drawn to indicate the incident, the refracted, and the emergent rays.
  7. A smooth curve practically passing through all the plotted points should be drawn.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 2 Measurement Errors and Experiments Notes

Experiment 22

AIM: To determine the refractive index of a glass slab using a traveling microscope.

Apparatus:

A piece of paper, a marker, a glass slab, a traveling microscope, and lycopodium powder.

Theory:

Refraction is a phenomenon of propagation of light from one transparent medium into the other medium such that light deviates from its original path. The ratio of the velocity of light in the first medium to that in the second medium is called the refractive index of the second medium concerning the first.

Usually, the first medium is air. The bottom surface of a vessel containing a refracting liquid appears to be raised, such that the apparent depth is less than the real depth. The refractive index of the refracting liquid is defined as the ratio of real depth to the apparent depth.

Mathematically, Refractive index \(\mu=\frac{\text { real depth }}{\text { apparent depth }}\)

For accurate measurements of depths, a traveling microscope is used. If the reading of real depth at the bottom of the slab is r1, if the reading at the cross due to refraction is r2, and at the top of the slab if the reading is r3, then real depth = r3 — r1, and apparent depth = r3 — r2.

Therefore , refractive index of glass (material of slab)\(\mu=\frac{r_3-r_1}{r_3-r_2}\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Travelling microscope taking reading

Procedure:

  1. For accurate measurement of depth, a traveling microscope is used.
  2. Note the number of divisions of vernier which coincide with several full-scale divisions.
  3. Find the value of each main division and hence the least count of the microscope scale as (1 M.S.D —V.S.D)
  4. Set the microscope in its stand such that it is capable of sliding vertically up and down
    as the screw attached to the rack and pinion is turned.
  5. On a sheet of white paper, a cross and place it below the objective of the microscope.
  6. Move the microscope very gently. Using the screw, focus the eyepiece on the cross mark and
    bring the cross in focus such that the cross wires, coincides with the marked cross on
    the paper. Note the reading of the microscope as r1.
  7. Place the given glass slab on the cross mark. You would observe that the cross-mark
    appears to be raised.
  8. Move the microscope gradually and gently upward to bring the cross mark in focus and
    on the cross of cross wires. Record the reading as r2
  9. Sprinkle some fine lycopodium powder on the glass slab and move the microscope upward
    till the powder particles come into focus. Record the reading on the scale as r3.
  10. The difference of readings r3 and r1 i.e. r3 — r1 gives the real depth whereas r3—r2 gives the
    apparent depth.
  11. Record your observations as follows and calculate the value of refractive index m.

Observations:

  1. Least count of traveling microscope.
  2. 10 Vernier Scale Division = 9 Main Scale Divisions (Scales may differ from instrument to instrument).
  3. Value of one main scale division = 1mm i.e. 0.1 cm.
  4. 10 V.S.D =9 M.S.D (V.S.D. Vernier Scale Division, M.SD. Main Scale Divisions)

⇒ \(\text { 1V.S.D }=\frac{9}{10} \text { M.S.D }\)

⇒ \(\text { L.C }=1 \text { M.S.D }-1 \text { V.S.D }=1 \text { M.S.D }-\frac{9}{10} \text { M.S.D }=\frac{1}{10} \text { M.S.D or } \frac{1}{10} \times 0.1 \mathrm{~cm}=0.01 \mathrm{~cm}\)

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Least count of voltmeter

 

Mean values r1 =…….cm, r2=……..r3=……cm

Calculations:

Real depth = d r= r3 – r1 =……. cm.

Apparent depth = da = r3 – r2 =……. cm.

Refractive index \(\mu=\frac{\text { Real depth }}{\text { Apparent depth }}=\frac{\mathrm{d}_{\mathrm{r}}}{\mathrm{d}_{\mathrm{a}}}=\ldots \ldots .\)

Percautions:

  1. The least count of the scale of the traveling microscope should be carefully calculated.
  2. Microscope once focussed on the cross mark, the focussing should not be disturbed
    throughout the experiment.
  3. Eyepieces should be adjusted such that cross wires are distinctly seen.
  4. Cross wires, the cross should be set on the ink cross mark on the paper.
  5. Only a thin layer of powder should be spread on the top of the slab
  6. Express your result upto significant figures keeping in view the least count of instruments.

Result

The refractive index of the glass slab by using a traveling microscope is determined as

Experiment 23

Aim: To study the static and dynamic curves of a p–n junction diode in forward bias and to determine its static and dynamic resistances

Apparatus: A p-n junction diode, a3V battery, a high resistance rheostat, 0-3 volt voltmeter, one milliammeter, one-way key, and connecting wires.

Theory: When a junction diode is forward biased, a forward current is produced which increases with an increase in bias voltage. This increase is not proportional.

The ratio of forward bias voltage (V) and forward current (I) is called the static resistance of semiconductor diode, i.e., \(R=\frac{V_F}{I_F}\)

In case of a varying bias voltage and varying forward current, the ratio of change in forward bias voltage(V) and the corresponding change in forward current (I)is called the dynamic resistance \(\left(r=\frac{\Delta V_F}{\Delta \mathrm{I}_{\mathrm{F}}}\right)\)

To find the static and dynamic resistance of the semiconductor diode, a graph has to be plotted between forward bias voltage(V) and forward bias current (I). This graph is called the characteristic curve of a semiconductor diode.

Producer:

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments To find the static and dynamic resistance of semiconductor diode

  1. Make the connections as shown in the figure.
  2. Keep the moving contact of the rheostat to the minimum and insert the key K. Voltmeter and milliammeter will show a zero reading.
  3. Move the contact towards the positive to apply the forward bias voltage V = 0.1 V.
  4. The current remains zero
  5. Increase the forward bias voltage to 0.3 V in steps. The current will still be zero. (This
    is due to the junction potential barrier of 0.3 V).
  6. Increase V to 0.4 V. Record the current.
  7. Increase V in the step of 0.2 and note the corresponding current.
  8. At V = 2.4 V. The current increases suddenly. This represents the forward breakdown
    stage.
  9. Draw a graph of I on y- the y-axis and V on the x-axis.

Record of Readings

  1. Least count of voltmeter = ………V Zero error of mA = ………mV
  2. Least count of milliammeter = ………mA Zero error of voltmeter = ………V

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Least count of voltmeter

Calculations

For static resistance (R)

⇒ \(R=\frac{V_F}{I_F}\)

From the graph \(\mathrm{R}=\frac{\mathrm{OA}^{\prime}}{\mathrm{OA}^{\prime \prime}}=\ldots \ldots . . . ., \text { ohm }\)

Diode is …… (specify the code)

For dynamic resistance (r)

⇒ \(r=\frac{\Delta V_F}{\Delta \mathrm{I}_{\mathrm{F}}}\)

From the graph \(r=\frac{A C}{B C} \text { ohms }\)

Result

  1. The static resistance of the given semiconductor diode = ……….. ohm
  2. The dynamic resistance of the given semiconductor diode = ……….. ohm

Precautions

  1. Make all connections neat, clean, and tight
  2. The key should be used in the circuit and opened when the circuit is not in use
  3. Avoid applying forward bias voltage beyond the breakdown
  4. Possible sources of errors
  5. The connection may not be tight
  6. The junction diode may be faulty

Experiment 24

AIM: To draw the characteristic curves of a Zener diode and to determine its reverse breakdown voltage.

Apparatus: A zener diode (with a reverse breakdown voltage of 6 V), a ten-volt battery, a rheostat, two voltmeters (range 0, 10 V), one milliammeter, one 20 resistance, one-way key, connecting wires.

Theory:

A Zener diode is a semiconductor diode in which the n-type sections are heavily doped, This heavy doping results in a low value of reverse breakdown voltage. The reverse breakdown voltage of the Zener diode is called Zener voltage (Vz). The reverse current that results after the breakdown is called zener current (Iz).

Vi = Input voltage
V0 = Output voltage
Ri = Input resistance
Ii = Input current
Iz= Zener diode current
IL = Load current
IL = Ii – Iz
V0 = Vi – Ri Ii
V0 = RL IL

Initially, as Vi increases, Ii increases hence V0 increases linearly. At break-down, the increase of Vi increases I i by a large amount, so that V0 = Vi – RiI i becomes constant. This constant value of V 0 Which is the reverse breakdown voltage, is called zener voltage.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Circuit Diagram

Procedure:

  1. Make the connections as shown in the figure above making sense that the Zener diode is reverse biased Bring the moving contact to a rheostat to the minimum and insert the key K. Voltmeter and ammeter will read zero
  2. Move the contact a little towards the positive end to apply some reverse bias voltage (Vi). Milliammeter reading remains zero.
  3. As Vi is further increased, Ii starts increasing and V0 becomes less than Vi. Note the values of Vi V0 and Ii.
  4. Keep increasing Vi in small steps of 0.5 V. Note the corresponding values of I i and V0
  5. At one stage as Vi is increased, Ii increases by a large amount and V0 does not increase. this is a reverse breakdown situation.
  6. As Vi is increased further, I will increase keeping V0 constant. Record your observation in a tabular column
  7. Draw a graph of output voltage V0 along the y-axis and input voltage along the x-axis. The graph will be as shown in the figure.
  8. Draw a graph of input current along the y-axis and input voltage along the x-axis. The graph will be shown in the figure

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Bring the moving contact to rheostat

Result:

The Breakdown voltage of the given Zener diode is 6 volts.

Percautions:

  • Use voltmeter and milliammeter of suitable range.
  • Connect the zener diode p-n junction in reverse bias.
  • The key should be kept open when the circuit is not in use.

Experiment 25

AIM: To study the characteristics of a common emitter n-p-n or p-n-p transistor and to find out the values of current and voltage gains.

Requirements: An n-p-n transistor, a 3 V battery, a 30 V battery, two rheostats, one 0–3 V voltmeter, one 0–30 V voltmeter, one 0–500 A microammeter, one 0–50 mA milliammeter, two-way keys, connecting wires.

Theory:

A transistor can be considered as a thin wafer of one type of semiconductor between two layers of another type. An NPN transistor has one p-type wafer in between two n-type. Similarly p-n-p the transistor has one n-type wafer between two p-type.

In a common emitter circuit, the emitter base makes the input section and the collector base the output section, with the emitter-base junction, forward bise, and the collector-base junction, reverse biased. The resistance offered by the emitter-base junction is called input resistance Ri and has a low value.

The resistance offered by the collector-base junction is called output resistance R0 and has a high value. Due to the high output resistance, a high resistance can be used as a load resistance.

The ratio \(\frac{R_L}{R_i} \text { or } \frac{R_0}{R_i}\) measures the resistance gain of the common emitter transistor. The ratio of change in collector current to the corresponding change in base current measures the current gain in the common emitter transistor and is represented by B.

⇒ \(\beta=\frac{\Delta \mathrm{I}_{\mathrm{c}}}{\Delta \mathrm{I}_{\mathrm{b}}}\)

The product of current gain and the resistance gain measures the voltage gain of the common emitter transistor.

Formula Used

Input resistance, \(\mathrm{R}_{\mathrm{i}}=\frac{\Delta \mathrm{I}_{\mathrm{b}}}{\Delta \mathrm{I}_{\mathrm{b}}}\)

Out put resistance, \(\mathrm{R}_0=\frac{\Delta \mathrm{V}_{\mathrm{c}}}{\Delta \mathrm{I}_{\mathrm{c}}}\)

Resistance again, \(=\frac{R_0}{R_i}\)

Current gain, \(\beta=\frac{\Delta \mathrm{I}_{\mathrm{c}}}{\Delta \mathrm{I}_{\mathrm{b}}}\)

Voltage gain correct gain x resistance gain

i.e., \(A_v=\beta \frac{R_0}{R_i}\)

Circuit Diagram

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Circuit Diagram

Procedure

  1. Make a circuit diagram as shown in Figure (A)
  2. Drag the moveable contact of rheostat to the minimum so that voltmeters, V1 and V2 read zero volt

For Input Characteristics

  1. Apply the forward bias voltage at the emitter-base junction note the base voltage (Vb) and the base current (I b)
  2. Keep increasing Vb till I b rises suddenly
  3. Make collector voltage 10 V and repeat the above steps
  4. Now make collector voltage 20 V, 30 V, and repeat the above steps. Note the value of Vb and I b in each case

For Output Characteristics

  1. Make all reading zero. Keep the collector voltage zero.
  2. Make base current I b = 100 uA by adjusting the base voltage. You will be able to read some collector current even though the collector voltage is zero.
  3. Make the collector voltage 10V, 20V, 30V, etc., and note corresponding collector currents. Record your observations in the tabular form as given below.
  4. Make the current I b equal to 200 uA, and note the values of I c corresponding to the different values of V.

Record Of Reobservations

  1. Least count of voltmeter, V1 = ………V
  2. Least count of voltmeter, V2 = ………V
  3. Least count of milliammeter = ………mA
  4. Least count of microammeter = ………uA

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments For base voltage and base current

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments For collector voltage and collector current

Graphs

I (For Input Characteristics)

Draw a graph of base voltage (Vb) on the x-axis and base current (I b) on the y-axis from table no. 1. The graph.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments I (For Input Characteristics)

The slope of the graph gives the value of \(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{I}_{\mathrm{c}}}{\Delta \mathrm{V}_{\mathrm{c}}}\) and its reciprocal gives the value of input resistance R1

⇒ \(\mathrm{R}_1=\frac{\Delta \mathrm{V}_{\mathrm{b}}}{\Delta \mathrm{I}_{\mathrm{b}}}=\ldots \ldots . . \mathrm{ohms}\)

2 For Output Characteristics

Draw the graph between collector voltage Vc and colletor current I c for 10 mA base current I b taking Vc along the x-axis and Ic along the y-axis from table no.2. The graph will be as shown in the figure.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments II For Output Characteristics

From the graph, the slope gives the value of \(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{I}_{\mathrm{c}}}{\Delta \mathrm{V}_{\mathrm{c}}}\) and its reciprocal gives the output resistance. \(\mathrm{R}_0=\frac{\Delta \mathrm{V}_{\mathrm{c}}}{\Delta \mathrm{I}_{\mathrm{c}}}=\ldots \ldots \ldots . \mathrm{ohm}\)

3 For Calculation of Current Gain

Plot a graph of base current (I b) on the x-axis and collector current Ic on the y-axis. The graph will be as shown in the figure.

The slope of the graph will give the value of \(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{I}_{\mathrm{c}}}{\Delta \mathrm{I}_{\mathrm{b}}}\) which is the value of current gain (b).

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments The slope of the graph will give the value

  1. AC = …………………..mA= …………………..A
  2. BC = …………………..uA= …………………..A

⇒ \(\beta=\frac{A C}{B C}=\)

For calculation of voltage gain (Av)

Voltage gain = Current gain × Resistance gain \(A=\beta \times \frac{R_0}{R_i}\)

Result:

For the given common emitter transistor, Current gain b= ………

Votage gain Av = ……….

Percautions:

  1. Use voltmeter and milliammeter of suitable range
  2. The key should be kept open when the circuit is not in use

Possible Sources Of Error:

  1. Voltmeter and ammeter may have a zero error
  2. All the connections may not be tight

Experiment 26

AIM: To identify a diode, an L.E.D., a transistor, a resistor, and a capacitor from a mixed collection of such item

Apparatus: A multimeter and a collection of a junction diode, L.E.D., a transistor, a resistor, a capacitor and an integrated circuit.

Theory:

  1. For identification of different items, we have to consider both, their physical appearance and working
  2. An IC (integrated circuit) is in the form of a chip (with a flat back) and has multiple terminals,
    say 8 or more. Therefore, it can easily be identified.
  3. A transistor is a three-terminal device and can be sorted out just by appearance
  4. A resistor, a capacitor, a diode, and an LED are two terminal devices. To identify these we
    use the following facts:
  5. A diode is a two-terminal device that conducts only when it is forward-biased
  6. An LED is a light-emitting diode. It is also a two-terminal device which conducts and emits light
    only when it is forward-biased.
  7. A Resistor is a two-terminal device. It conducts both with d.c. voltage and a.c. voltage. Further, a resistor conducts equally even when terminals of d.c. the battery is reversed.
  8. A capacitor is a two-terminal device that does not conduct with d.c. voltage applies either way. But, conducts with a.c. Voltage.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments A capacitor is a two terminal devic

Producer:

  • Look at the given mixture of various components of an electrical circuit and pick up the one having more than three terminals. The number of terminals maybe 8, 10, 14, or 16. This component will have a flat face. This component will be the integrated circuit i.e., IC.
  • Now find out the component having three legs or terminals. It will be a transistor
  • The component having two legs may either be a junction or capacitor or resistor or a light-emitting diode. These items can be distinguished from each other by using a multimeter as an ohmmeter.
  • Touch the probes to the two ends of each item and observe the deflection on the resistance scale. After this, interchange the two probes and again observe the deflection.
  • If the same constant deflection is observed in the two cases (before and after interchanging
    the probes), the item under observation is a resistor.
  • If unequal deflections are observed, it is a junction diode.
  • If unequal deflections are observed in the two cases along with the emission of light in the
  • case when the deflection is large, the item under observation is an LED
  • On touching the probes, if a large deflection is observed, which then gradually decreases to zero the item under observation is a capacitor.
  • In case the capacity of the capacitor is of the order of picofarad, then the deflection will become zero within no time.

Result:

When the item is observed physically

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments When the item is observed physically

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 2 Measurement Errors and Experiments Notes

With a multimeter as an ohmmeter:

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments With multimeter as an ohmmeter

Percautions:

Observe all those precautions that were related to a multimeter and explain at the end of a multimeter.

Experiment  27

AIM: Use of multimeter to:

  1. Identify the base of the transistor.
  2. Distinguish between N-P-N and P-N-P type transistors.
  3. Identify terminals of an IC
  4. See the unidirectional flow of current in the case of a diode and LED.
  5. Check whether the given electronic component (e.g., diode, transistor, or IC) is in working order.

Apparatus

A multimeter, P-N-P transistor, N-P-N transistor, an IC, junction diode, L.E.D., etc

Theory:

Multimeter: It is an electrical instrument that can be used to measure all three electrical quantities i.e., electrical resistance, current (a.c. and d.c.), and voltage (direct and alternating). Since it can measure Ampere (A) (unit of current), Volt (V) (Unit of e.m.f), and Ohm (unit of resistance), that is why also called an AVO meter. In this single instrument will replace the voltmeter and Ammeter.

Construction

The most commonly used form of the multimeter is shown in the figure, which is a pointer-type moving coil galvanometer. The pointer of the multimeter can move over its dial, which is marked in resistance, current, and voltage scales of different ranges.

The zeros of all the scales are on the extreme left, except that of the resistance scale, whose zero is on the extreme right. A dry cell of 1.5 V is provided inside it. When the multimeter is used as an ohmmeter, the dry cell comes in a closed circuit.

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments coil galvanometer.

Circuit jacks: In the multimeter. there are two circuit jacks, one each at the extreme corners of the bottom of the multimeter. The jack at the right corner is marked positive ( + ), while the other at the left corner is marked negative ( – ). In certain multimeters, the positive circuit jack is not provided but circuit jacks are provided in front of all the markings in regions A, B, C, and D. When the range switch is turned in any region, then all the circuit jacks in that region act as the positive circuit jacks.

Two testing leads (generally one black and the other red) are provided with a multimeter. Each lead carries two probes (One smaller than the other) as its two ends. The smaller probe of red lead is inserted in the jack marked positive, while the smaller probe of black lead is inserted in the jack marked negative.

It may be pointed out that the battery cell remains connected to the meter only when the range switch is in region A. Further, the positive of the battery cell is connected to the negative circuit jack, and the negative of the battery cell is connected to the positive circuit jack.

Zero ohm switch: This is provided at the left side of the multimeter. However, in some multimeters, the zero ohm switch is also provided on its front panel. This switch is set while measuring resistance.

To set this switch, the smaller probes are inserted in the two jacks and the bigger probes are short-circuited. This switch is worked, till the pointer comes to the zero mark, which lies at the right end resistance scale. The section of multimeters as different types of meters is explained below

Ammeter: The galvanometer gets converted into d.c. ammeter when the range switch lies in region B of the multimeter panel. When the range switch is in region B, it can be used as d.c. ammeter of range 0 to 0.25 mA, 0 to 25 mA, and 0 to 500 mA by bringing the knob in front of the desired mark when the range switch is in the region B, a very small resistance called shunt resistance whose value is different range, gets connected in parallel to the galvanometer. In this position, the battery cell is cut off from the meter.

Voltmeter: A multimeter can be used to measure both direct and alternating voltage

d.c. Voltmeter: The galvanometer gets converted into d.c. voltmeter when the range switch lies in the region C of the multimeter panel. With different positions of range switch in this region, it can be used as d.c. voltmeter of ranges 0-0.25 V, 0-2.5 V 0-50 V and 0 to 1000 volts. When the range switch is in region C, a high resistance, whose value depends upon the range selected, gets connected in series to the galvanometer. In this case, the battery cell is not in the circuit with the meter.

a.c. Voltmeter: The galvanometer gets converted into a.c. voltmeter when the range switch is turned and it lies in the region D of the multimeter panel. With the different positions of the range switch in this region, a multimeter can be used as a.c. voltmeter of range 0 to 10 V, 50 V, 250 V, and 1000 V. A solid-state crystal diode rectifier is incorporated in the circuit to use it for a.c. measurement.

ohm-meter: When the knob in the lower part of the multimeter i.e., the range switch is turned to be in the region A of the multimeter panel, the galvanometer gets converted into a resistance meter.

When the range switch is in front of a small black mark against the ×K mark, it works as a resistance meter of range 0 to 50 K and when the knob is in front of × M mark, it works as a resistance meter of range 0 to 50 × 106 ohm.

When the range switch is in region A, a battery cell of 0.5 V and a suitable resistor whose value is different for × K and × M marks, gets connected in series to the galvanometer.

Procedure

Take a multimeter and plug in the smaller probes of the testing leads into jack sockets marked as positive ( + ) and negative ( – ).

Turn the selector switch in the region A, so that it points towards the small black mark against ×M or ×K. Adjust the zero ohm switch till the pointer of the multimeter comes to the zero mark of the resistance scale (on the extreme right) when the two probes are short-circuited. (a) To identify the base of the transistor:

NEET Physics Class 12 Notes Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments Transistor

In most cases, the central lead of a transistor is base lead but in some cases, it may not be so. To identify the base lead, the two probes to the extreme two legs of the transistor. Note the resistance of the transistor between these two legs.

Now, interchange the probes touching the two extreme legs of the transistor again and note the resistance of the transistor between these legs.

If in both cases the resistance of the transistor is high, then the central leg is the base of the transistor and the two extreme legs are the emitter and collector because the emitter-collector junction offers high resistance in both directions.

But if the resistance is high in one direction and low in the other direction, then one of the extreme legs is the base of the transistor.

To find, which of the extreme legs is base, touch one probe to the other to the central leg. Note the resistance between these two legs. Now interchange the two probes and again note the resistance. In case the resistance is low in one direction and high in another direction, then the left leg is the base otherwise the right leg is the base of the transistor.

To find whether the given transistor is N-P-N or P-N-P

First, find the base of the transistor as explained above

Now touch the probe of black wire to the base and the probe of the red wire to any one of the
remaining two legs and note the resistance from the multimeter.

In case the resistance of the transistor is low, it is an N-P-N transistor, otherwise P-N-P

Flow of current in junction diode:

Touch the two probes of the multimeter with the two legs of the diode and note the value of resistance. Now interchange the two probes and note the resistance. If in one case resistance is low and in another case resistance is high, then it shows the unidirectional flow of current through a junction diode.

The flow of current in an L.E.D.

Touch the two probes of the multimeter with the two legs of the L.E.D. and note the value of resistance. Now interchange the two probes and note the resistance. If in one case resistance is low and in another case resistance is high, also the L.E.D. will glow by emitting light when its resistance is low, then it shows the unidirectional flow of current through an L.E.D.

Check whether the given diode or transistor is in working order:

Set the multimeter as resistance meter as explained in steps 1 and 2. Now touch the probes with the two legs of the junction diode and note the value of resistance. Now interchange the probes and again note the resistance. If in one case resistance is low and in the second case resistance is high, then the junction diode is in working order. If in both cases the resistance is then the junction diode is spoilt.

Class 12 NEET Physics Measurement Errors and Experiments Notes

For A Transistor

Confirm the base, emitter, and collector of the given transistor. Find the resistance of the E-B junction and B-C junction using the multimeter, keeping in mind either the given transistor is P-N-P or N-P-N. again find the resistance of the E-B junction and the B-C junction by interchanging the probes.

If in both directions the resistances of both the junctions come to be low, then the given transistor is spoiled if in one direction resistance is low while in the other direction, the resistance is high, showing that the transistor is working order.

Percautions:

The following precautions should be observed while using a multimeter.

The electrical quantity to be measured should be confirmed each time before starting the measurement otherwise the multimeter may get damaged if one starts measuring voltage and the selector switch is in the region of current or resistance etc.

The instrument should not be exposed to high temperatures and moisture for a long time, otherwise, it will get damaged.

When the order of the magnitude of voltage or current is not known, measurement is always started on the highest range and then an adequate lower range is selected in gradual steps.

while handling high voltages, probes should be held from their insulating covers.

Due to the high sensitivity of the instruments, they should not be given big shocks/vibrations.

Batteries out of life should be immediately replaced by new ones. Otherwise, components inside will get corroded by leakage of the electrolyte.

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 2 Measurement Errors And Experiments Multiple Choice Questions

Chapter 2 Measurement Errors And Experiments MCQs

Question 1. Using a screw gauge, the observation of the diameter of a wire is 1.324, 1.326, 1.334, and 1.336 cm respectively. Find the average diameter, the mean error, the relative error, and the % error.
Answer: \(\overline{\mathrm{D}}=1.330 \mathrm{~cm}, \overline{\Delta \mathrm{D}}=0.005 \mathrm{~cm}\) = 1, Relative error = + 0.004 %, error = 0.4%

Question 2. Round off the following numbers within three significant figures –

  1. 0.03927 kg
  2. 4.085 x 108 sec
  3. 5.2354 m
  4. 4.735 x 10–6 kg

Answer:

  1. 0.0393 kg
  2. 4.08 x 108 sec
  3. 5.24 m
  4. 4.74 x 10–6 kg

Question 3. If a tuning fork of frequency (f0) 340 Hz and tolerance ± 1% is used in the resonance column method [v = 2f 0 (l2 – l1)], the first and the second resonance are measured at l1 = 24.0 cm and l2 = 74.0 cm. Find max—permissible error in speed of sound.
Answer: 1.4%

Measurement and Errors NEET Physics Class 12 MCQs

Chapter 2 Measurement Errors And Experiments MCQs Part -2 Only One Option Correct Type

Question 1. The length of a rectangular plate is measured by a meter scale and is found to be 10.0 cm. Its width is measured by vernier calipers as 1.00 cm. The least count of the meter scale and vernier calipers are 0.1 cm and 0.01 cm respectively (Obviously). Maximum permissible error in area measurement is –

  1. + 0.2 cm²
  2. + 0.1 cm²
  3. + 0.3 cm²
  4. Zero

Answer: 1. + 0.2 cm²

Question 2. In the previous question, the minimum possible error in area measurement can be

  1. + 0.02 cm²
  2. + 0.01 cm²
  3. + 0.03 cm²
  4. Zero

Answer: 4. Zero

Question 3. For a cubical block, the error in the measurement of sides is + 1%, and the error in the measurement of mass is + 2%, the maximum possible error in density is –

  1. 1%
  2. 5%
  3. 3%
  4. 7%

Answer: 2. 1%

Question 4. To estimate ‘g’ (from \(\mathrm{g}=4 \pi^2 \frac{\mathrm{L}}{\mathrm{T}^2}\) error in measurement of L is ± 2% and error in measurement of T is + 3%. The error in estimated ‘g’ will be

  1. ± 8%
  2. ± 6%
  3. ± 3%
  4. ± 5%

Answer: 1. ± 8%

Question 5. The least count of a stopwatch is 0.2 seconds. The time of 20 oscillations of a pendulum is measured to be 25 seconds. The percentage error in the period is

  1. 16%
  2. 0.8 %
  3. 1.8 %
  4. 8 %

Answer: 1. 16%

Question 6. The dimensions of a rectangular block measured with vernier calipers having the least count of 0.1 mm are 5 mm × 10 mm × 5 mm. The maximum percentage error in the measurement of the volume of the block is

  1. 5 %
  2. 10 %
  3. 15 %
  4. 20 %

Answer: 1. 5 %

Question 7. An experiment measures quantities x, y, z, and then t is calculated from the data as \(t=\frac{x y^2}{z^3}\) If percentage errors in x, y, and z are respectively 1%, 3%, 2%, then percentage error in t is :

  1. 10 %
  2. 4 %
  3. 7 %
  4. 13 %

Answer: 4. 13 %

Question 8. The external and internal diameters of a hollow cylinder are measured to be (4.23 ± 0.01) cm and (3.89 ± 0.01) cm. The thickness of the wall of the cylinder is

  1. (0.34 ± 0.02) cm
  2. (0.17 ± 0.02) cm
  3. (0.17 ± 0.01) cm
  4. (0.34 ± 0.01) cm

Answer: 3. (0.17 ± 0.01) cm

Question 9. The mass of a ball is 1.76 kg. The mass of 25 such balls is

  1. 0.44 × 103 kg
  2. 44.0 kg
  3. 44 kg
  4. 44.00 kg

Answer: 2. 44.0 kg

Class 12 NEET Physics Measurement Errors MCQs

Question 10. Two resistors R1 (24 ± 0.5)  and R2 (8 ± 0.3)  are joined in series. The equivalent resistance is

  1. 32 ± 0.33 Ω
  2. 32 ± 0.8Ω
  3. 32 ± 0.2 Ω
  4. 32 ± 0.5 Ω

Answer: 2. 32 ± 0.8Ω

Question 11. The pitch of a screw gauge is 0.5 mm and there are 100 divisions on its circular scale. The instrument reads +2 divisions when nothing is put in between its jaws. In measuring the diameter of a wire, there are 8 divisions on the main scale and 83rd division coincides with the reference line. Then the diameter of the wire is

  1. 4.05 mm
  2. 4.405 mm
  3. 3.05 mm
  4. 1.25 mm

Answer: 2. 4.405 mm

Question 12. The pitch of a screw gauge having 50 divisions on its circular scale is 1 mm. When the two jaws of the screw gauge are in contact with each other, the zero of the circular scale lies 6 divisions below the line of graduation. When a wire is placed between the jaws, 3 linear scale divisions are visible while the 31st division on the circular scale coincides with the reference line. The diameter of the wire is :

  1. 3.62 mm
  2. 3.50 mm
  3. 3.5 mm
  4. 3.74 mm

Answer: 4. 3.74 mm

Question 13. The smallest division on the main scale of vernier calipers is 1 mm, and 10 vernier divisions coincide with 9 main scale divisions. While measuring the diameter of a sphere, the zero mark of the vernier scale lies between 2.0 and 2.1 cm and the fifth division of the vernier scale coincides with a scale division. The diameter of the sphere is

  1. 2.05 cm
  2. 3.05 cm
  3. 2.50 cm
  4. None of these

Answer: 1. 2.05 cm

Question 14. You are given two unknown resistors X and Y. These resistances are to be determined, using an ammeter of R A = 0.5 and a voltmeter of Rv = 20 k. It is known that X is in the range of a few ohms and Y is in the range of several kiloohms. Which circuit is preferable to measure X and Y: Resistor Circuit

  1. x (a) y (b)
  2. x → (a), y → (b) x → (b), y → (a)
  3. x → (a), y → (a) x → (b), y → (b)

Answer: 2. x → (a), y → (b) x → (b), y → (a)

Question 15. The main scale of the vernier calipers reads 10 mm in 10 divisions. 10 divisions of the Vernier scale coincide with 9 divisions of the main scale. When a cylinder is tightly placed between the two jaws, the zero of the vernier scale lies slightly behind 3.2 cm and the fourth vernier division coincides with a main scale division. The diameter of the cylinder is :

  1. 3.09 cm
  2. 3.14 cm
  3. 3.04 cm
  4. 3.03 cm

Answer: 2. 3.14 cm

Question 16. Two resistances are measured in Ohm.

  • R1 = 3Ω ± 1%
  • R2 = 6Ω ± 2%

When they are connected in parallel, the maximum percentage error in equivalent resistance is x. Find 3x.

  1. 4
  2. 5
  3. 7
  4. 9

Answer: 1. 4

Question 17. The edge of a cube is a = 1.2 10−2 m. Then its volume will be recorded as:

  1. 1.72 x 10−6 m3
  2. 1.728 x 10−6 m3
  3. 1.7 x 10−6 m3
  4. 1.73 x 10−6 m3

Answer: 3. 1.7 x 10−6 m3

Question 18. In the shown arrangement of the experiment of the meter bridge if the length AC corresponding to the null deflection of the galvanometer is x, what would be its value if the radius of the wire AB is doubled? 

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments MCQs The radius of the wire AB

  1. x
  2. x/4
  3. 4x
  4. 2x

Answer: 1. X

MCQs on Measurement Errors and Experiments NEET Physics Class 12

Question 19. In the post office arrangement to determine the value of unknown resistance, the unknown resistance should be connected between:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments MCQs The post office arrangement

  1. B and C
  2. C and D
  3. A and D
  4. B1 and C

Answer: 3. A and D

Question 20. A wire has a mass (0.3 ± 0.003)g, radius (0.5 ± 0.005)mm and length (6 ± 0.06)cm. The maximum percentage error in the measurement of its density is:

  1. 1
  2. 2
  3. 3
  4. 4

Answer: 4. 4

Question 21. A student experiments determination of \(\left(=\frac{4 \pi^2 \ell}{\mathrm{T}^2}\right), \ell \approx 1 \mathrm{~m}\), and he commits an error of Δl. For T he takes the time of n oscillations with the stopwatch of least count ΔT and he commits a human error of 0.1 sec. For which of the following data, the measurement of g will be most accurate?

  1. ΔL = 0.5, ΔT = 0.1, n = 20
  2. ΔL = 0.5, ΔT = 0.1, n = 50
  3. ΔL = 0.5, ΔT = 0.01, n = 20
  4. ΔL = 0.1, ΔT = 0.05, n = 50

Answer: 4. ΔL = 0.1, ΔT = 0.05, n = 50

Question 22. A resistance of 2 is connected across one gap of a metre-bridge (the length of the wire is 100 cm) and an unknown resistance, greater than 2, is connected across the other gap. When these resistances are interchanged, the balance point shifts by 20 cm. Neglecting any corrections, the unknown resistance is

Answer: 1. 3Ω

Question 23. A vernier caliper has 1 mm marks on the main scale. It has 20 equal divisions on the Vernier scale which match with 16 main scale divisions. For this Vernier calipers, the least count is:

  1. 0.02 mm
  2. 0.05 mm
  3. 0.1 mm
  4. 0.2 mm

Answer: 4. 0.2 mm

Question 24. A meter bridge is set up as shown, to determine an unknown resistance ‘X’ using a standard 10 ohm resistor. The galvanometer shows a null point when the tapping key is at the 52 cm mark. The end-corrections are 1 cm and 2 cm respectively for the ends A and B. The determined value of ‘X’ is:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments MCQs A meter bridge is set-up as shown, to determine an unknown resistance ‘X’

  1. 10.2 ohm
  2. 10.6 ohm
  3. 10.8 ohm
  4. 11.1 ohm

Answer: 2. 10.6 ohm

Question 25. Unit of diploe moment is:

  1. -amp-m
  2. coulomb-m
  3. amp-m²
  4. coulomb-m²

Answer: 2. coulomb-m

Question 26. The length, breadth, and thickness of a block are given by l = 12cm, b = 6 cm, and t = 2.45 cm. The volume of the block according to the idea of significant figures should be:

  1. 1× 102 cm3
  2. 2 × 102 cm3
  3. 1.763 × 102 cm3
  4. None of these

Answer: 2. 2 × 102 cm3

Question 27. An ice cube of density 900 kg/m 3 is floating in water of density 1000 kg/m 3. The percentage of the volume of ice-cube outside the water is:

  1. 20%
  2. 35%
  3. 10%
  4. None of these

Answer: 3. 10%

NEET Physics Chapter 2 Measurement Errors and Experiments MCQs

Question 28. In an experiment four quantities a, b, c, and d are measured with percentage errors 1%, 2%, 3%, and 4% respectively. Quantity P is calculated as follows :

  1. 10%
  2. 7%
  3. 4%
  4. 14%

Answer: 4. 14%

Question 29. An experiment measures quantities a, b, c, and x calculated from x = If the percentage errors in a, b, c are ± 1%, ± 3%, and ± 2% respectively.

  1. The percentage error in x can be ± 13%
  2. The percentage error in x can be ± 30%
  3. The percentage error in x can be ± 20%
  4. The percentage error in x can be ± 26%

Answer: 1. The percentage error in x can be ± 13%

Question 30. If the error in the measurement of the radius of a sphere is 2%, then the error in the determination of the volume of the sphere will be

  1. 4%
  2. 6%
  3. 8%
  4. 2%

Answer: 2. 6%

Exercise- 2

Question 1. The number of circular divisions on the shown screw gauge is 50. It moves 0.5 mm on the main scale for one complete rotation. The main scale reading is 2. The diameter of the ball is:

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments MCQs The number of circular divisions on the shown screw gauge is 50.

  1. 2.25 mm
  2. 2.20 mm
  3. 1.20 mm
  4. 1.25 mm

Answer: 3. 1.20 mm

Question 2. A student experiments to determine the Young’s modulus of a wire, exactly 2 m long, by Searle’s method. In a particular reading, the student measures the extension in the length of the wire to be 0.8 mm with an uncertainty of ±0.05 mm at a load of exactly 1.0 kg. The student also measures the diameter of the wire to be 0.4 mm with an uncertainty of ±0.01 mm. Take g = 9.8 m/s2 (exact). The Young’s modulus obtained from the reading is

  1. (2.0 ± 0.3) × 1011 N/m2
  2. (2.0 ± 0.2) × 1011 N/m2
  3. (2.0 ± 0.1) × 1011 N/m2
  4. (2.0 ± 0.05) × 1011 N/m2

Answer: 2. (2.0 ± 0.2) × 1011 N/m22

Question 3. Students 1, 2, and 3 experiment with measuring the acceleration due to gravity (g) using a simple pendulum. They use different lengths of the pendulum and /or record time for different numbers of oscillations. The observations are shown in the table. Least count for length = 0.1 cm Least count for time = 0.1 s If Eg 100 1, E2and E3 are the percentage errors in g, i.e., for students 1 2, and 3, respectively,

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 2 Measurment Error And Expreriments MCQsThe acceleration due to gravity

  1. E1 = 0
  2. E1 is minimum
  3. E1 = E2
  4. E2 is maximum

Answer: 2. E1 is minimum

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 2: Errors in Measurements MCQs

Question 4. The density of a solid ball is to be determined in an experiment. The diameter of the ball is measured with a screw gauge, whose pitch is 0.5 mm and there are 50 divisions on the circular scale. The reading on the main scale is 2.5 mm and that on the circular scale is 20 divisions. If the measured mass of the ball has a relative error of 2%, the relative percentage error in the density is

  1. 0.9%
  2. 2.4%
  3. 3.1%
  4. 4.2%

Answer: 3. 3.1%

Question 5. Consider vernier calipers in which each 1 cm on the main scale is divided into 8 equal divisions and a screw gauge with 100 divisions on its circular scale. In the vernier calipers, 5 divisions of the vernier scale coincide with 4 divisions on the main scale, and in the screw gauge, one complete rotation of the circular scale moves it by two divisions on the linear scale. Then,

  1. If the pitch of the screw gauge is twice the least count of the Vernier calipers, the least count of the screw gauge is 0.01mm.
  2. If the pitch of the screw gauge is twice the least count of the Vernier calipers, the least count of the screw gauge is 0.005mm.
  3. If the least count of the linear scale of the screw gauge is twice the least count of the vernier calipers, the least count of the screw gauge is 0.005 mm.
  4. None of these

Answer: 2. If the pitch of the screw gauge is twice the least count of the Vernier calipers, the least count of the screw gauge is 0.005mm.

Question 6. The energy of a system as a function of time t is given as E(t) = A2 exp(–at), where a = 0.2s–1. The measurement of A has an error of 1.25%. If the error in the measurement of time is 1.50%, the percentage error in the value of E(t) at t = 5 s is

  1. 1
  2. 2
  3. 3
  4. 4

Answer: 4. 4

Question 7. A body of uniform cross-sectional area floats in a liquid of density thrice its value. The fraction of exposed height will be:

  1. 2/3
  2. 5/6
  3. 1/6
  4. 1/3

Answer: 1. 2/3

Question 8. A meter bridge is used to find the resistance of a wire using a standard resistance 20 with 0.5% tolerance. The unknown resistance is placed in the left gap of the meter bridge. The null point is obtained at 60.0 cm from the left end. The maximum permissible error in this measurement is 0.1 cm. Find the maximum error in the measurement of the resistance.

  1. 0.37Ω
  2. 0.35Ω
  3. 0.20Ω
  4. 0.27Ω

Answer: 4. 0.27Ω

Question 9. Two full turns of the circular scale of a screw gauge cover a distance of 1mm on its main scale. The total number of divisions on the circular scale is 50. Further, it is found that the screw gauge has a zero error of –0.03 mm. While measuring the diameter of a thin wire, a student notes the main scale reading of 3 mm and the number of circular scale divisions in line with the main scale as 35. The diameter of the wire is:

  1. 3.32 mm
  2. 3.73 mm
  3. 3.67 mm
  4. 3.38 mm

Answer: 4. 3.38 mm

Measurement and Error Analysis MCQs for NEET Physics

Question 10. An experiment is performed to find the refractive index of glass using a traveling microscope. In this experiment, distance is measured by

  1. A vernier scale provided on the microscope
  2. A standard laboratory scale
  3. A metal scale provided on the microscope
  4. A screw gauge provided on the microscope

Answer: 1. A vernier scale provided on the microscope

Chapter 2 Measurement Errors And Experiments MCQs Part – 1: Neet / Aipmt Question (Previous Years)

Question 1. A student measures the distance traversed in free fall of a body, initially at rest, in a given time. He uses this data to estimate g, the acceleration due to gravity. If the maximum percentage errors in the measurement of the distance and the time are e 1 and e2 respectively, the percentage error in the estimation of g is

  1. e2 – e1
  2. e1 + 2e2
  3. e1 + e
  4. e1 – 2e2

Answer: 2. e1 + 2e2

Question 2. In an experiment, the percentage of error that occurred in the measurement of physical quantities A, B, C, and D are 1%, 2%, 3%, and 4% respectively. Then the maximum percentage of error in the measurement X, where X = \(X=\frac{A^2 B^{1 / 2}}{C^{1 / 3} D^3}\) will be

  1. 10%
  2. \(\left(\frac{3}{13}\right) \%\)
  3. 16%
  4. 10%

Answer: 3. \(\left(\frac{3}{13}\right) \%\)

Question 3. The main scale of vernier calipers has n divisions/cm. n division of the vernier scale coincides with (n – 1) divisions of the main scale. The least count of the vernier calipers is :

  1. \(\frac{1}{(n+1)(n-1)} c m\)
  2. \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{n}} \mathrm{cm}\)
  3. \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{n}^2} \mathrm{~cm}\)
  4. \(\frac{1}{n(n+1)} \mathrm{cm}\)

Answer: 3. \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{n}^2} \mathrm{~cm}\)

Chapter 2 Measurement Errors And Experiments MCQs Part – 2: Jee (Main) / AIEEE Problems (Previous Years)

Question 1. In an experiment, the angles are required to be measured using an instrument. 29 divisions of the main scale exactly coincide with the 30 divisions of the vernier scale. If the smallest division of the main scale is half a degree ( 0.5°), then the least count of the instrument is:

  1. Half minute
  2. One degree
  3. Half degree
  4. One minute

Answer: 4. One minute

NEET Physics Class 12 Chapter 2 Multiple Choice Questions

Question 2. In an optics experiment, with the position of the object fixed, a student varies the position of the convex lens and for each position, the screen is adjusted to get a clear image of the object. A graph between the object distance u and the image distance v, from the lens, is plotted using the same scale for the two axes. A straight line passing through the origin and making an angle of 45° with the x-axis meets the experimental curve at P. The coordinates of P will be:

  1. \(\left(\frac{\mathrm{f}}{2}, \frac{\mathrm{f}}{2}\right)\)
  2. (f, f)
  3. (4f, 4f)
  4. (2f, 2f)

Answer: 4. (2f, 2f)

Question 3. The respective number of significant figures for the numbers 23.023, 0.0003, and 2.1 × 10–3 are

  1. 5, 1, 2
  2. 5, 1, 5
  3. 5, 5, 2
  4. 4, 4, 2

Answer: 1. 5, 1, 2

Question 4. 4. A screw gauge gives the following reading when used to measure the diameter of a wire.

  • Main scale reading : 0 mm
  • Circular scale reading: 52 division
  • Given that 1 mm on the main scale corresponds to 100 divisions of the circular scale.

The diameter of the wire from the above data is:

  1. 0.52 cm
  2. 0.052 cm
  3. 0.026 cm
  4. 0.005 cm

Answer: 2. 0.052 cm

Question 5. If 400Ω of resistance is made by adding four 100 Ω resistances of tolerance 5%, then the tolerance of the combination is:

  1. 5%
  2. 10 %
  3. 15 %
  4. 20 %

Answer: 1. 5%

Question 6. The period of oscillation of a simple pendulum is T = 2g. The measured value of L is 20.0 cm known as 1 mm accuracy and the time for 100 oscillations of the pendulum is found to be 90s using a wristwatch of 1s resolution. The accuracy in the determination of g is:

  1. 2%
  2. 3%
  3. 1%
  4. 5%

Answer: 2. 3%

Question 7. The density of a material in the shape of a cube is determined by measuring three sides of the cube and its mass. If the relative errors in measuring the mass and length are respectively 1.5% and 1%, the maximum error in determining the density is:

  1. 4.5%
  2. 6%
  3. 2.5%
  4. 3.5 %

Answer: 1. 4.5%

Physics Measurement Errors MCQs for NEET

Question 8. The pitch and the number of divisions, on the circular scale, for a given screw gauge are 0.5 mm and 100 respectively. When the screw gauge is fully tightened without any object, the zero of its circular scale lies 3 divisions below the mean line. The readings of the main scale and the circular scale, for a thin sheet are 5.5 mm and 48 respectively, the thickness of this sheet is :

  1. 5.740 mm
  2. 5.950 mm
  3. 5.725 mm
  4. 5.755 mm

Answer: 4. 5.755 mm

Question 9. Expression for time in terms of G (universal gravitational constant), h (Planck constant), and c (speed of light) is proportional to:

  1. \(\sqrt{\frac{h c^5}{G}}\)
  2. \(\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{Gh}}{\mathrm{c}^3}}\)
  3. \(\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{Gh}}{\mathrm{c}^3}}\)
  4. \(\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{Gh}}{\mathrm{c}^3}}\)

Answer: 4. \(\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{Gh}}{\mathrm{c}^3}}\)

Question 10. The diameter and height of a cylinder are measured by a meter scale to be 12.6 ± 0.1 cm and 34.2 ± 0.1 cm, respectively. What will be the value of its volume in the appropriate significant figure?

  1. 4264 ± 81 cm³
  2. 4300 ± 80 cm³
  3. 4260 ± 80 cm³
  4. 4264.4 ± 81.0 cm³

Answer: 3. 4260 ± 80 cm

Question 11. The least count of the main scale of a screw gauge is 1 mm. The minimum number of divisions on its circular scale required to measure the 5m diameter of a wire is:

  1. 200
  2. 50
  3. 500
  4. 100

Answer: 1. 200

Question 12. In a simple pendulum experiment for the determination of acceleration due to gravity (g), the time taken for 20 oscillations is measured by using a watch of 1 second least count. The mean value of time taken comes out to be 30 seconds. The length of the pendulum is measured by using a meter scale of least count 1 mm and the value obtained is 55.0 cm. The percentage error in the determination of g is close to:

  1. 0.2%
  2. 0.7%
  3. 6.8 %
  4. 3.5 %

Answer: 3. 6.8 %

NEET Physics MCQs on Measurement and Experimental Errors

Question 13. In the density measurement of a cube, the mass and edge length are measured as (10.00 0.10) kg and (0.10  0.01) m, respectively. The error in the measurement of density is:

  1. 0.07 kg/m³
  2. 0.10 kg/m³
  3. 0.01 kg/m³
  4. 0.31 kg/m³

Answer: 4. 0.31 kg/m³

Question 14. The area of a square is 5.29 cm². The area of 7 such squares taking into account the significant figures is:

  1. 37.0 cm²
  2. 37 cm²
  3. 37.03 cm²
  4. 37.030 cm²

Answer: 3. 37.03 cm²